Download - North Carolina A&T State University
Download - North Carolina A&T State University
Download - North Carolina A&T State University
Create successful ePaper yourself
Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.
<strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong><br />
Agricultural and Technical<br />
<strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong><br />
GRADUATE TEACHING<br />
ASSISTANT HANDBOOK
Graduate Teaching Assistant<br />
Handbook<br />
Produced by<br />
A. Ayanna Boyd-Williams<br />
Assistant Dean for Graduate Studies<br />
Graphic Design by Vicki Cruise
<strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong><br />
Graduate Teaching Assistant Handbook<br />
II<br />
TABLE OF CONTENTS<br />
FORWARD:<br />
GREETING FROM THE DEAN OF GRADUATE S TUDIES...................................V<br />
INTRODUCTION .....................................................................................................................1<br />
SECTION I:<br />
WHAT IT MEANS TO BE AGRADUATE TEACHING ASSISTANT (GTA) AT<br />
NC A&T S TATE UNIVERSITY.....................................................................1<br />
Types of GTARoles and Duties.......................................................2<br />
Standards for GTAs Knowledge, Skills & Attitudes Necessary<br />
to Be an Effective GTA ....................................................................4<br />
Setting Boundaries and Limits .........................................................9<br />
SECTION II:<br />
INTERNATIONAL GRADUATE TEACHING ASSISTANTS....................................10<br />
Language Requirements ................................................................10<br />
Cultural Dimensions.......................................................................10<br />
Benefits of Having a Mentor...........................................................11<br />
Resources For Additional Advice ...................................................13<br />
SECTION III: FOUNDATIONS OF GOOD TEACHING .........................................................14<br />
The 10 Commandments of Teaching.............................................15<br />
Effective Instruction........................................................................15<br />
Traits of Effective Teachers............................................................18<br />
What Can Graduate Students Do To Be More Effective GTAs?....20<br />
Modes of Teaching.........................................................................21<br />
Dimensions of Effective Teaching..................................................22<br />
Teaching Methods and Active Learning.........................................23<br />
Tying Teaching Methods to Objectives .........................................24<br />
Classroom Situations to Consider .................................................26<br />
SECTION IV:<br />
GETTING S TARTED.................................................................................28<br />
Orientation to Teaching at N. C. A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>...................28<br />
Checklist for Teaching....................................................................29<br />
Establishing the Classroom Climate..............................................33<br />
Course Planning & Design.............................................................35<br />
Suggestions for the First Day of Class..........................................37<br />
Diversity in the Classroom.............................................................39
SECTION V. HELPING S TUDENTS LEARN ....................................................................44<br />
Helping Students Learn..................................................................44<br />
How Students Learn.......................................................................46<br />
Learning Styles and Preferences...................................................46<br />
Principles for Good Practice in Undergraduate Education ............47<br />
Cooperative Learning.....................................................................51<br />
Adults as Learners.........................................................................52<br />
Time Management in the Classroom.............................................53<br />
III<br />
SECTION VI.<br />
MULTIPLE INSTRUCTIONAL S TRATEGIES, SITUATIONS, TECHNIQUES,<br />
TECHNOLOGIES, AND TOOLS ...................................................................54<br />
Teaching With Technology .............................................................54<br />
Media/Audio-Visual Aids ............................................................55<br />
Computers and Instruction.........................................................59<br />
Incorporating Instructional Technology ..........................................61<br />
Additional Resources on Teaching & Learning..............................61<br />
Teaching Through Discussion........................................................63<br />
Planning a Class (Lecture Guidelines) ..........................................64<br />
Teaching Laboratory Sections........................................................70<br />
Safety Considerations....................................................................73<br />
Strategies to Enhance Learning.....................................................75<br />
Teaching Strategies for a Diverse Student Body ...........................78<br />
Using Your Voice Effectively ..........................................................79<br />
SECTION VII:<br />
GRADES AND CLASSROOM MANAGEMENT.................................................81<br />
Testing and Grading.......................................................................81<br />
Evaluating Student Performance ...................................................94<br />
Keeping Records ...........................................................................95<br />
Advising Students ..........................................................................97<br />
The Role of the TAas a Faculty-Student Liaison ..........................98<br />
Recommending ESL for International Students .............................99<br />
The Teacher - Student Relationship.............................................100<br />
SECTION VIII:<br />
PROFESSIONAL DEVELOPMENT..............................................................102<br />
Reflective Practice .......................................................................104<br />
Feedback from your Students ..................................................105<br />
Links to Additional Resources .................................................107<br />
Instructional Support and Services offered at NC A&T<br />
<strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong> ............................................................................108<br />
Further Reading for Professional Development...........................110<br />
Contact Information for Professional Development .....................110<br />
Preparing a Teaching Portfolio .....................................................111
SECTION IX: UNIVERSITY POLICIES AND PROCEDURES RELATED TO GTAS ...................114<br />
GTAAdministration Policy ............................................................114<br />
Purpose........................................................................................114<br />
Categories................................................................................115<br />
Eligibility ...................................................................................115<br />
Appointment .............................................................................116<br />
Performance Review................................................................117<br />
Conduct & Discipline................................................................117<br />
Compensation..........................................................................117<br />
Grievance Procedures .................................................................118<br />
Guidelines Regarding GTAQualifications....................................118<br />
Professional/Ethical/Legal Responsibilities..................................118<br />
Safety and Emergency Procedures.............................................120<br />
<strong>University</strong>-Based Technology Transfer ........................................123<br />
Student Initiated Programs and Unfunded Projects .....................124<br />
IV<br />
SECTION X: HOW TO HELP GTAS BE S UCCESSFUL .................................................125<br />
Checklist for the Supervising Professor.......................................125<br />
GTA-to-GTAAdvice......................................................................126<br />
Additional On-line Resources for Teaching..................................127<br />
Balancing Your Roles...................................................................128<br />
Frequently Asked Questions by TAs............................................129<br />
REFERENCE GUIDE TO CAMPUS RESOURCES............................................................131<br />
APPENDIX A:<br />
N.C. A&T S TATE UNIVERSITY GRADUATE ASSISTANT EVALUATION<br />
FORM..................................................................................................134<br />
INDEX..................................................................................................................................135
V<br />
Congratulations on becoming a graduate teaching assistant at <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> A&T <strong>State</strong><br />
<strong>University</strong>. This is a unique opportunity to grow professionally and we hope to make it as<br />
valuable an experience as possible.<br />
We believe graduate teaching assistants play a vital role in educating undergraduate<br />
students at A&T and recognize the value of the experience that graduate teaching assistants<br />
gain as they develop and refine their teaching skills. We also acknowledge the challenges that<br />
graduate teaching assistants face as they serve in a teaching role while balancing their own<br />
course loads in graduate studies.<br />
The Office of Graduate Studies and members of the Teaching Assistant Advisory<br />
Committee have worked diligently to develop a handbook that is pertinent, comprehensive,<br />
and offers advice and guidance on issues that affect graduate teaching assistants in general. We<br />
hope you find it a valuable tool as you make your way into what can be an enriching experience<br />
in your academic career.<br />
Good luck, and I hope you enjoy the challenges and opportunities you will discover as a<br />
graduate assistant at <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>.<br />
Dr. Kenneth H. Murray<br />
o<br />
Associate Vice Chancellor for Academic Affairs and<br />
Dean of Graduate Studies
PREFACE<br />
VI<br />
This handbook is provided as part of a four (4) phase comprehensive approach to training Graduate<br />
Teaching Assistants (GTAs) at <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> Agricultural and Technical <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong> in<br />
Greensboro, <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong>. The comprehensive training begins with a Summer Institute for<br />
Graduate Assistants, followed by supplemental training and support at the departmental level,<br />
on-going workshops throughout the academic year, and access to an on-line interactive handbook<br />
and CD as a reference and resource guide.<br />
The Graduate Teaching Assistant Handbook was produced with the support of a FUTURES Ventures<br />
Seed grant at <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>.<br />
The articles included in the handbook are based on information collected from a survey of graduate<br />
teaching assistants at A&T, feedback from students attending Effective Teaching Training Workshops,<br />
information collected from over fifty (50) universities, extensive discussions at the Graduate Teaching<br />
Assistant Advisory Committee meetings, and comments from graduate academic departments<br />
regarding graduate teaching assistant effectiveness and training.<br />
The edited collection is addressed particularly to graduate students who have teaching responsibilities<br />
at <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong> but also has practical relevance to anyone who is either<br />
currently engaged in teaching or interested in an academic career. The handbook will also be of value<br />
to supervisors of teaching assistants, as well as school administrators.<br />
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS<br />
I would like to take this opportunity to thank Chancellor James C. Renick, members of the<br />
FUTURES Planning and Resource Council, and the 2003-2004 FUTURES Review Committee for<br />
funding this project through the FUTURES Ventures Seed grant. I would also like to thank members<br />
of the Graduate Teaching Advisory Committee for their tireless effort in reviewing the volume of<br />
information collected and for providing critical feedback to help streamline the process. We owe a<br />
special thanks to Dr. Lelia Vickers and the faculty of the School of Education, as well as the other<br />
contributors for accepting our invitation to use their expertise in providing information for the<br />
handbook and for putting up with the friendly e-mail reminders about the deadline. I would also like<br />
to thank the many universities that we contacted for feedback about what they had in place to train<br />
graduate teaching assistants and for their generous permission to allow us to reference their materials<br />
throughout the document. Special thanks are extended to Dr. Michele Levy, Dr. Jane Brown and Mrs.<br />
Ruby Carlson for reviewing and proofing the document. I would also like to thank Miss Swapna<br />
Kanury for her technical expertise and assistance in preparing the document for on-line access.<br />
I am especially indebted to Susan Payne, not only for efficiently researching, collecting and<br />
organizing the information, but also for her invaluable input and suggestions. I would also like to<br />
thank Dr. Kenneth Murray for his on-going support of the project. Last, but not least, special thanks<br />
to our graduate students, particularly Mrs. Terese Coon and other graduate teaching assistants for<br />
providing the initial feedback that provided the impetus for the development of a graduate teaching<br />
assistant handbook.
FUTURES<br />
PLANNING AND RESOURCE<br />
COUNCIL 2002-03<br />
VII<br />
Dr. Janice Brewington<br />
Interim Associate Vice Chancellor for Academic<br />
Affairs-Institutional Planning, Research and<br />
Assessment<br />
Mrs. Deloris Chisley<br />
Program Director, IBM Corp.<br />
Dr. Quiester Craig<br />
Dean, School of Business and Economics<br />
Mrs. Mona Edwards<br />
Senior Operations Manager<br />
Center for Creative Leadership<br />
Mr. Tommy Ellis, Jr.<br />
Vice Chancellor for Business and Finance<br />
Nashett Garrett<br />
President, Student Government Association<br />
Dr. Colleen Grotsky<br />
Executive Assistant to the Chancellor<br />
Mr. Rodney Harrigan<br />
Vice Chancellor for Information Technology<br />
and Chief Information Officer<br />
Mr. David Hoard<br />
Vice Chancellor for <strong>University</strong> Relations<br />
and Development<br />
Dr. Alvin Keyes<br />
Chair, Faculty Senate<br />
Psychology Department<br />
Dr. Wanda Lester<br />
Assistant Dean, School of Business and Economics<br />
Ms. Albertina McGirt<br />
President Staff Senate<br />
Upward Bound<br />
Dr. Carolyn Meyers<br />
Provost & Vice Chancellor for Academic Affairs<br />
Dr. Peter Meyers<br />
Director, Honors Program<br />
Dr. Samuel Moseley<br />
Associate Professor, Political Science<br />
Dr. Earnestine Psalmonds<br />
Special Assistant to the Chancellor<br />
Mrs. Lesley Renwrick<br />
Special Assistant to the Chancellor for Legal Affairs<br />
Mr. Calvin Riley<br />
Owner, Nehemiah Leadership Company<br />
Dr. Sanjiv Sarin<br />
Associate Dean and Professor, Industrial Engineering<br />
Mrs. Mable Scott<br />
Associate Vice Chancellor for Media Relations<br />
Mr. Obrie Smith<br />
Chairperson, NC A&T Foundation<br />
Dr. Velma Speight-Buford<br />
Secretary, Board of Trustees<br />
Mr. Dennis Stearns<br />
Certified Financial Planner<br />
Stearns Financial Services<br />
Dr. Godfrey Uzochukwu<br />
Director, Waste Management Institute<br />
Dr. Willie Willis<br />
Professor, Animal Science School of Agriculture<br />
Dr. Roselle Wilson<br />
Interim Vice Chancellor for Student Affairs
LIST OF CONTRIBUTORS FOR<br />
GTA HANDBOOK<br />
VIII<br />
Dr. Paul Ankomah<br />
Human Performance and Leisure<br />
Studies<br />
Dr. Patricia Bethea-Whitfield<br />
Human Development and Services<br />
Mrs. A. Ayanna Boyd-Williams<br />
School of Graduate Studies<br />
Dr. Judie Bucholz<br />
Human Development and Services<br />
Dr. Shea D. Burns<br />
Mathematics<br />
Mrs. Terese Coon<br />
Graphic Communication Systems<br />
Dr. Jane Davis-Seaver<br />
Curriculum and Instruction<br />
Mr. Jason DePolo<br />
English<br />
Mr. Marvin Dickerson<br />
ARISA/Environmental Health<br />
and Safety<br />
Dr. Patrice Faison<br />
Curriculum and Instruction<br />
Dr. Marihelen Glass<br />
Landscaping Architecture and<br />
Horticulture<br />
Dr. Anthony Graham<br />
Curriculum and Instruction<br />
Dr. Etta Gravely<br />
Chemistry<br />
Dr. Vallie Guthrie<br />
GAMSEC<br />
Dr. Karen Guy<br />
Curriculum and Instruction<br />
Dr. Brenda Hall<br />
Human Development and Services<br />
Dr. Richard Jackson<br />
Curriculum and Instruction<br />
Dr. Muktha Jost<br />
Curriculum and Instruction<br />
Dr. John Kelly<br />
Computing and Electrical<br />
Engineering<br />
Dr. Rita Lamb<br />
Center for Student Success<br />
Dr. Trent Larson<br />
Human Performance and Leisure<br />
Studies<br />
Dr. Robin Liles<br />
Human Development and Services<br />
Dr. Kenneth Murray<br />
School of Graduate Studies<br />
Dr. Gloria Palma<br />
Human Performance and Leisure<br />
Studies<br />
Mrs. Susan Payne<br />
School of Graduate Studies<br />
Dr. Larry Powers<br />
Curriculum and Instruction<br />
Dr. Kimberly Richards<br />
Human Development and Services<br />
Dr. J. Y Shen<br />
Manufacturing Systems<br />
Dr. Karen Smith-Gratto<br />
Center for Professional<br />
Development<br />
Mr. Doug Speight<br />
Office of Technology Transfer and<br />
Commercialization<br />
Dr. Lelia Vickers<br />
School of Education<br />
Dr. Dawn Waegerle<br />
Human Development and Services<br />
Mr. Marvin Watkins<br />
Division of Research<br />
Administration<br />
Dr. Mulumebet Worku<br />
Animal Sciences<br />
GRADUATE TEACHING ASSISTANT ADVISORY COMMITTEE<br />
Dr. Kenneth H. Murray, Associate Vice Chancellor for Academic Affairs and Dean,<br />
Graduate Studies<br />
Mrs. A. Ayanna Boyd-Williams, Assistant Dean, Graduate Studies and Chair<br />
Dr. Goldie Byrd, Biology<br />
Dr. Erick Cheek, Electrical and Computing Engineering<br />
Dr. Robert Cobb, Graphic Communication Systems<br />
Dr. Marihelen Glass, Landscape Architecture and Horticulture<br />
Dr. Vallie Guthrie, GAMSEC<br />
Dr. John Kelly, Electrical and Computing Engineering<br />
Dr. Dorothy Leflore, Curriculum and Instruction<br />
Dr. Michele Levy, English<br />
Dr. Cynthia Nearman, English<br />
Mrs. Susan Payne, Research Assistant, Graduate Studies<br />
Dr. Leonard Uitenham, Chemical and Mechanical Engineering<br />
Dr. Mulumebet Worku, Animal Sciences
UNIVERSITY CONTACTS<br />
Brown <strong>University</strong><br />
Rebecca S. More, Ph.D.<br />
Sheridan Teaching Center<br />
Director<br />
IX<br />
<strong>University</strong> of<br />
California at Los Angeles<br />
Howard Lee<br />
Office of Instructional<br />
Coordinator Development<br />
TA Training<br />
<strong>University</strong> of California<br />
at San Diego<br />
<strong>University</strong> of California<br />
at Santa Barbara<br />
Rosalind Streichler, Ph.D.<br />
Shirley Ronkowski, Ph.D.<br />
Center for Teaching<br />
Development<br />
Director<br />
Director of<br />
Instructional Development<br />
Clemson <strong>University</strong><br />
<strong>University</strong> of<br />
Connecticut<br />
Linda B. Nilson, Ph.D.<br />
Catherine Ross, Ph.D.<br />
Office of Teaching<br />
Effectiveness and Innovation<br />
TA Programs<br />
Director<br />
Director<br />
Cornell <strong>University</strong><br />
Virleen Carlson, Ph.D.<br />
Center for Learning<br />
and Teaching<br />
Dean<br />
<strong>University</strong> of Delaware<br />
Gabriele Bauer, Ph.D.<br />
Center for Teaching<br />
Effectiveness<br />
Teaching Consultant<br />
<strong>University</strong> of Florida<br />
Linda S. Vivian<br />
The Graduate School<br />
Associate Director<br />
<strong>University</strong> of Georgia<br />
Dr. Kathleen Smith<br />
The Graduate School<br />
TA Program Coordinator<br />
Harvard <strong>University</strong><br />
John Hopkins <strong>University</strong><br />
Iowa <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong><br />
<strong>University</strong> of<br />
Massachusetts-Amherst<br />
<strong>University</strong> of Michigan<br />
<strong>University</strong> of Minnesota<br />
City <strong>University</strong> of<br />
New York<br />
<strong>University</strong> of NC at<br />
Chapel Hill<br />
<strong>University</strong> of NC at<br />
Charlotte<br />
<strong>University</strong> of NC at<br />
Greensboro<br />
Ohio <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong><br />
Penn <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong><br />
Rutgers <strong>University</strong><br />
Stanford <strong>University</strong><br />
Washington <strong>University</strong><br />
<strong>University</strong> of<br />
Washington<br />
Beckie Hunter<br />
Sabrina Raymond<br />
Karen Bovenmyer<br />
Dr. Matthew Ouellett<br />
Earl Lewis<br />
Joyce Weinsheimer<br />
Linda N. Edwards<br />
Donna Bailey<br />
Jill S. Ehling<br />
James Peterson, Ph.D.<br />
Alan Kalish, Ph.D.<br />
Barbara Pennypacker<br />
Barbara E. Bender<br />
Valerie A. Ross, Ph.D.<br />
Elaine Berland, Ph.D.<br />
Brenda J. Kelly or<br />
Donald H. Wulff<br />
The Derek Bok Center<br />
for Teaching and Learning<br />
Krieger School of Arts<br />
and Sciences<br />
Graduate College<br />
Center for Teaching<br />
Rackham School of<br />
Graduate Studies<br />
Center for Teaching and<br />
Learning<br />
The Graduate Center<br />
Center for Teaching<br />
and Learning<br />
School of Graduate Studies<br />
The Graduate School<br />
Office of Faculty and<br />
TA Development<br />
The Graduate School<br />
New Brunswick<br />
Graduate School<br />
Center for Teaching<br />
and Learning<br />
Graduate School of the<br />
Arts and Sciences<br />
Center for Instructional<br />
Development and Research<br />
Program Coordinator<br />
Assistant to Vice<br />
and Dean of Faculty<br />
Program Assistant<br />
Associate Director<br />
Dean<br />
Director<br />
Associate Provost and<br />
Dean Academic Affairs<br />
Director<br />
Assistant Dean<br />
Dean<br />
Director<br />
Assistant Dean<br />
Associate Dean<br />
Associate Director,<br />
Humanities<br />
Associate Dean<br />
Manager or<br />
Director
OVERVIEW OF THE CONTENTS<br />
X<br />
The handbook is divided into ten sections dealing with specific information regarding effective<br />
teaching. Some of the items offer information specific to <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>, while<br />
others provide Internet hyperlinks to resources and articles of other outstanding institutions nationwide.<br />
Permission has been granted by all of the institutions to which links to resources have been made.<br />
Section I provides an overview of what it means to be a graduate student at <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> A&T <strong>State</strong><br />
<strong>University</strong> as it relates to advancing the mission of the university. Highlights of some of the advantages<br />
and challenges that you are likely to face in your role as a GTA are noted. The roles and responsibilities<br />
of the various types of graduate assistants are defined and discussed by Dr. John Kelly. Dr. J.Y. Shen<br />
provides a detailed description of the ten standards that are used to ensure the basic competency of<br />
GTAs at A&T. These ten standards are based on the standards established for teachers in public schools<br />
in <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> and reflect the requisite knowledge, skills, and attitudes necessary to effectively and<br />
successfully carry out their responsibilities as educators.<br />
The articles in Section II address the challenges facing international graduate teaching assistants. An<br />
overview of the language requirements for international graduate students applying as graduate teaching<br />
assistants is presented. Dr. Judie Bucholz provides a definition of culture and discusses some of the<br />
challenges instructors face in making diversity in the classroom work to their advantage. Dr. Mulumebet<br />
Worku offers specific suggestions on how international graduate students can take advantage of mentors<br />
and other services at the university to facilitate their transition to a GTA.<br />
Section III focuses on the fundamentals of effective teaching. Dr. Lelia Vickers begins with an overview<br />
of the basic concepts involved in being an effective teacher. Dr. Marihelen Glass lists the 10 tenets of<br />
good teaching. Dr. Larry Powers discusses the need to develop an instructional paradigm that includes<br />
planning, monitoring student progress, and effective communication skills. Dr. Richard Jackson lists<br />
traits that can have a negative impact on student learning. Dr. Brenda Hall and Dr. Jane Davis-Seavers,<br />
provide information on methods and styles of teaching that promote active learning. Dr. Dawn Waegerle<br />
describes various philosophical approaches that link learning with planned outcome measures. Dr. Judie<br />
Bucholz provides tips on how to handle various situations that many GTA may face in the classroom.<br />
Section IV includes information to help you get started. Assistant Dean A. Ayanna Boyd-Williams<br />
discusses the orientation and training program for GTAs at A&T. A checklist of things to do and people<br />
to contact before you begin your assignment is provided. Dr. Godfrey Uzochukwu provides helpful<br />
information on how to conduct a class. Dr. Kimberly Richards provides information on developing a<br />
positive classroom environment. Dr. Paul Ankomah suggests potential sources of information for<br />
planning and designing a course. Dr. Etta Gravely outlines suggestions on what to do during the first day<br />
of class. Dr. Muktha Jost presents information on dealing with the multiplicity of diversity issues in the<br />
classroom.<br />
Section V deals with helping students to learn. Dr. Trent Larson and Dr. Richard Jackson present<br />
strategies on how to help students learn. Dr. Kimberly Richards lists seven principles that can be used to<br />
enhance the learning experience of both the student and the GTA. Dr. Jane Davis-Seavers discusses<br />
using collaborative groups to foster cooperative learning. The special needs of the adult learner are<br />
identified by Dr. Judie Bucholz. Dr. Muktha Jost presents information on effectively managing the time<br />
allotted for each class.
Section VI identifies the various instructional tools available to enhance the learning process. Dr. Karen<br />
Smith-Gratto provides a list of audio, visual and motion media and suggests strategies for utilizing each<br />
instructional technique. Dr. Marihelen Glass offers tips for developing good discussion sessions.<br />
Dr. Kenneth Murray presents information guidelines for giving effective lectures. Dr. Vallie Guthrie<br />
provides useful information on teaching and managing laboratory sections. Information on laboratory<br />
and classroom safety guidelines is presented by Dr. Etta Gravely. Dr. Anthony Graham presents a list of<br />
recommended instructional strategies based on learning modalities. Dr. Gloria Palma suggests strategies<br />
for teaching culturally and linguistically diverse students in the classroom. Dr. Robin Guill Liles<br />
discusses the importance of self-discovery in understanding teaching responsibilities and identifies three<br />
basic elements needed to help teaching assistants create and refine their effective voices.<br />
XI<br />
Section VII covers issues related to grades and the overall management of the classroom. Dr. Karen<br />
Smith-Gratto discusses the role of grades in evaluating performance and provides various rubrics for<br />
assessing performance. Dr. Gloria Palma clarifies the distinction between evaluations that measure<br />
progress versus evaluations that measure performance. Dr. Rita Lamb discusses the roles and<br />
responsibilities of academic advisors. Dr. Robin Guill Liles reports on the exclusive role of the GTA as<br />
an academic liaison between senior faculty and undergraduate student. Dr. Patricia Bethea-Whitfield<br />
discusses the importance of building rapport and provides suggestions for expressing empathy with the<br />
student’s situation.<br />
Section VIII looks at the issue of GTA professional development. Dr. Patrice Faison and Jason DePolo<br />
discuss the value of reflective professional development. Terese Coon provides a sample survey for<br />
soliciting feedback from students. Assistant Dean A. Ayanna Boyd-Williams identifies services available<br />
at A&T to enhance professional growth. Dr. Karen Guy and Dr. Thurman Guy present information on<br />
how to prepare a competitive professional portfolio.<br />
In Section IX, Assistant Dean A. Ayanna Boyd-Williams details the <strong>University</strong> and <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong><br />
General Administration’s policies and procedures related to graduate teaching assistant appointments.<br />
Dr. Kenneth Murray discusses the professional and legal responsibilities of GTAs. Mr. Marvin Dickerson<br />
details the safety and emergency procedures in the classroom as required by ARISA/Health and Safety.<br />
Doug Speight provides information on the purpose and benefits of the university transfer program.<br />
Marvin Watkins provides information on student initiated programs and unfunded projects.<br />
Section X provides advice for supervisors and graduate students on how to help GTAs be successful. A<br />
checklist for supervisors to use to help orient GTAs to their assignment is included. Comments from<br />
Terese Coon and other experienced GTAs are listed.<br />
It is our sincere hope that you will use this handbook as a tool to guide you in making your experience<br />
as a GTA a significant milestone in your education.
SECTION I<br />
Introduction<br />
What it Means to be a Graduate Assistant at NC A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong><br />
1<br />
Graduate Teaching Assistants are a vital part of <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>’s vision as a<br />
learning centered institution that fosters quality instruction and continued learning. They contribute to<br />
the teaching mission of the <strong>University</strong> by fulfilling their responsibilities in their role as paraprofessionals<br />
and the dual role they play are important to this university. Involving GTAs in labs, recitations, and<br />
discussion sessions allows faculty members more time to lecture, teach upper-division courses, and do<br />
research with their graduate students. Your insight as a student who has either taken this same course,<br />
or one very similar to it, is invaluable. Such insights are useful in planning the course and helping your<br />
students learn.<br />
As a student enrolled in a graduate study program, you are taking classes and managing the workload<br />
of any other grad student, yet, as a GTA, you are also juggling your role as a teacher. While you are<br />
working on your assignments for class, studying, writing papers, and all the other tasks that go with<br />
being a student, you are also planning lessons and grading papers for the students whom you teach in<br />
your role as GTA.<br />
This balancing act can often be unnerving, humbling, and even frustrating. Yet because you are both a<br />
student and a teacher, you are in an ideal position to be conscious of both sides of the situation and use<br />
that knowledge for your own benefit, as well as that of your students.<br />
There are other advantages to being a GTA. It helps finance your education and gives you a role in<br />
the everyday life of your department. Staff and faculty will learn your name, and you will have the<br />
opportunity to become acquainted with other GTAs with whom you can share ideas and support. The<br />
relationship you establish with the faculty member who supervises the course you teach is valuable. He<br />
or she may be a source of useful advice and guidance on teaching, and he or she may become a mentor<br />
during your graduate career and a reference for you when you search for your first job after graduation.<br />
As you prepare your lessons to teach you are also further embedding in your mind the subject matter,<br />
and the questions your students will ask can further stretch your knowledge.Your lecture notes, lesson<br />
plans, presentations, and other preparations for teaching are likely to be useful to you later on.<br />
This teaching experience may be one of the most important components of your education for the<br />
future. Whether you aspire to be a college professor or not, the experience of teaching others will help<br />
you develop poise, self-assurance, organizational skills, and structure. And it may be an important<br />
credential for employment applications and continuing your education even further.<br />
Teaching can be rewarding as you instill knowledge and serve as a role model for other students. You<br />
may influence many students, some of whom will be freshman, to seek a major in your field of expertise.<br />
Let’s be honest – serving as a GTA does have its drawbacks. You may be under a lot of pressure as you<br />
are also studying for a degree. In addition, the undergraduates that you teach may insist on individual<br />
attention and you will be in a position where you have to make decisions of authority in some instances.<br />
Often times, you are close in age to your students and they may expect you to be their friend and<br />
confidante in addition to their instructor. You will have to set limits on what you can and cannot do,<br />
and stick to it.<br />
You may discover from your role as GTA that you are not a born teacher or do not like the<br />
give-and-take of an undergraduate classroom. Teaching skills do improve with experience, and with<br />
that experience often comes increased satisfaction with the role. If this is not the case for you, at<br />
least you tried it and learned that teaching is not for you and you can plan your future accordingly.
Types of Graduate Assistant Roles and Duties<br />
Edited by John C. Kelly, Jr., Ph.D.<br />
Chairperson – Department of Electrical and Computing Engineering,<br />
College of Engineering<br />
2<br />
At <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong> (NCA&T) the term, Graduate Assistants (GA),<br />
is a general term meaning a graduate student enrolled and employed by the university to<br />
assist in the area of administration, research, or teaching. Departments within the university<br />
vary in the responsibilities they assign their GAs, but the most common GA roles are<br />
described below in general terms:<br />
Graduate Administrative Assistant (GAA)<br />
A Graduate Administrative Assistant’s duties primarily involve assisting the university's<br />
administrative staff or a specific department with collecting, organizing and analyzing various<br />
administrative data. These duties should be relevant to the graduate program and professional<br />
goals of the student.<br />
A GAA is most often assigned to assist with registration, collection of materials, computer<br />
work, editing, department exhibitions or special projects. Minor responsibilities involve<br />
attending seminars, engaging in library research and holding conferences.<br />
Graduate Research Assistant (GRA)<br />
A Graduate Research Assistant is one who assumes research-oriented responsibilities<br />
including library work, computer programming, analysis, fieldwork, laboratory experiments,<br />
scientific investigations, or other endeavors. The principal investigator of a funded research<br />
project normally employs GRAs. The student’s work on a research project should be closely<br />
supervised; it could lead to the successful writing of a thesis or dissertation, a significant<br />
intellectual discovery, or provide long-range direction for the student’s development as<br />
a scholar.<br />
Graduate Teaching Assistant (GTA)<br />
A Graduate Teaching Assistant serves in an instructional role in a class or laboratory within<br />
a specific department at NCA&TSU. GTAs may perform pedagogical functions, such as,<br />
preparing lectures, teaching classes, grading tests, holding conferences, assigning course<br />
grades, or providing support for the faculty member in charge of the course. In all cases, the<br />
GTA works under the supervision of a faculty member. To this end, the GTA works to gain<br />
teaching skills and a better understanding of the essentials of his/her academic discipline.<br />
Both GRAs and GTAs must also fulfill duties and responsibilities concerning safety in the<br />
laboratory equipment. Supplemental guidelines are available from the colleges/schools<br />
department offices.<br />
The duties of GTAs will vary by department and role as well, but some of the more<br />
common duties are described below:<br />
Recitation or Discussion Leader<br />
This is the most common GTA assignment in many disciplines where lectures represent the<br />
major form of instruction. The supervising professor plans the course, makes the reading<br />
assignments, and delivers lectures on a regular basis. As a GTA you are expected to attend<br />
the lectures so that you can address student questions and relate your own teaching to<br />
the instructor’s.
The purpose of recitation or discussion section is to have students engage in discussion of the<br />
course content presented in the lectures. Students are divided into smaller groups that meet<br />
separately for interactive class sessions. As a GTA you may moderate or stimulate student<br />
discussions, solve homework problems, assign and evaluate student projects, answer questions,<br />
present additional materials, and serve as a liaison between the professor and the students.<br />
3<br />
In some instances you may be responsible for reading and evaluating written assignments<br />
submitted by students. You may also help develop or administer exams and quizzes, or grade<br />
them if the professor prepares them. At the end of the semester you may work in consultation<br />
with the supervising professor to assign grades. If you have any questions about your role or<br />
duties, please ask your supervising professor. In most cases, they served as a GTA during their<br />
own graduate training and will be more than willing to clarify what they want you to do.<br />
Laboratory Assistant<br />
Working as a GTA in a teaching laboratory is very much like being a GTA in recitation<br />
sessions (see section above). You provide supplemental, practical instruction to a lecture<br />
course for students in smaller groups; develop, assign, supervise and grade student projects in<br />
the lab; and periodically evaluate student progress.<br />
Your range of duties may include overseeing laboratory safety and maintenance, preparing<br />
samples, stocking supplies, fabricating equipment, and trouble-shooting computer problems.<br />
You may be involved in instruction, or you may be on hand to handle materials and problems<br />
that may arise. In all cases, the supervising professor is your contact person, defining duties<br />
and outlining expectations for the operation of the laboratory and the instruction that takes<br />
place in it.<br />
General Assistant to a Professor and His/Her Course<br />
This assignment generally involves duties to assist students in learning the course material,<br />
such as holding office hours and review sessions before exams. It may also involve<br />
maintaining course web pages, posting solutions to homework problems, and grading quizzes,<br />
exams, and projects. You may be asked to make a presentation to the class if you have<br />
knowledge or experience on a particular topic, or if the professor has to be away from class<br />
on occasion.<br />
Grader<br />
Some departments assign GTAs to evaluate student exams, projects and papers. As a grader,<br />
you are an extension of the professor and should consult that person regarding what standards<br />
and expectations he or she wishes to apply to the evaluation process. Through the grading<br />
process, you will become aware of how individual students are doing and may be asked to<br />
counsel certain students about their performance.<br />
Tutor<br />
Another common GTA assignment is tutoring for a specific course or in a department help<br />
session. Departments that offer tutoring opportunities usually structure this help in one of<br />
two ways. One way is to work with each student individually, walking through a problem<br />
with them step-by-step.<br />
Another method is to work with a group of students who may have similar problems or<br />
misunderstandings of the subject matter. By getting the group to interact and solve each<br />
other’s problems cooperatively, you can help them recognize the value of working in a<br />
study group.
Standards for Graduate Teaching Assistants -<br />
Knowledge, Skills, and Attitudes Necessary to Be an Effective GTA<br />
By J. Y. Shen, Ph.D.<br />
Associate Professor<br />
Department of Manufacturing Systems, School of Technology<br />
(Edited by Mrs.Susan Payne, Research Assistant, School of Graduate Studies)<br />
4<br />
As a Graduate Teaching Assistant at <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>, you may be<br />
asked to engage in a variety of teaching-related activities including lecturing, class discussion,<br />
labs, one-on-one tutoring, office hours, testing, grading, and more. The standards described<br />
below, based on the standards established for teachers in public schools in <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong>,<br />
reflect the requisite knowledge, skills, and attitudes necessary for the successful execution of<br />
the duties of a GTA:<br />
1. Content Pedagogy<br />
The GTA understands the central concepts, tools of inquiry, and structures of the discipline he or she<br />
teaches and can create learning experiences that make these aspects of subject matter meaningful<br />
for students.<br />
For a GTA, being able to effectively teach a particular course is not based solely on having<br />
taken and passed that same course. Knowing the content is one thing, but being able to<br />
effectively teach it and help others learn it is another. Depending on the course you are<br />
teaching, you will need to think back to when you were taking it (or a similar course) and<br />
what principles for learning worked for you. Was there a particular assignment, exercise, or<br />
activity that brought some of the key concepts into focus for you? What was most<br />
challenging? What was most effective? Start by asking your supervising professor to suggest<br />
ways to present material and make it meaningful for students. Also read Sections III<br />
through VI of this Handbook for valuable information relating to course planning,<br />
teaching, and learning.<br />
2. Student Development<br />
The GTA understands how students learn and develop, and can provide learning<br />
opportunities that support a student’s intellectual, social, and personal development.<br />
Some ways to support the development of students whom you teach include the following:<br />
Make students feel important. Teachers, who value students, avoid condescension,<br />
sarcasm, and impersonal behavior, and cultivate self-esteem through praising good<br />
performance and taking a personal interest in students.<br />
Make students feel invited. Teachers, who make students feel invited both in class and<br />
outside of class, have a strong impact on motivation, student retention, the presence or<br />
absence of classes.<br />
Deal with needed changes from a positive point of view. Honest and frequent feedback is<br />
essential to good learning, but even very critical feedback can be offered in a constructive<br />
way. Teachers can usually find some good point to praise and can suggest specific ways in<br />
which unsatisfactory performance can be improved.<br />
Learn to make nonverbal cues. Good eye contact, smiles, and active listening skills such<br />
as nodding, help motivate students.<br />
Get to know students as individuals. Teachers who request that all students visit them<br />
outside of class to chat informally and instructors who have lunch or coffee with students<br />
are examples of those who understand that a personal acquaintance enhances the<br />
teaching-learning relationship.<br />
Learn to empathize. Teachers who remember some of the hardships, uncertainties, and<br />
stress of their own student days are better able to help their students who are undergoing<br />
those difficulties.
Establish parameters. Teachers who clearly define tasks and set high expectations for<br />
behavior and learning are better able to motivate students.<br />
Use student-centered instruction. Student-centered instruction involves planning<br />
learning activities that will actively engage students and will anticipate the kinds of<br />
opportunities and challenges that will be present in a specific area.<br />
Be enthusiastic. Most instructors find their discipline compelling, but sometimes it is hard<br />
to recapture excitement about a familiar topic. Trying to look at the familiar in a new<br />
light or to present things in fresh ways are strategies instructors use to maintain their<br />
enthusiasm. Integral to any discussion of motivation is “personalizing” the classroom.<br />
Using instructional strategies that enable some individualization of instruction or small<br />
group work helps develop personal investment and interest in learning. Similarly, direct<br />
attempts of instructors to talk about such things as their own life experiences related to the<br />
subject and their personal difficulties in mastering certain concepts create a warmer<br />
classroom climate.<br />
5<br />
3. Diverse Learners<br />
The GTA understands how students differ in their approaches to learning and creates<br />
instructional opportunities that are adapted to diverse learners.<br />
Sensitivity to cultural diversity is an important component of a good learning atmosphere.<br />
You should also be sensitive to other kinds of diversity, including everything from sexual<br />
orientation to political convictions to religious beliefs. The key to a good environment is<br />
freedom of thought and expression in which to explore new ideas, test hypotheses, and<br />
question old assumptions. No student should feel ostracized because of his or her thoughts,<br />
beliefs, or background. They come to A&T with different experiences and worldviews. Your<br />
job as a teaching assistant is neither to correct “wrong” views nor to allow students to<br />
placidly dismiss views different from their own. Learning implies the exchange of ideas and<br />
creating a classroom that allows for such an exchange is your responsibility.<br />
We all make conscious and subconscious decisions about what we consider valuable and<br />
why. However, be aware of your own biases and how you might be inadvertently<br />
communicating these to your students.<br />
Students who discontinue their education for any purpose and then later return to college<br />
can be considered re-entry students. They are usually older than what we normally think of<br />
as college-aged students and may have more varied life experiences than traditional-aged<br />
students. Many of them have been away from the classroom for many years, and entering or<br />
re-entering college represents a major change in their lives. For some, it is a great loss of social<br />
status to again be a student.<br />
For GTAs, teaching to re-entry students can be a challenge, particularly when the re-entry<br />
student is nearer in age to the GTA’s parents than to the GTA. Yet, such an age difference<br />
can be equally difficult for the student. The GTA needs to respect the student's life<br />
experience and the student needs to respect the GTA’s formal education. Because re-entry<br />
students tend to be very goal oriented, they want to learn and they want the GTA to teach<br />
them. Re-entry students are, for the most part, equal to their GTAs in age, life style, and<br />
seriousness of purpose. As a result, GTAs may have to exert more effort in getting re-entry<br />
students to utilize their help. A re-entry student is more likely to go directly to the professor,<br />
or feel uncomfortable asking anyone for help because of their more mature status. Also,<br />
re-entry students may want to know and discuss more than what is in the books. GTAs need<br />
to remember that these students have life experiences and responsibilities outside of the<br />
classroom that are quite different from those of the traditional full-time student.
Most <strong>North</strong> Americans value democracy and believe that all people should have equal social<br />
and political rights. In the classroom, this means a high level of student participation is<br />
usually expected. In other cultures, however, student questions and comments during class<br />
may be regarded as disrespectful interruptions. In the US, great importance is placed on the<br />
individual. In the classroom, most students expect individual attention and recognition.<br />
They expect to be rewarded for independent thinking and creativity. Conversely, other<br />
cultures may prioritize collectivity over individuality and may reserve the highest praise for<br />
teamwork, cooperation, and emulation.<br />
6<br />
Also, Americans are often comfortable with informality. In the classroom, students may<br />
slouch in their seats; many come to class wearing jeans and t-shirts. Teachers may also dress<br />
casually and may sit on their desks with their feet dangling to the floor. Students and GTAs<br />
generally expect to be on a first-name basis with each other. In more formal educational<br />
systems around the world, it is appropriate to come to class in dress clothes and polished<br />
shoes, maintain an erect posture throughout class, and address the teacher only by last name.<br />
Be cognizant of these differences and what they may or may not mean to you as a GTA.<br />
4. Multiple Instructional Strategies<br />
The GTA understands and uses a variety of instructional strategies to encourage student<br />
development of critical thinking, problem solving, and performance skills.<br />
Teachers should use a variety of teaching techniques to utilize and build on the students’<br />
experiences. Active participation by the students is critical to accomplishing this task.<br />
When students are involved, they are more likely to explore alternative ways to think about<br />
the subject as well as think of alternative ways to complete the task. As a result, critical<br />
thinking skills are enhanced. One active teaching technique is having students role play<br />
situations that they have confronted. Another is large and small group discussions in which<br />
adult students are encouraged to share relevant experiences. Posing questions to students can<br />
further encourage this integration. Equally effective is the instructor’s sharing examples from<br />
his or her own practice. The use of analogies and metaphors can also be extremely useful in<br />
helping students integrate new and old knowledge.<br />
Some traditional instructional strategies that you may incorporate into your classroom<br />
sessions include the following. More detail on many of them is provided in Section VI of<br />
this handbook.<br />
Lectures<br />
Class Discussions<br />
Question and Answer Sessions<br />
Small Group Activities<br />
Chalkboard and Dry Erase Board Work<br />
Overhead Projector Presentations<br />
Project Journals (as a way for<br />
students to record process<br />
and progress in a<br />
developing project)
5. Motivation and Management<br />
The GTA uses an understanding of<br />
individual and group motivation and<br />
behavior to create a learning environment<br />
that encourages positive social interaction,<br />
active engagement in learning, and<br />
self-motivation.<br />
Educational psychologists have<br />
concluded through various sorts of<br />
studies that in classes where students<br />
are highly motivated, there are eight<br />
characteristics that are almost always<br />
present related to the instructor:<br />
While motivation to make a good<br />
grade may also be a factor, it is believed<br />
that what an instructor does or does<br />
not do has a major impact on students’<br />
willingness to make a persistent effort<br />
to learn.<br />
★<br />
★<br />
★<br />
★<br />
★<br />
★<br />
★<br />
★<br />
Enthusiasm for the topic.<br />
Relevance of the course material to the<br />
lives, experiences, or career goals of the<br />
students.<br />
Classes were organized and well-planned.<br />
Material and workload was regarded by<br />
the students as challenging but “doable.”<br />
Students are actively engaged in<br />
classroom learning.<br />
A variety of instructional techniques and<br />
strategies were utilized.<br />
Instructors were perceived as<br />
approachable and friendly, and appeared<br />
interested in the students as individuals.<br />
Course material was made real, concrete<br />
and understandable through the use of<br />
appropriate examples and anecdotes.<br />
7<br />
6. Communication and Technology<br />
The GTA uses knowledge of effective verbal, nonverbal, and media communication<br />
techniques to foster active inquiry, collaboration, and supportive interaction in the classroom.<br />
In order to insure that all students are provided with the opportunity to learn, learning<br />
environments must be designed in ways that allow learners to approach learning in diverse<br />
ways. By including a variety of techniques and tools to enhance student learning, we allow<br />
students many opportunities to interpret the content.<br />
Section VI of this handbook includes volumes of information on how to incorporate various<br />
forms of media and technology into your teaching, thus allowing many ways that students<br />
can become engaged in an interactive classroom environment.<br />
7. Planning<br />
The GTA plans instruction based upon knowledge of subject matter, students, the<br />
community, and curriculum goals.<br />
Planning of a course<br />
and class time can be<br />
anxiety producing for<br />
GTAs. By devoting<br />
some creative energy<br />
to planning, you can<br />
lay the groundwork for<br />
a successful semester.<br />
Steps to make the<br />
planning process<br />
go smoothly include:<br />
Understand Your Position and Working Environment:<br />
Be sure you are in sync with the professor of the course. This<br />
is a partnership in which he or she is the lead partner. Follow<br />
the lead.<br />
Plan the first day of class carefully. Decide what you want to<br />
cover and how you want to present it. Balance is important.<br />
Balance the day between (a) introductions, (b) course<br />
policies and procedures, and (c) specific content that<br />
introduce students to the course, encouraging focus<br />
and enthusiasm.<br />
Check the room before class starts to study the<br />
layout and make sure everything is<br />
working. Think about logistics. Also, look<br />
at the room from the students’ perspectives.<br />
Can they see you, the board, or screen?
8. Assessment<br />
The GTA understands and uses formal and informal assessment strategies to evaluate<br />
and ensure the continuous intellectual, social, and physical development of the learner.<br />
Evaluating student performance is a key component of the role of an instructor. Constructing<br />
tests and assignments that measure student learning and understanding of course content<br />
requires careful planning and execution. The articles in Section VII of this Handbook<br />
provide multiple suggestions for making student assessment more effective and meaningful.<br />
8<br />
9. Reflective Practice: Professional Growth<br />
The GTA is a reflective practitioner who continually evaluates the effects of his or her<br />
choices and actions on others (students, faculty, and other professionals in the learning<br />
community) and who actively seeks out opportunities to grow professionally.<br />
One way to evaluate your teaching is to seek feedback from the students you teach. Many<br />
GTAs provide a form for student feedback during and/or at the end of the semester. Examples<br />
of survey/feedback forms are included in Section VIII of this Handbook, as well as a link to a<br />
web-site that offers a way to customize forms for the course(s) you teach.<br />
While most professors at A&T distribute a standard Student Opinion Form to students at the<br />
end of each semester to gather feedback, this data is not always compiled and available to the<br />
GTA in a time frame that allows them to use the feedback for the very next course they<br />
teach. By providing your own survey tool in addition to the standard university form, you will<br />
be able to study the feedback immediately and determine what aspects of the course and/or<br />
your teaching need to be fine-tuned before the next semester begins.<br />
For on-going preparation for your role as a Teaching Assistants, many departments within the<br />
<strong>University</strong> schedule orientation and training activities for new teaching assistants and/or<br />
faculty. In some cases, this orientation involves several days of meetings, interviews, and<br />
information sessions. Contact the department under which you teach concerning training<br />
opportunities that are available.<br />
In addition, Career Services in Murphy Hall offers university-wide training programs for new<br />
and returning graduate assistants and new faculty. Topics vary and have included promoting<br />
active learning, leading discussion, developing group process techniques, and using technology<br />
in the classroom. Pre-registration is required, but the seminars are offered free of charge.<br />
The School of Graduate Studies STAR program offers the Preparing Future Faculty (PFF)<br />
program for graduate students interested in pursuing a faculty career in Science, Technology,<br />
Engineering and Mathematics. PFF helps participants learn more about the full range of<br />
faculty life in teaching, research, and service at a variety of higher education institutions.<br />
The program includes seminar and workshop courses, individual faculty mentoring,<br />
opportunities to gain a variety of teaching experiences while earning graduate credit, and<br />
interactions with faculty and administrators from other institutions.<br />
The Effective Teaching Training Institute, coordinated by The School of Graduate Studies,<br />
offers workshops throughout the year on topics such as “Using Technology to Support<br />
Pedagogy,” “Using Your Voice Effectively,” and “Creating A Teaching Portfolio.”
The Academy of Teaching & Learning, located on the lower level of Bluford Library on<br />
campus, supports A&T’s commitment to effective teaching through seminars, workshops,<br />
newsletters, grants, and other efforts to improve the instructional environment.<br />
9<br />
Additionally, Section VIII of this Handbook contains numerous articles, suggested reading,<br />
contact information, and links to resources for professional development.<br />
10. School and Community Involvement<br />
The GTA fosters relationships with colleagues and agencies in the larger community<br />
to support students’ learning and well-being.<br />
Various departments on campus offer support services for students. As an instructor, when you<br />
identify students whom you believe need assistance with educational, health, or other issues<br />
that affect their learning or wellbeing, please make every effort to direct them to the<br />
appropriate resource(s). Establishing a contact at each of these departments when you decide<br />
to become a GTA may be helpful in the event you have questions you need answered before<br />
referring a student to one of these resources. In addition, your department chairperson and<br />
the student’s academic advisor are also valuable resources.<br />
Academic Affairs Dowdy Building 334-7965<br />
Academy of Teaching & Learning Bluford Library 256-0212<br />
Center for Student Success Hodgin Hall 334-7855<br />
Counseling Services Murphy Hall 334-7727<br />
Sebastian Health Center 334-7880<br />
Student Affairs Murphy Hall 334-7696<br />
Setting Boundaries and Limits<br />
The relationship between GTAs and students is<br />
multifaceted and thus can be a very complex one.<br />
Harassment -- sexual or otherwise -- can work<br />
both ways. You could be perceived of as harassing<br />
a student in your class, or, you could be the<br />
recipient of what you perceive of as harassment<br />
by a student in your class. GTAs are, after all, the<br />
peers and colleagues of the students whom they<br />
are assisting. Yet by the nature of their position,<br />
they are often perceived of as having power and<br />
authority. You may not feel you have power and<br />
authority, but the students may feel you have.<br />
Under these circumstances, you need to be<br />
particularly sensitive to the relationship you<br />
establish with students.<br />
Remember, there are two versions of events --<br />
what you mean, and what the other person hears.<br />
Your intention might be one thing, but for a<br />
variety of reasons, the student you are talking<br />
with may perceive your actions or words differently.<br />
Be sure you make it clear when you are on duty<br />
and accessible and when you are not. You have a<br />
responsibility to yourself to protect your own<br />
boundaries. You have your own courses to study<br />
for, or to work in the library or computer lab on<br />
your own work without interruption. If you give<br />
out your phone number to students so that they<br />
may call you at home for assistance, make it clear<br />
what hours are acceptable for calling.<br />
If students approach you for assistance during<br />
times that you are doing your own work, its<br />
OK to tell them you cannot help them now,<br />
but suggest they contact you during your<br />
designated office hours, or at some other<br />
time when you will be available to<br />
help them.
SECTION II<br />
International GTAs<br />
A significant number of GTAs at <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong> come from outside the<br />
United <strong>State</strong>s, from countries where English is not the dominant language or where it is spoken with<br />
different pronunciation and vocabulary. As an international GTA, we value the knowledge of the<br />
world that you bring to teaching here. The special flavor and perspective you can contribute to undergraduate<br />
education is important, however, U.S. classrooms and undergraduates may present challenges<br />
for you if you are new to higher education in this country.<br />
Language Requirements<br />
English Proficiency Tests (Procedure, ITAs Duties for Non-native Speakers)<br />
International students applying for graduate assistantships who are graduates of institutions of higher<br />
education located outside the USA in non-English speaking countries are required to demonstrate<br />
proficiency in the English language by having official scores directly from the test of English as Foreign<br />
Language (TOFEL) submitted to the School of Graduate Studies. International teaching assistants<br />
MUST score a minimum of 550 on the paper base test or 213 on the computer base test. Only scores<br />
received from Educational Testing Service, Princeton, NJ 08451, will be considered official. Students<br />
are responsible for requesting ETS to forward scores to the university.<br />
A graduate student for whom English is a second language must obtain clearance through the<br />
International Students Office for enhancing their communication skills. This office is located in<br />
Murphy Hall, <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> Agricultural and Technical <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>, Greensboro, NC 27411;<br />
the telephone number is (336)334-7551. The academic unit (department, college, and school) also<br />
evaluates international students’ effective communication skills.<br />
In addition to the TOEFL requirement, a number of departments stipulate that graduate student for<br />
whom English is a second language must engage in a personal interview, satisfy the expectations of a<br />
faculty mentor, and/or meet other standards such as presenting a certain score on the Graduate Record<br />
Examination (GRE).<br />
Other methods used to assess English proficiency include writing assignments or oral presentations<br />
under the supervision of faculty mentors. Student evaluations are also used to determine mastery of<br />
English. Students with a need for additional language work are required to audit appropriate classes in<br />
English or Business Communication. The Department of English requires their teaching assistants to<br />
take English 700, a special topics course designed to instruct, monitor, and evaluate each individual<br />
graduate student in the art of teaching English 100: Ideas and Their Expression I. Additionally,<br />
personal interviews by the department are used to evaluate the student’s verbal skills and proficiency<br />
in communicating, i.e., clarity, accent, demeanor, etc.<br />
As a non-native speaking GTA, you may be assigned to activities that do not demand extensive oral<br />
communication, such as laboratory preparation and demonstrations or grading.<br />
10<br />
Cultural Dimensions<br />
By Judie Bucholz, Ph.D., SPHR<br />
Adjunct Assistant Professor<br />
Human Development and Services<br />
There have been many definitions of culture over the years. Walter Lonner (1994) said the<br />
most common definitions of culture include the following ingredients:<br />
Culture is an abstract idea, a hypothetical construct that is created by humans and is<br />
useful primarily for scientific reasons.
Culture is not behavior. It simply provides complex settings in which various behaviors<br />
may occur. To say that Astrid behaves in a certain way because she is Swedish is like<br />
saying that a man limps because he is lame. Culture creates for individuals certain<br />
potentials for reaction. These potentials differ from time to time and place to place.<br />
Culture shapes and bends behavior by interacting with individuals. Not even the most<br />
sophisticated and enlightened definition of culture can explain behavior, because<br />
definitions themselves are static and not dynamic. A good definition however, may help us<br />
to organize the various ways in which we might formulate explanations of differences<br />
in behavior.<br />
Any culture contains values, beliefs, attitudes, and languages that have emerged as<br />
adaptations to the peculiar geographic and temporal circumstances that have impinged on<br />
the lives of a group of people who agree on what to call themselves.<br />
The values, beliefs, attitudes, and languages that have proved to be adaptive are<br />
considered important enough to pass on to the next generation. Such generational<br />
transmission either can be done explicitly, by using formal instruction and rules (the<br />
socialization processes), or can be implicitly and subtly taught to succeeding generations<br />
in the course of everyday life. The enculturation process).<br />
11<br />
Instructors confront significant challenges in making diversity work to their advantage. These<br />
challenges include: (1) genuinely valuing student diversity, (2) balancing individual needs<br />
with group fairness, (3) coping with resistance to change, (4) promoting group cohesiveness,<br />
and (5) ensuring open communication.<br />
If effectively managed, diversity can be powerful in the classroom because it stimulates<br />
creativity, enhances problem solving by offering broader perspectives, and infuses flexibility.<br />
Personal and cultural values are challenged by diversity. In addressing the challenge, we must<br />
develop an appreciation of variations among human beings, even if the differences may be<br />
antagonistic to our own beliefs and values.<br />
Benefits of Having a Mentor<br />
By Mulumebet Worku, Ph.D.<br />
Assistant Professor<br />
Department of Animal Sciences and Veterinary Medicine,<br />
School of Agricultural and Environmental Sciences<br />
The first weeks as an international student can be confusing and difficult in particular if you<br />
are in the United <strong>State</strong>s for the first time. Settling in is vital and will contribute to your<br />
academic performance. Living in a new environment has many challenges. International<br />
students have the added pressures of having to learn how to cope in a new cultural environment,<br />
dealing with language issues, getting around, learning the rules and regulations of the university,<br />
experiencing loneliness and separation from family and friends, wanting to make friends with US<br />
students without knowing how, understanding US laws and living up to expectations from family.<br />
Many international students find that one of the best ways to overcome issues of relating to<br />
culture shock and homesickness is through the use of Peer-support or mentoring. Mentors can<br />
make this adjustment easier by providing support, encouragement and friendship. This support<br />
may be social, emotional, and academic, though mentors are not expected to serve as either<br />
counselors or tutors. Having a mentor who will be available to answer questions, give a point<br />
of view on life at the university, and how to get the most out of it as well as pointing you in<br />
the right direction to the services offered at A&T will be most helpful to you.<br />
Services such as help with language and writing are especially significant for international<br />
students. International students go through overwhelming experiences as newcomers while<br />
adjusting to the demands of graduate study in a US university. A mentor serves as a contact
that will share experiences and their time with you to help you adjust to the culture on campus<br />
and the US way of life. Webster’s dictionary defines a mentor as ‘a wise person and advisor, a<br />
teacher…, and a loyal friend to someone.’ International students often feel disconnected when<br />
they have left their countries to seek new friends. Mentors offer both help and support when<br />
coming to a new country where you’re not familiar with the culture of the people.<br />
12<br />
As an international student the mentor gives you an opportunity to get to know other students<br />
and helps with practical matters such as getting a bank account. Mentors should have a<br />
genuine interest in the experiences and well being of the international student to share<br />
cross-cultural experiences and knowledge in a reciprocal fashion, to help guide the student<br />
through the rules of the institution, to provide appropriate feedback on academic work and<br />
questions and to broaden the student’s exposure to US culture.<br />
To identify a mentor, students should look for individuals with a strong willingness to<br />
understand international students, familiarity with American universities, and a good academic<br />
standing and reputation within the university. The mentor will help introduce you to an<br />
environment that will allow you to develop a network of individuals that will be important to<br />
your academic career and social needs. This relationship is valuable for both the mentee and<br />
the mentor.<br />
The advantages of having a mentor include:<br />
Assistance with the rules and<br />
.<br />
regulation expectations<br />
activities and the general<br />
necessities of student life on<br />
campus and in the community<br />
Guidance in adjusting to the<br />
campus culture and academic<br />
environment.<br />
Career goals that are<br />
strengthened and sustained.<br />
Promise of an exciting and<br />
fulfilling and successful<br />
experience at NC A&T.<br />
Increased knowledge about<br />
campus services, self<br />
confidence and reinforced<br />
personal values and<br />
professionalism.<br />
Service as a peer mentor for<br />
other students.<br />
Students, staff and faculty at NC A&T have embraced globalization as part of the FUTURES<br />
initiative. They are very willing to get an insight into other cultures. This willingness creates a<br />
welcoming atmosphere on campus for international students to identify peer mentors and<br />
faculty mentors. Further, the large number of international faculty and staff and who have<br />
international experience are a resource for any international student interested in identifying a<br />
mentor. This introduces exciting possibilities for global cultural awareness.<br />
Get connected by keeping abreast of campus news and interacting with the Office of<br />
International Programs and the International Student Scholars Office. For example, the<br />
university hosts an international week celebration, the Mattye Reed Cultural Arts Center, and<br />
also interacts with community-based international activities in the area. Further, visitors and<br />
speakers from numerous countries are hosted on the campus. Mentors can make a difference<br />
and provide support in understanding rules and procedures in the context of the institution and<br />
way of life.<br />
An incoming international student requires basic information such as where to buy food, where<br />
things are in the university, how to set up a bank account, how to find housing or where the<br />
recreational areas are and faith-related organizations are located. Ask other students in your<br />
program. A student should identify a mentor on campus that will provide this information. The<br />
new international student should attend all orientation programs. In particular, you must check<br />
in with the International Student and Scholars office at 221 Murphy Hall immediately upon
arrival and use this office as a resource in identifying mentors on campus. The Office of<br />
Graduate Studies in Gibbs Hall and the Offices of Foreign Languages are also important<br />
contacts. The campus map in your registration packet will provide the locations of these<br />
places.<br />
13<br />
Form relationships with your academic advisor who might be able to recommend mentors.<br />
Your academic advisor may serve as your mentor and provide guidance in areas including<br />
courses and academic expectations. Consider joining the national or ethnic organization that<br />
best fits your need on campus or in the community. These organizations may sponsor events<br />
and activities of special interest to your group and will notify you of upcoming activities. Read<br />
campus newspapers as they are a good source of current information about possible mentors.<br />
Look over bulletin boards in the classroom, buildings, cafeteria and student union. Also, check<br />
bulletin boards in the dormitory and apartment house. The university has an e-mail system and<br />
the web-site provides information on upcoming activities and the names of faculty who will<br />
help you identify mentors. As an international students at NC A&T, you will have many<br />
opportunities to meet new people, learn a new language and experience a different culture. You<br />
will experience new things and your mentors will be learning from you, too. Remember, being<br />
an international student is a give and take situation. You bring a wealth of experience, too.<br />
Resources For additional advice:<br />
Althen, G. (1988). Manual for Foreign Teaching Assistants. Iowa City, IA.: <strong>University</strong> of Iowa.<br />
Althen, G. (1988). American Ways. Yarmouth, ME: Intercultural Press.<br />
Derek Bok Center for Teaching and Learning. (1993). Teaching in America (Video). Cambridge,<br />
MA: The President and Fellows of Harvard <strong>University</strong>.<br />
Illinois <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>, link to their International TA Program resources.<br />
Iowa <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong> TA Handbook, Section II for International TAs<br />
Sarkisian, E. (1997). Teaching American Students: A Guide for International Faculty and Teaching<br />
Assistants in Colleges and Universities. Cambridge, MA: The<br />
President and Fellows of Harvard <strong>University</strong>.<br />
<strong>University</strong> of California at Santa Barbara, link to TA Handbook<br />
and International TA Handbook.<br />
<strong>University</strong> of Washington, link to their International TA Program<br />
resources.
SECTION III<br />
Foundations of Good Teaching<br />
The ultimate test of your classroom abilities may well be not how much you have taught, but<br />
how much you have learned and the degree to which your students have learned to learn.<br />
C. Roland Christensen<br />
in The Art and Craft of Teaching<br />
14<br />
Overview<br />
By Lelia Vickers, Ph.D.<br />
Dean<br />
School of Education<br />
Good teaching is imbued in principles of learning based on scientific research and information<br />
that has been acquired from observations and analyses of actions in the world. Social scientists<br />
and others who try to discover the complexities of teaching and learning frequently focus on<br />
variables such as students’ characteristics and abilities, teaching behaviors, communication,<br />
organization, and measure of students’ learning. From kindergarten through graduate instruction,<br />
good teaching requires one to possess the knowledge, skills and disposition to create meaningful<br />
learning environments.<br />
Good teachers know that scientific research has identified simple truths about connecting<br />
teaching to learning. Effective teachers apply these principles to the learning situation in both<br />
creative and technical ways to ensure that students utilize their capabilities to acquire new<br />
knowledge. Understanding students and communicating effective are two strategies for<br />
effective teaching for all teachers.<br />
Understanding students is a key criterion for teachers to use in the selection and use of the<br />
most appropriate pedagogical content . The student’s cultural background and experiences can<br />
be expanded and used as the foundation to infuse the knowledge base. Good teaching always<br />
conveys to the students ways to build new learning upon previous learning. Good teachers<br />
strive to help students become discerning, critical, and life long learners. Good teachers<br />
employ the students’ cultural context as a means of accomplishing effective communication.<br />
Communication is the transmission of information through a variety of mediums including<br />
lectures/discussions, technology, direct or indirect instruction, and experiences. Good teachers<br />
use effective communication skills to establish expectations for students’ performances. In<br />
addition, effective communication allows teachers to clarify goals, objectives, evaluation criteria,<br />
and outcomes so that the expectations of the teachers are clear to the students. Goals extend the<br />
opportunity to delineate expectations, align curricula, and select appropriate materials, methods,<br />
assignments, and evaluation strategies. Effective teachers of graduate students organize instruction<br />
that will create active learning and collaborative activities to engage students in intellectual<br />
discussions that result in independent learning. Clear articulation of the expectations for courses,<br />
assignments, and experiences sets the foundation to ensure that students accomplish the goals.<br />
Knowledge of the students and effective communication are prerequisites for good teaching.<br />
Outcomes of good teaching include the acquisition of content knowledge, sequenced<br />
instruction, infusion of cultural influences, attention to learning styles, and a viable evaluation<br />
construct. Good teaching ensures that learners have acquired new knowledge, skills, and<br />
dispositions, which have been integrated to reconfigure and expand the knowledge base.<br />
References:<br />
Davis, Barbara (1993). Tools for Teaching. San Francisco, Jossey-Bass Publishers.<br />
McNergney, Robert and Joanne Herbert (2001) Foundations of Education, New York,<br />
Allen Bacon.
The Ten Commandments of Teaching<br />
By Marihelen Glass, Ph.D.<br />
Professor of Horticulture, School of Agricultural<br />
and Environmental Sciences<br />
15<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Good teaching is as much about passion as it is about reason.<br />
Good teaching is about substance and treating students as consumers<br />
of knowledge.<br />
Good teaching is about bridging the gap between theory and practice.<br />
Good teaching is about listening, questioning, being rigid but flexible,<br />
fluid and experimenting, and having the confidence to react and adjust<br />
to changing circumstances.<br />
Good teaching is about style. Should good teaching be entertaining?<br />
Good teaching is about caring, nurturing, and developing minds and talents.<br />
Good teaching is about strong visionary leadership and tangible instruction<br />
support.<br />
Good teaching is about mentoring between senior faculty and junior<br />
faculty, teamwork, and being recognized and promoted by one’s peers.<br />
At the end of the day, good teaching is about having fun, experiencing<br />
pleasure and intrinsic rewards.<br />
GOOD TEACHERS COULD NOT IMAGINE DOING ANYTHING ELSE!<br />
Effective Instruction<br />
By Larry Powers, Ph.D.<br />
Associate Dean and Professor<br />
Department of Curriculum and Instruction,<br />
School of Education<br />
Many writers indicate that teaching is too often simplified by someone who has the notion<br />
that knowledge alone is the prerequisite for effective instruction. This notion is supported by<br />
the old adage referred to in the question---what do you need to know to teach a horse? The<br />
answer is -- more than the horse! Certainly, good instruction is a complex maze of intentional<br />
acts undergirded by rigorous behavioral science research, instructional planning, assessment of<br />
what the learner already knows, an in-depth knowledge base of the subject, and the utilization<br />
of appropriate methodology (pedagogy). The purpose of this paper is to assist graduate<br />
teaching assistants to become effective instructors in the academy. Therefore, the primary<br />
focus is to assist the graduate assistant with the development of an instructional paradigm<br />
based upon contemporary behavioral science research inclusive of instructional planning,<br />
monitoring student progress, and utilization of effective communication skills.
Instructional Planning<br />
Prior to teaching any university course, the instructor should review the course description in a<br />
current <strong>University</strong> Bulletin. By reviewing the course description the instructor will ensure that<br />
the course syllabus to be distributed to all enrolled students within the first two class meetings<br />
is consistent in content established by the academic department. In developing the syllabus a<br />
primary starting place for the graduate instructor is to decide what he/she wants his/her students<br />
to know. At the very minimum an adequate class syllabus would include: (1) course description<br />
from <strong>University</strong> Bulletin, (2) itemized course objectives, (3) schedule of test dates and course<br />
topics including dates, (4) detailed description of all assignments and the point value for final<br />
grade, (5) description of instructional strategies, (6) required references and or books, and (7)<br />
other specific information students need to know to matriculate through the course in a timely<br />
manner. Once the instructor has determined what he/she wants the students to learn a plan<br />
should be made to facilitate the process. The plan essentially outlines the teaching methodology<br />
to accomplish instructional goals.<br />
Writing behavioral/performance objectives is a major part<br />
of preparing any lesson. There are three domains that<br />
categorize objectives. According to McNergney and<br />
McNergney (2004), behavioral objectives are categorized<br />
as cognitive, affective, and psychomotor. Cognitive<br />
objectives address mental processes and are expressed with<br />
verbs such as identify, write, explain, list, or discuss, etc.<br />
Affective objectives address feelings and are expressed<br />
using terms such as appreciation, love, fear, anxiety,<br />
and/or hate. Psychomotor objectives address physical<br />
movement and are expressed using action verbs such as<br />
lift, jump, run, or walk, etc. The most common behavioral<br />
objective is cognitive. Behavioral objectives when<br />
properly written have three sometimes four components<br />
depending upon the writer.<br />
BEHAVIORAL OBJECTIVE COMPONENTS<br />
1. Behavior or outcome – clearly states<br />
what the learner should know or<br />
be able to do.<br />
2. Conditions under which learning will<br />
occur – describe the teaching<br />
technique or learning intervention.<br />
3. Criteria or standard – describes the<br />
level of achievement or the<br />
acceptable performance to mastery.<br />
4. Student or learner may or may not<br />
be indicated – this is the student<br />
or learner.<br />
16<br />
To assist the instructor, an example of each type of objective is provided below.<br />
Cognitive – Given lecture<br />
and group activity the<br />
students will be able to<br />
identify the four components<br />
of a behavioral objective<br />
according McNergney and<br />
McNergney.<br />
Affective – Given group and<br />
individual assignments<br />
students will develop an<br />
appreciation for the food<br />
production system as evidence<br />
by their selection of at least 8<br />
of 10 politically appropriate<br />
responses according to Mager.<br />
Psychomotor – Given<br />
demonstration students will<br />
be to assemble a small<br />
engine according to the 25<br />
specifications in the Briggs<br />
and Stratton Manual (2004).<br />
Instructors need to clarify for themselves what they are attempting to teach students. By<br />
shaping/writing it in the form of a measurable objective they must reflect upon it in a way that<br />
they clarify it for themselves. When the instructor has a plan, monitoring students progress<br />
becomes a strong vehicle to inform the instructional process by letting students know that they<br />
will be held accountable for learning.
Monitoring Student Progress<br />
To ensure that all students perform up to their maximum potential, the instructor must develop<br />
and implement an instructional monitoring system. It is important and plausible to indicate the<br />
details of the instructional monitoring system in the course syllabus. It is not only necessary to<br />
monitor the performance of each student; it is also important to let them know their performances<br />
are constantly being monitored and each student is systematically apprised of his or her progress.<br />
17<br />
This raises a basic question – what do students need to be apprised of in relation to their<br />
performances? The instructor should evaluate, grade, and return all student work by the next class<br />
meeting. When student work is not returned in a timely manner it loses its utility as a positive<br />
impact on the student. Returning student work late also sends the wrong message to the student.<br />
When work is returned late students interpret this as the instructor’s lack of professionalism.<br />
Returning work late reduces the overall impact of its importance. The instructor should<br />
systematically meet with each student at specified intervals during the semester. During these visits<br />
the student should be kept up-to-date on his or her performance and provided substantive feedback<br />
on how he or she can improve. Students should be apprised of their attendance and the extent to<br />
which attendance will impact final grading. The best plan and monitoring system will fail if the<br />
instructor does not have effective oral and written communication skills.<br />
Effective Communication Skills<br />
Effective instructors are good communicators both orally and in written. Instructors tend to focus on<br />
the group; however, effective instructors tend to focus on the individual student. The literature is<br />
clear that we work with groups but we teach individuals. Effective instructors must be able to relate<br />
to the learning of individual students. This means that in order to effectively teach the material<br />
the instructor must be able to make connections with individual students. In other words, learners<br />
must believe/perceive that the instructor is attempting to communicate with them.<br />
Effective instructors are skilled at communicating learning expectation and setting attainable goals<br />
for learners. How can the instructor communicate this perception to the learner? Effective<br />
instructors learn and refer to students by name soon after the class starts. During class sessions the<br />
instructor should frequently call upon students to interact within the context of the subject matter.<br />
When students do not respond correctly to in class questions the instructor should not chastise the<br />
but provide clues and tips to encourage them. Students tend to respond more favorable to positive<br />
reinforcement in class. Effective instructors never use sarcasm or embarrass students.<br />
According to Slavin (2004) “communicating expectations for success and reinforcing success when<br />
it occurs are two of the most important skills a teacher exhibits.” Instructors must communicate in<br />
such a way that they are able to acknowledge student failures in a supportive environment and in<br />
the context of goal setting and improvement. Developing effective communication skills is an<br />
integral part of learning and implementing effective instructional strategies. According to Slavin<br />
(2003) “the link between what the teacher wants students to learn and students’ actual learning is<br />
called instruction or pedagogy.”<br />
Summary<br />
Effective instruction is a complex social, cultural and interpersonal interaction/communication<br />
between the instructor, and learner. The instructor must be an effective planner and be familiar<br />
with instructional strategies that best communicated the pending subject. The instructor must be<br />
able to access what the student already knows and be able to clarify for himself what he is<br />
attempting to teach. The effective instructor is able to motivate students through success and use<br />
failures positively as building blocks for improvement. Effective instructors are able to set learning<br />
objectives and assess when they have been accomplished. The effective instructor has passion for<br />
his subject matter and enjoys working with students.<br />
Additional Resources include:<br />
What Is Good Teaching? By Diane M. Enerson – Linked with permission from The Penn<br />
<strong>State</strong> Teacher II: Learning to Teach; Teaching to Learn, a publication of Schreyer<br />
Institute for Teaching Excellence at Pennsylvania <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>.
Traits of Effective Teaching<br />
By Richard A. Jackson, Ph.D.<br />
Adjunct Assistant Professor<br />
Department of Curriculum and Instruction, School of Education<br />
18<br />
What is an effective teacher? In large measure, we identify effectiveness by input and outcome<br />
measures, along with the performance of students on various testing criteria. We often tend to<br />
generalize student performance as a simple measure of teacher effectiveness. A forceful<br />
argument can be made that the upward change in a students’ performance on an examination<br />
is not the only measure to identify teacher effectiveness.<br />
Some of the traits of a good teacher now being explored as effectiveness measures include:<br />
• Student motivation: Knowing<br />
when and how to intervene. A<br />
teacher must decide whether a<br />
student is off task or misbehaving.<br />
• Use of the principle of least<br />
intervention: When simple or<br />
routine classroom behavior is being<br />
handled, such misbehaviors should<br />
be handled with the simplest, least<br />
intrusive methods of prevention<br />
or correction measures that<br />
will work.<br />
Some practices to avoid include:<br />
• Harsh and humiliating reprimands<br />
that involve very negative verbal<br />
feedback: Teachers sometimes give<br />
harsh reprimands when they have<br />
lost emotional control in response<br />
to misbehavior.<br />
• Threats: A statement that<br />
expresses the intent to punish if<br />
the student does not comply<br />
with the teacher’s wishes.<br />
• Group punishment: This occurs<br />
when the entire class or group is<br />
punished because of the<br />
misbehavior of an individual.<br />
Additional information is available at the following link:<br />
Traits of Effective Teachers<br />
Borrowed with permission from Teaching at The Ohio <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>: A<br />
Handbook 2001.<br />
Published by the Office of Faculty and TA Development, The Ohio <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>
Although many people believe that good teaching is impossible to define in any general way, a<br />
large body of research suggests that certain characteristics are consistently associated with good<br />
college teaching as viewed by students, other teachers, and administrators. In a study of<br />
winners of the Alumni Distinguished Teaching Award at Ohio <strong>State</strong> (Ebro, 1977), observation<br />
of classes identified the following characteristics of effective teaching, which strongly parallel<br />
those found in other studies:<br />
19<br />
The teachers got right down to<br />
business. They began class promptly<br />
and were well organized.<br />
They taught at an appropriately fast<br />
pace, but stopped regularly to check<br />
student comprehension and<br />
engagement.<br />
They used a variety of instructional<br />
strategies rather than lecture alone.<br />
They focused on the topic and their<br />
instructional objectives and did not<br />
get sidetracked. Their explanations<br />
were clear.<br />
They used humor that was in keeping<br />
with their individual styles.<br />
They practiced good classroom<br />
management techniques, holding the<br />
attention and respect of the group.<br />
They interacted with students by<br />
providing immediate answers to<br />
questions or comments and corrective<br />
feedback when needed. They praised<br />
student answers and used probing<br />
questions to extend the answers.<br />
They provided a warm classroom<br />
climate by allowing students to speak<br />
freely and by including personal<br />
humor or other attempts to relate to<br />
students as people.<br />
They used nonverbal behavior, such<br />
as gestures, walking around, and eye<br />
contact, to reinforce their comments.<br />
Joseph Lowman (1996) describes two main dimensions of effective college teaching that<br />
emerged in his studies: intellectual excitement (enthusiasm, knowledge, inspiration, humor,<br />
interesting view-point, clarity, organization) and interpersonal concern/effective motivation<br />
(concern, caring, availability, friendliness, accessibility, helpfulness, encouragement,<br />
challenge). Other studies (see, for example, Chickering and Gamson, 1991) consistently<br />
identify knowledge of subject matter, organizational skills, enthusiasm, clarity, and interpersonal<br />
skills as marks of the effective teacher. The amount of agreement across studies suggests that<br />
the characteristics of good teaching are not mysterious or extremely discipline-specific. They<br />
can, and have been, identified by researchers, students, and professionals alike. Inspection of<br />
these characteristics fails to support another commonly held belief about teaching:<br />
“Good teachers are born, not made.” While certain characteristics, such as humor and interpersonal<br />
skills, seem to come easily to some people and not others, people are not born with knowledge of a<br />
given discipline or competency in the use of instructional strategies. Furthermore, those who exhibit<br />
these qualities most consistently state that they work hard at attaining them and are very conscious<br />
of their actions and their effects.<br />
These highly conscious teachers are examples of what Donald Schön (1983) has termed the<br />
“reflective practitioner,” the professional who acquires expertise by learning in the action<br />
environment. In a study of Ohio <strong>State</strong> faculty (Chism, 1988), a model of faculty growth in<br />
teaching emerged that suggested that effective teachers develop by maximizing what they learn
through experience. They engage in cycles of learning during which they try a practice,<br />
observe its effects, and decide how and when they will use a similar practice. The process is<br />
often carried on without a great deal of conscious attention and rather unsystematically by<br />
most teachers. What distinguishes those who learn best, however, is the very level of conscious<br />
reflection and the quality of information they bring to bear in determining the effects of a<br />
practice in a particular context. The best teachers know not only what they are doing, but why<br />
it is working and why it is likely to work in one kind of environment and not in another.<br />
Although they may have some natural personality characteristics that support their success,<br />
they also work very hard at their teaching and continually try to improve.<br />
Teaching Styles<br />
Borrowed with permission from Ohio <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong> Teaching Handbook, Chapter 3.<br />
A number of writers have observed differences in style among teachers. They classify them<br />
according to a number of dimensions that represent how the teachers approach their students,<br />
the ways in which they think learning takes place, and personal strengths and preferences.<br />
Lowman (1996), for example, observes that exemplary college teachers “appear to be those<br />
who are highly proficient in either one of two fundamental sets of skills: the ability to offer<br />
presentations in clearly organized and interesting ways [intellectual excitement] or to relate to<br />
students in ways that communicate positive regard and motivate them to work hard to meet<br />
academic challenges [inter-personal rapport]. All are probably at least completely competent in<br />
both sets of skills but out-standing in one or, occasionally, even both of them” (p. 38). Grasha<br />
(1996) delineates five teaching styles:<br />
20<br />
Expert — is concerned with transmitting information from an expert status; challenges<br />
students to enhance their competence.<br />
Formal Authority — is concerned with the acceptable ways to do things and providing<br />
students with the structure they need to learn.<br />
Personal Model — believes in teaching by personal example; oversees and guides<br />
students to emulate.<br />
Facilitator — emphasizes the personal nature of teacher-student interactions;<br />
guides students toward developing their capacity for independent action.<br />
Delegator — is concerned with developing students’ capacity to function<br />
autonomously; encourages independent projects.<br />
Grasha advocates an “integrated model” of teaching and learning styles, recognizing that<br />
individual teachers will naturally exhibit different styles, but stressing that teachers must<br />
cultivate certain styles so that they can use approaches that are appropriate to the instructional<br />
situations and kind of learners they encounter. For example, he observes that a blend of the<br />
Expert-Formal Authority styles works best with learners who are dependent and less capable<br />
with the content. Grasha advocates that teachers reflect on their stylistic approaches and make<br />
conscious decisions about these. His book, Teaching with Style, provides many exercises for<br />
faculty to use in thinking about styles of teaching.<br />
What Can Graduate Students Do To Be More Effective TAs?<br />
Linked with permission from Washington <strong>University</strong> TA Handbook (See Page 6 of PDF file)<br />
with credit given to the <strong>University</strong> of California at San Diego for providing the original<br />
article from which it was derived.<br />
Additional Resources include:<br />
What Is Good Teaching? By Diane M. Enerson – Linked with permission from The Penn <strong>State</strong><br />
Teacher II: Learning to Teach; Teaching to Learn, a publication of Schreyer Institute<br />
for Teaching Excellence at Pennsylvania <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>.
Modes of Teaching<br />
By Brenda Hall, Ph.D.<br />
Assistant Professor<br />
Department of Human Development and Services,<br />
School of Education<br />
21<br />
Modes of teaching refer to the manner or ways of teaching. It is essential to link the way an<br />
individual teaches to his or her understanding of learning. Students in academic settings must<br />
be encouraged to know how and why to think for themselves, how to make and support<br />
individual judgments, and recognize the vital connection between content and skills<br />
development. Learning is inspired by sentiments of compassion, fairness, and a fervent desire to<br />
gain the intrinsic and pragmatic values of education. It is crucial for students to build this<br />
foundation for the pursuit of knowledge and growth in a world that is changing so quickly and<br />
where career opportunities are becoming more complex.<br />
Modes of teaching must inspire an active exchange of ideas, knowledge, and experiences that<br />
enhances the learning of others and self. Based on this notion, there are several guiding<br />
principles for selecting the ways of teaching. These include:<br />
Knowledge is viewed<br />
as a social construct,<br />
contextual and relative.<br />
Learning occurs<br />
through constructing<br />
knowledge with a<br />
social context or group.<br />
The learning<br />
environment must<br />
be one where students<br />
actively participate,<br />
searching for meaning<br />
and asking questions.<br />
Learning is<br />
developmental,<br />
interactive.<br />
Learning is student<br />
centered, uses prior<br />
knowledge and<br />
capitalizes on context.<br />
Teaching assistants can provide students with experiences that help them to rethink their<br />
existing ideas, knowledge bases, and skills, creating new skills, and developing their full<br />
potential. Specifically in the classroom this requires that teachers create an interactive<br />
environment, promote an exchange of a wide variety of information (theory, concepts, ideas,<br />
research, experiences) and encourage ownership and application of content. In addition to<br />
lecture other specific modes of teaching include:<br />
Collaborative learning groups - The key concept in the collaborative learning group is<br />
“shared responsibility.” This is a version of small group work but the major difference is that all<br />
members of the group must contribute equally and most of the work is done in class, following<br />
specific instructions. The collaborative groups are designed so that students must integrate<br />
their work and function as a team.<br />
Research projects - These can be assigned individually or as a large class project. By involving<br />
the entire class in a project and working through the research process, students can take<br />
ownership and have a “hands-on” experience regarding research. It is useful to have an end<br />
result such as a workshop or research presentation so that students can share their data and<br />
results with another audience.<br />
Case study - This mode of teaching requires application of content to specific experience.<br />
Students are expected to apply understanding of theories and concepts to a practical situation.<br />
These are particularly helpful for those classes related to professional training programs.<br />
Concept checks - These are a series of assignments designed to facilitate student learning,<br />
especially as it relates to reading assignments. A variety of formats can be used. Students may<br />
be asked to respond to specific questions, locate and summarize related research, identify and<br />
critique web-sites. It is a good way to ensure students are comprehending the readings.
Large/small group discussion - One way to implement these modes of teaching is to have<br />
students responsible for leading a discussion. The instructor can model appropriate ways to<br />
present information and involve the students in discussion. These discussions can be facilitated<br />
by individuals or by small groups.<br />
22<br />
These modes of teaching allow for connections among theoretical, conceptual, and practical<br />
learning. Students exposed to a variety of teaching modes help to create a supportive, positive<br />
learning environment.<br />
Additional Resources on Teaching Modes includes:<br />
Ohio <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong> Teaching Handbook - Linked with permission from Ohio <strong>State</strong><br />
<strong>University</strong>. Topics covered include:<br />
◆ Active Learning<br />
◆ Leading and Managing Discussions<br />
◆ Lecturing<br />
◆ Building Rapport<br />
◆ Student Feedback<br />
◆ Creating Closure<br />
Dimensions of Effective Teaching<br />
By Richard A. Jackson, Ph.D.<br />
Adjunct Assistant Professor<br />
Department of Curriculum and Instruction,<br />
School of Education<br />
There are many elements to consider if one is to be an effective teacher. These include:<br />
• Planning and goal setting – What are the goals of the course, class, or lesson to be taught?<br />
•Teaching or classroom environment – What is the structure of the teaching environment?<br />
Is it one dimensional and multi-dimensional? Are there various delivery systems and<br />
instructional methods available, or is the instructor limited to traditional lecture and<br />
demonstration?<br />
• Cultural considerations – Are there cultural elements that need to be considered? Is the<br />
classroom a multicultural or single cultural environment? Are the students functioning in<br />
their native language or are they learning a second language? Can the students relate the<br />
lessons being taught to their own backgrounds and experiences?<br />
• Classroom management – Are there basic classroom management issues that need to be<br />
considered? Student discipline issues, cultural values, and religious backgrounds all can<br />
impact successful classroom management.<br />
• Student motivation and interest retention – What techniques will be employed to develop<br />
and maintain student interest in the subject matter and motivate student learning?<br />
Additional information is available at the following link:<br />
Effective Teaching - Linked with permission from <strong>University</strong> of Georgia TA Handbook.
Teaching Methods and Active Learning<br />
By Jane Davis-Seaver, Ph.D.<br />
Associate Professor<br />
Department of Curriculum and Instruction,<br />
School of Education<br />
23<br />
Perhaps the most effective teaching method is the hands-on approach that requires students to<br />
become actively involved in the learning process. This is easy to accomplish in a lab setting, or<br />
an art, music or physical education setting. These disciplines are inherently hands-on.<br />
It can also be accomplished in lecture classes however, by doing one or all of several things.<br />
First, you can begin the class by asking a question, then dividing the class into small groups for<br />
a short discussion. One person from each group can summarize the conversation of his or her<br />
group, and when you begin your lecture, the students are already actively involved. A second<br />
method for actively involving students in a lecture is to punctuate your lecture with timely<br />
questions and call on several students to respond to each one, (not just one student per<br />
question). A third method is known as the call and response wherein students actively enter<br />
the lecture itself by repeating or responding in a repetitive way to your comments. For<br />
example, if you are reviewing the characteristics of a butterfly and comparing them to a moth,<br />
you can ask “Does a butterfly fly at night?” and all the students can respond “No!” You can say<br />
“Does a moth fly at night?” and the students can respond “Yes!” You should break this pattern<br />
from time to time, however, to make sure that the students are actually listening to your<br />
questions.<br />
Another way to do this is to start a sentence and have one or several students finish it for you.<br />
Grouping students within the class for discussion of topics brought up in your lecture while you<br />
walk around and listen to the conversation is an effective way of checking to see if they<br />
understood what you have said to them.<br />
The lecture method of teaching can be enhanced by the effective use of technology. A lively<br />
and colorful PowerPoint presentation can help students think through difficult material.<br />
However, the instructor should be careful not to read the slides to the students but to add to<br />
and explain the information on the slides. It is also helpful for students to have individual<br />
copies of the outline form of the presentation to take notes on. That way they can pay more<br />
attention to what you are saying instead of trying to copy the slides. Short videos, DVD’s<br />
or other visuals that accompany your lecture should enhance, not replace, your role as<br />
the instructor.<br />
Whatever method you choose,<br />
adequate and careful preparation<br />
is vital. All materials should be<br />
prepared ahead of time and be<br />
readily available. All technology<br />
should be ready and on standby<br />
when class begins, and you should<br />
be present when students come<br />
into class. Not all surprises can be<br />
anticipated, but careful and<br />
thorough groundwork can<br />
eliminate most of them. When<br />
you are well-prepared, you can<br />
then be enthusiastic about your<br />
topic and students will have<br />
confidence in your knowledge<br />
and ability as an instructor.<br />
Additional information on teaching methods and<br />
strategies can be found at the following links:<br />
In the Classroom - Linked with permission from John<br />
Hopkins <strong>University</strong>.<br />
Alternative Strategies and Active Learning - Linked with<br />
permission from “Teaching at <strong>Carolina</strong>,” a publication of<br />
the <strong>University</strong> of <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> at Chapel Hill.
Tying Teaching Methods to Objectives<br />
By Dawn C. Waegerle, Ph.D.<br />
Associate Professor<br />
Department of Curriculum and Instruction,<br />
School of Education<br />
24<br />
One of the most difficult things a teacher must do is to make learning mean something, not<br />
just for a test, but for use later in life. Knowledge itself is the outcome of learning, but general<br />
knowledge built on rote, short term memory, fades quickly and may not be used to facilitate<br />
later learning. There are a number of models that teachers use to help bring sense to their<br />
instruction. One is a revised Bloom’s Taxonomy of Learning, which ascribes levels of learning<br />
to cognitive processes. The link below will take you to a web-site that explains the concept<br />
more fully.<br />
http://faculty.washington.edu/krumme/guides/bloom.html<br />
Evaluation<br />
Synthesis<br />
Analysis<br />
Application<br />
Understanding<br />
Knowledge<br />
Another philosophical approach comes from Constructivist approaches where teachers and<br />
students plan and make decisions about content, activities and approaches to learning content.<br />
No one of these theoretical approaches is the right one to use all the time with all content.<br />
Some work better than others viewing the students, their needs, and the learning that<br />
must occur.<br />
Each of these approaches does present an opportunity for the teacher and the learner to<br />
develop a depth of learning and understanding that takes them beyond pure memory. The<br />
teacher that can cause “big picture” learning to happen, is the most effective teacher.<br />
In order to determine which of these teaching models to follow based on the course objectives,<br />
teachers must think about what the objectives describe and then determine the best way to<br />
present the content. They must think about who the potential students are that will be taking<br />
the class. The prior experiences and knowledge that they bring to the desk have a great deal<br />
to do with the instructional choices made. Try to design the course around the needs of the<br />
students. What are the students like and what do they know? Are they traditional age students<br />
or adult learners? Individuals of different ages have different learning styles and needs. All of<br />
this requires thought and planning. It is best to try to make your teaching flexible to meet the<br />
needs of the learners, the setting, the number of students in your class, and the primary<br />
purposes of the lesson.<br />
Rosenshine has given us Six Teaching Functions. (Rosenshine, 1988). These functions give a<br />
skeletal guideline for effective instruction, particularly for content that lends itself to more<br />
direct instruction.
Teaching Functions:<br />
Review and check previous lesson’s work and<br />
check to see that students understood<br />
content prior to moving to the next concept.<br />
Provide for guided practice, where the<br />
students can demonstrate what they are<br />
learning or understanding from the lesson.<br />
25<br />
Present new material, making sure to tell the<br />
students what will be taught. In other words,<br />
describe and review the objectives for the<br />
lesson, then teach in small steps,<br />
providing examples.<br />
Give feedback and correctives as needed.<br />
Provide independent practice, where<br />
students can demonstrate what they know.<br />
Review as needed to tie new learning to<br />
old knowledge.<br />
Constructivist models lend themselves to inquiry learning, cooperative grouping, instructional<br />
conversations, and cognitive apprenticeships. This form of instruction is based on social<br />
cognitive theories of learning. Observational learning is one of the ways that this constructivist<br />
approach uses this technique. Through observational learning, we learn how to perform<br />
behaviors. This requires attention, retention, production, motivation and reinforcement.<br />
Some common elements of<br />
constructivist perspectives<br />
include the beliefs that the<br />
learning environment<br />
presents:<br />
• Complex, challenging, environments and authentic tasks<br />
• Social negotiation and shared responsibility as a part of learning<br />
• Multiple representations of content<br />
• The understanding that knowledge is constructed<br />
• Student-centered instruction (Driscoll, 1994)<br />
The teaching approach used can be effective if it is matched to the needs of the learner and<br />
the content to be taught. As a teacher develops lessons and teaching strategies tied to objectives,<br />
thought must be given to the types of materials and content used for teaching enhancement.<br />
These materials must:<br />
Be appropriate for defined objectives.<br />
Provide adequate instruction for required<br />
skills.<br />
Be sequenced logically and chunked<br />
meaningfully.<br />
Be clear and understandable.<br />
It is important to remember what teaching strategies worked well when you were a student,<br />
but don’t design your teaching strategy solely on the style of learning you prefer. Thought and<br />
reflection prior to instruction will help create learning environments that work for most<br />
students and give the teacher the satisfaction of a class well taught.<br />
Additional information can be found at the following link:<br />
The Penn <strong>State</strong> Teacher II: Learning to Teach; Teaching to Learn, a publication of Schreyer<br />
Institute for Teaching Excellence at Pennsylvania <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong> (linked with permission):<br />
Articles to select from include: (click on links below)<br />
Be relevant to learners' needs.<br />
Use media and technology that encourages<br />
efficient management.<br />
Allow adequate opportunity for practice<br />
and constructive feedback.<br />
Provide relevant assessment tied<br />
to performance objectives.<br />
• Teaching with the Lecture Method - Effective Explanations--John P. Lowe<br />
• Teaching with Collaborative Activities and Small Groups<br />
• Preparing Effective Collaborative Activities<br />
• The Process and Product of Collaborative Activities or Three Men and an Egg<br />
• Commonly Asked Questions about Teaching Collaborative Activities
Classroom Situations To Consider<br />
By Judie Bucholz, Ph.D.<br />
Adjunct Assistant Professor<br />
Department of Human Development and Services,<br />
School of Education<br />
26<br />
1. Be Professional. You are no longer a student and will command more respect from the<br />
students if you dress in professional attire and carry yourself as a professional. You should not<br />
hang out with the students at the wall or the plot or go to parties where your students might<br />
be. Your language should be professional and not heavy in slang. Keep your biases in check.<br />
2. Be Prepared. Students will know if you know the material or if you’re bluffing. Do your<br />
homework and prepare for the classes in advance. If you don’t know the answers to questions<br />
the student’s pose, let them know you’ll find the answers and get back to them and be sure<br />
you do.<br />
3. Use Various Forms of Course Delivery. Students learn in many ways. Lecture is not the<br />
only method of course delivery. Use technology in the classroom and encourage the students<br />
to use it as well. Many times the publisher of the text will provide PowerPoint slide<br />
presentations to compliment the course, some have videos available, and others have<br />
web-sites available to the students for other learning activities. Ask your advisor about the<br />
options in the course you are teaching.<br />
4. Absenteeism. It is not unusual for students to skip a class here and there. An attendance<br />
policy clearly stated in the syllabus will eliminate many issues associated with attendance.<br />
Students should be informed how their grade will be affected by attendance. Consistent<br />
application of the policy and reminders of the policy will reinforce the standards.<br />
5. Plagiarism. Plagiarism is not tolerated by any institution of higher learning. Some students<br />
may not understand what constitutes plagiarism and may need to be reminded of the proper<br />
procedures for citing another person’s work.<br />
6. Textbooks. Some students try to get through a course without buying a textbook. The<br />
importance of the text to the student’s successful passing of the class should be emphasized<br />
early in the course. There are a variety of sources on the web and in the local area that sell<br />
textbooks, new and used, some even cheaper than the bookstore. Cost and availability should<br />
not be prohibitive factors in getting a textbook. Remind the students of their options as well<br />
as responsibilities.<br />
7. Inadequate Writing Skills. Students without adequate writing skills should be referred to the<br />
Center for Student Success or Student Services as soon as possible.<br />
8. Disruptive Students. Swift action sets the tone that disruption will not be tolerated. If a<br />
student becomes disruptive and will not listen to you, report him or her to your advisor. An<br />
altercation in the classroom will undermine your position and authority. Let the advisor<br />
handle the situation.<br />
9. Personal Issues. Some students think the classroom is a place to vent their personal issues.<br />
Rather than allow a student’s personal issues to overwhelm a class, students should be referred<br />
to agencies appropriate for the issue e.g., counseling center, financial aid, registrar’s office,<br />
etc. When a student is venting, ask him or her to speak to you after class and make the<br />
referral. Be careful how you shut the student down. Do it tactfully and appropriately. Do not<br />
join in when a student is criticizing or displaying negativism. You will lose the respect from<br />
the students.
10. Tardiness. It is the student’s responsibility to report to class on time, allowing time for<br />
parking, traffic and other issues. Coming to class late is an unnecessary disruption. A clear<br />
statement on tardiness should be in the syllabus and the consequences enforced fairly and<br />
equitably. You as the Teaching Assistant should not be late for class. In fact, early is better.<br />
When you cannot avoid being late, notify someone who is able to notify the class before it<br />
starts. You do not want to give the students the impression you do not care about the class or<br />
about them.<br />
27<br />
For additional information:<br />
Common Teaching Situations: Teaching and Learning @ UW - Linked with permission from<br />
Teaching and Learning at The <strong>University</strong> of Washington, a publication of The<br />
<strong>University</strong> of Washington.<br />
Articles to select from this section include: (click on links below)<br />
Presenting Information<br />
Tutoring<br />
Leading Discussions<br />
Critiquing Student Projects<br />
Conducting Labs<br />
Teaching Problem Solving<br />
Teaching Foreign Languages<br />
Student Writing<br />
Leading Quiz Sections
SECTION IV<br />
28<br />
Orientation at N.C. A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong><br />
Getting Started<br />
By A. Ayanna Boyd-Williams,<br />
Assistant Dean<br />
School of Graduate Studies<br />
At the beginning of each semester, the School of Graduate Studies presents an orientation and<br />
training session for all graduate students who have either applied for or were offered a teaching<br />
assistantship. As mandated by the <strong>State</strong> of <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> General Administration, all<br />
departments hiring graduate assistants are required to have their graduate assistants attend the<br />
orientation and training sessions provided by School of Graduate Studies prior to the first day<br />
of class.<br />
In addition to the orientation and training program, your academic departments may<br />
supplement these training efforts with such activities as laboratory safety orientation, faculty<br />
mentoring, weekly colloquium sessions dealing with teaching techniques, learning styles,<br />
technical topics, and required courses. Other departments require teaching assistants to<br />
participate in an initial orientation session with the course faculty. These sessions acquaint<br />
the teaching assistants with faculty expectations, grading standards, and specific methods of<br />
laboratory instructional delivery. Some departments require their students to take a teaching<br />
methodology class as well as a course in class management prior to becoming a GTA.<br />
Graduate Teaching Assistants in the English department are required to take English 770,<br />
which is a seminar, designed for student presentations and discussion.<br />
Funding to supplement the cost of the GTA Orientation Program is provided by the National<br />
Science Foundation Student Transition and Retention Program (STAR) as part of its mission<br />
to recruit, retain and prepare the next generation of under represented minority professors in<br />
the sciences, mathematics, engineering and technology.<br />
The workshop consists of two half-day segments and focuses on topics such as Duties and<br />
Responsibilities; Compensation; Effective Teaching; Roles and Expectations, Performance<br />
Evaluation; Classroom Management and Diversity, Professional Portfolio Development and<br />
Professional Ethics.<br />
Please click on link to view a sample current and previous training program information.<br />
http://www.ncat.edu/~gradsch/orientation.htm
Planning Ahead of Time<br />
Checklist for Teaching<br />
Getting off to a good start requires planning ahead. Well before the semester begins, check<br />
with the supervising professor in charge of the course to confirm or clarify expectations for<br />
your role(s) in the course.<br />
The following list will give you some ideas about what you may want to ask people in your<br />
department before the first day of class:<br />
Questions to ask the department chair or graduate coordinator<br />
• Terms of your contract written in the letter of intent: What are the possible duties? Do I<br />
have a choice of courses to GTA for? What is the usual length of time to serve as a GTA?<br />
Are there limits on the number of semesters I can be employed as a GTA? Is there a<br />
reapplication to be a GTA each year or is my GTA appointment automatically renewed?<br />
• Office space and facilities: Do I have a choice of office space? What facilities and supplies<br />
(telephone, computer, photocopier, or other job supplies) are provided?<br />
• Employment opportunities: Are there summer GTA opportunities? Is it possible to hold<br />
another part-time job at the same time as the assistantship? What other means of<br />
financial support are available within the department?<br />
• Training for new GTAs: Does my department offer orientation or training for new GTAs?<br />
Is the <strong>University</strong> Teaching Seminar in August required? Who coordinates the GTAs?<br />
Who supervises my course?<br />
• Evaluation process of GTA’s performance: Is my teaching observed and assessed by faculty<br />
or lead-GTAs? Do I have access to the results of my evaluation? Are written performance<br />
standards available? Is the student evaluation form available for my information? When<br />
are student evaluations given during the semester?<br />
Questions to ask the course supervisor<br />
• Goals of the course: Are there course prerequisites? What are the course learning<br />
outcomes? What is the level and range of abilities of typical students? What are the<br />
expectations for student performance?<br />
• GTA Structure: Is my section a highly structured course with each GTA required to cover<br />
the same information and give the same tests, or is there more latitude in determining<br />
the material?<br />
• Course/Meetings: What is the place and time the class meets? Are GTAs expected to<br />
attend lectures?<br />
• Specifics of your section, lab, or other duties: What are my responsibilities for preparing<br />
lectures? Evaluating student work? Getting or creating quizzes, tests, and assignments? In<br />
general, how much time will these responsibilities take?<br />
• Course policies and materials: Is there an attendance policy? Plagiarism policy?<br />
Disabilities policy? What is the department procedure for handling student requests to<br />
drop or add the course? Getting the class list? Getting or creating a course and/or section<br />
syllabus? What are some first day activities? How do I post grades? How do lab or<br />
recitation grades contribute to the students’ course grades? Are there assigned textbooks<br />
and readings? Does the course have a web page?<br />
• Department procedures: What are department procedures when I am sick or have<br />
another necessary absence? What is appropriate dress when teaching?<br />
29
Questions to ask experienced GTAs in your department<br />
• Role GTAs play in the life of the department: Are we required to attend faculty meetings? Serve on<br />
committees? Socialize? What are the means of information about departmental policies and activities?<br />
Getting things done in the department, e.g., copying, getting coffee, selecting a major professor?<br />
• Amount of departmental guidance and support for GTAs: Are there weekly GTA meetings? Do we<br />
attend course lectures? Are mentors available?<br />
• Approximate amount of time a GTA spends: How much time will I spend preparing for class? Meeting<br />
with students during office hours? Grading papers and tests?<br />
• Experiences other GTAs have had with the course you will GTA: Is this a difficult course for<br />
undergraduates? On what areas of the course do they need the most help? What are students’<br />
attitudes towards class?<br />
Planning Ahead of Time<br />
Getting off to a good start requires planning ahead. Well before the semester begins, check with the<br />
supervising professor in charge of the course to confirm or clarify expectations for your role(s) in the course.<br />
Once you are clear about your teaching roles and responsibilities, here are the next things to think<br />
about as you prepare to teach:<br />
Goals<br />
Whether you are planning a ten-week course, a fifty-minute section<br />
meeting, or a twenty-minute office hour, it will help you and your<br />
students if you think about your teaching and learning goals. For any<br />
of these interactions with students, plan ahead by asking yourself:<br />
For example, as a lab assistant your goal might be to have students<br />
solve problems for themselves. With this goal, your task is to design<br />
What do I want students to learn?<br />
What challenges to learning are<br />
students likely to face?<br />
How can I help students meet<br />
those challenges?<br />
How will I be able to tell<br />
what they have learned?<br />
activities that will lead students to take appropriate independent steps with an experiment rather than<br />
relying solely on step-by-step instructions in the lab manual.<br />
You can anticipate that students who have previously worked only with carefully prescribed lab procedures<br />
may have some difficulty working in the lab more independently. Therefore, you should provide them with<br />
guidelines for making decisions as they work through the lab, and monitor students’ decision-making in their<br />
lab groups in order to assess their progress.<br />
You will need to decide in advance how to determine the effectiveness of these activities in helping students<br />
to solve problems on their own. For example, will it be apparent from their lab write-up? Or will you need to<br />
have students document their decision-making process separately from the lab manual, so you can judge their<br />
problem-solving process in addition to the final results of the<br />
experiment?<br />
The Syllabus<br />
The value and utility of a good syllabus should not be underestimated. The time you spend planning the<br />
course and writing a syllabus will have far-reaching and time-saving benefits throughout the semester. A good<br />
syllabus will answer many of your students’ questions about your expectations, your role in the course, and<br />
their responsibilities. Typically the syllabus includes information on learning goals, course content and<br />
materials, a timetable for class meetings (including reading, assignments, due dates, examination dates, etc.),<br />
and evaluation procedures. The supervising professor generally develops the syllabus; however, you may be<br />
involved in the process.<br />
If you are teaching quiz sections or labs, you may not be involved with development of the syllabus for the<br />
course as a whole, but students will appreciate receiving a syllabus providing information for the portion of<br />
the course that they have with you. In your section or lab syllabus, provide clear and specific information<br />
about policies and expectations (for example, participation, plagiarism, make-up examinations, absences, late<br />
assignments, incompletes, and extra credit). Include your office location and hours so students know where<br />
and when to find you. You may also find it useful to offer "online "office hours, so students know your policies<br />
and timelines for responding to their e-mail messages.<br />
For more information on how to develop a course syllabus, click on this link borrowed from Pennsylvania<br />
<strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>.<br />
30
Classroom Guidelines<br />
Many of the classroom policies you develop to manage your classroom have the potential to affect<br />
students’ grades. When developing policies, first check with your department or supervising<br />
professor to determine if there are set rules to which you must adhere. Whether you use<br />
departmental policies or create your own after talking with experienced GAs and professors, be sure<br />
to clearly state your policies on your course syllabus. In all cases, you are required to make clear at<br />
the beginning of the term exactly what elements will be evaluated. It is not appropriate, for<br />
example, to include classroom participation in your final evaluation if your students have not been<br />
advised of this requirement. When developing classroom rules, keep in mind that it is always easier<br />
to loosen up tight policies than to introduce stricter policies midway through the semester.<br />
Attendance<br />
Students are expected to attend class meetings as scheduled. As an instructor, you decide how to<br />
evaluate attendance in determining students’ grades. Before doing so, check to see if your<br />
department has a policy regarding attendance. Excuses for absence from class are handled<br />
you and the student, and you may refuse a student’s request that an absence be excused or require<br />
the student to submit proof of absence (e.g., a doctor’s note).<br />
Late Assignments<br />
Accepting late assignments with no penalty is unfair to students who meet the deadline and have<br />
less time to perfect their work. To discourage late work, establish clear consequences for late<br />
assignments and discuss those consequences with the students at the beginning of the term. For<br />
instance, you may lower the grade on a late paper so much per calendar day, or you may add extra<br />
requirements to late papers. You may also establish a point (e.g., one week; once the next<br />
assignment is due) after which you will no longer accept late work. If your supervisor does not<br />
already have a policy in place for late work, talk with experienced GAs about their policies.<br />
Cheating<br />
The university has an established system for dealing with those who violate its conduct regulations.<br />
If you become involved in such a case, you should contact your supervising professor for assistance<br />
in handling the situation.<br />
31<br />
It is wise to find out before you give exams or start receiving students’ work just how your<br />
supervising professor would like you to handle instances of academic dishonesty. Often the professor<br />
will wish to take the leading role in dealing with any problems that arise, and he or she should be<br />
able to assess whether the incident should be reported to the Dean.<br />
If you are proctoring an exam and notice that a student is using unauthorized reference material or<br />
copying from a neighbor, you should attempt to halt that activity at that point or note the students<br />
involved and handle the matter after the exam ends.<br />
Plagiarism<br />
If you receive term papers or reports that you suspect are plagiarized (i.e., copied in whole or in part<br />
from some other author), you should make a reasonable effort to identify the source of the copied<br />
material before discussing your suspicions with the student. In some cases, you will find that the<br />
student does not understand the distinction between appropriate use of sources and outright<br />
plagiarism. Often your counseling and guidance can help you resolve the issue with the student.<br />
If after speaking with the student, you believe he or she has knowingly plagiarized all or part of the<br />
assignment, you must follow university procedures in dealing with the student. Although this is an<br />
unpleasant business, it is unfair to the students in the class who have done their work honestly to<br />
allow others to get away with cheating.
The best way to avoid plagiarism, however, is to prevent it. Below are some suggestions for<br />
preventing plagiarism in your classroom:<br />
<br />
When giving a writing assignment, discuss plagiarism and its consequences.<br />
To help those students who simply do not understand plagiarism (e.g., they<br />
think it only means copying an entire paper or section word-for-word; they<br />
come from a culture that has a different attitude toward using the words/ideas<br />
of others), provide examples of various types of "borrowing" and discuss<br />
whether each is plagiarism.<br />
32<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
When developing a major assignment, include several steps along the way so<br />
students have to work on the assignment early and turn something in to you<br />
on specific dates. For example, if you want them to write a term paper or create<br />
a poster on a topic of their choice, you could also include another two steps,<br />
such as a project proposal and an outline of their projects. This strategy<br />
minimizes procrastination and gives you a chance to see what the students<br />
are working on and guide them a little. Because of time limitations and<br />
fairness, you have to be careful to limit the scope of the feedback and give<br />
the same amount to all class members.<br />
Make it clear in the assignment instructions that you expect students to hand<br />
in all their preliminary workings together with the final draft of their project:<br />
their notes, doodlings, outlines, web and library printouts, preliminary computer<br />
drafts with notes and crossings out, etc. This material itself will not be graded,<br />
but will show the path the project took and demonstrate that the complete<br />
project was thought through and created rather than being downloaded whole<br />
from the web. Remind the students several times not to throw away their<br />
preliminary notes and drafts. Do not accept assignments that have almost<br />
no preliminary workings, and check that what is submitted relates to the<br />
final draft.<br />
Alter assignments from one semester to the next to decrease the likelihood<br />
that students will borrow papers from others who took the course in<br />
previous semesters.<br />
Make assignments specific to your course. For example, rather<br />
than asking students to write a paper on Stephen Jay Gould’s<br />
contributions to the field of science, ask them to write<br />
about how Gould’s book The Structure of Evolutionary<br />
Biology supports or conflicts with the principles discussed<br />
in your class.<br />
Additional Resources on Preventing Plagiarism:<br />
Can We Solve the Problem of Plagiarism? –linked from EXCHANGE, a collaborative<br />
publication of the following partners:<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
The National Co-ordination Team (NCT)<br />
The Learning and Teaching Suppor Network (LTSN)<br />
The Institute for Learning and Teaching (ILT)<br />
The Joint Information Systems Committee (JISC)
Graduate Teaching Assistants As Writing Teachers<br />
Linked with permission from the <strong>University</strong> of California at Santa Barbara,<br />
Office of Instructional Development.<br />
33<br />
Recommended Reading on Teaching Writing Skills:<br />
Elbow, P. Writing Without Teachers. New York: Oxford <strong>University</strong> Press, 1973.<br />
Fader, D. N., with Duggins, J., Fenn, T., and McNeil, E. The New Hooked on Books. New York:<br />
Berkeley Medallion Corporation, 1976.<br />
Fader, D. N., and McNeil, E. B. Hooked on Books: Program and Proof. New York: Berkeley<br />
Medallion Corporation, 1970.<br />
Holt, J. “How Teachers Make Children Hate Reading”. The Norton Reader, Eastman, A. M., et al.<br />
(Eds.). New York: W. W. Norton and Co., Inc., 1977, pp. 189-198.<br />
Marcus, S. “Teaching Editing in Composition Classes: A Somewhat Confluent Approach”.<br />
California English, 1978, October, Vol. 14, No. 5, pp. 4-5.<br />
On-line Resources on Including Writing Across Disciplines:<br />
Including Writing in Instruction linked with permission from The Ohio <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>.<br />
Click on link and go to Chapter 5, pages 11-12 of PDF file.<br />
Writing Across the Curriculum linked with permission from <strong>University</strong> of Wisconsin –<br />
Madison.<br />
Writing to Learn by Professor Erika Lindemann, as part of the monograph series “For Your<br />
Consideration,” published on-line by the <strong>University</strong> of <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> at Chapel Hill.<br />
Establishing the Classroom Climate<br />
By Kimberly Richards, Ph.D.<br />
Department of Human Development and Services,<br />
School of Education<br />
Setting a positive classroom climate is perhaps the most important aspect of the teaching<br />
process. Though climate or tone is conveyed from the first day of class and is important to<br />
develop this tone over the first few class meetings, maintaining the classroom climate is a<br />
consideration for the instructor throughout the period of the course.<br />
A positive classroom climate develops when instructors construct environments where all<br />
students are respected, given equal consideration, dealt with fairly, and have equal opportunity<br />
to understand and develop mastery of course subject matter. Humanistic environments<br />
cultivate a positive emotional atmosphere so students are able to develop a sense of connection,<br />
inquisitiveness, empowerment, and scholarly excitement. Inclusive environments are vital as<br />
well as learning will increase when students feel appreciated, safe, supported, and encouraged.<br />
Some tips for establishing a positive classroom environment are provided below.<br />
Get to Know Your Students<br />
Students are more likely to behave respectfully and learn more readily when the teacher has a<br />
genuine interest in their students. Students can be asked the first day of class to write their<br />
names, details, such as phone number and e-mail address, and professional goals/interests, or<br />
even a short autobiography. The instructor can refer to this information throughout the term.<br />
If class size permits, have students introduce themselves verbally.
Communicate Interpersonal Sensitivity<br />
You may have more positive experiences with students as you become aware of issues affecting<br />
students of various backgrounds. Instructors that are warm, empathetic, respect the students,<br />
and enthusiastic are likely to motivate students and build positive relationship with their<br />
students. Even if students demonstrate negative emotions, it is important for instructors to still<br />
exhibit warmth, respect, and empathy.<br />
Allow for Student Input into Course Framework<br />
Student input into the formulation of the class framework maximizes the chance that they will<br />
perceive the course as pertinent and valuable.<br />
Use a Variety of Instructional Strategies<br />
Students in your classes will have an array of learning styles. Develop a full repertoire of<br />
instructional strategies so you can reach as many students as possible and enhance the learning<br />
process of the students.<br />
Promote and Provide Multicultural Viewpoints on Issues and Experiences<br />
By presenting views and materials from a variety of perspectives you can promote a multitude<br />
of viewpoints on issues and experiences for your students. For example, if the topic is<br />
“Epistemology,” the content should include various ways of knowing/epistemological experiences,<br />
that is Euro-American, African-American, Native-American, and Asian-American ways of<br />
knowing can be included in the discussion and included with equal importance. It would also<br />
be important to include for example, the experiences and views of people with different<br />
socio-economic and gender statuses.<br />
Have High Student Expectations<br />
The instructor should have high expectations for all students, not just students from particular<br />
membership groups.<br />
Provide all Students the Opportunity to Participate<br />
Develop a system to ensure that all students are called on or provided with opportunities to<br />
participate if they wish to do so.<br />
34<br />
References:<br />
Sandler, B., Silverberg, L. & Hall, R. (1996). The Chilly Classroom Climate: A Guide to Improve<br />
the Education of Women. National Association for Women in Education.<br />
Saunders, S. & Diana Kardia. (2002). Classroom Climate For Graduate Teaching Assistants.<br />
Center for Research on Learning and Teaching. <strong>University</strong> of Michigan, Ann Arbor.<br />
Tulane <strong>University</strong>. (2000). Teaching Resource Manual. Teaching Enrichment Program New<br />
Orleans, LA 2000.<br />
Wright, J. (2002). Teacher Tips for Managing Group Behaviors. Intervention Central.<br />
Additional Resources on Classroom Climates:<br />
In the Classroom - Linked with permission from John Hopkins <strong>University</strong>. (Click on link<br />
above and scroll down to section titled “Establish A Classroom Climate.”)
Course Planning and Design<br />
By Paul Ankomah, Ph.D.<br />
Associate Professor<br />
Department of Human Performance and Leisure Studies,<br />
School of Education<br />
35<br />
Course Planning: This stage involves identifying potential sources of information and the<br />
types of information to be collected from each source. Potential information sources include:<br />
the <strong>University</strong> Bulletin, the College/School, Department, Faculty, Students, Professional<br />
Associations, Practitioners/Employers, etc.<br />
1. <strong>University</strong> Bulletin: You may obtain information on the<br />
resources available to both students and faculty and how<br />
to access these resources.<br />
2. College/School: From this source, you will gather<br />
information on the conceptual framework that guides all<br />
departments and programs within this unit. Also from this<br />
source, you will obtain information on accreditation<br />
standards and other requirements established by some<br />
education governing bodies. Information from this source<br />
is very critical in the course design phase. For instance, in<br />
the School of Education, the conceptual framework<br />
guiding all departments and programs is referred to as<br />
DART (Diversity, Assessment, Reflection and<br />
Technology). Your course design should be guided and<br />
reflected by the conceptual framework of your particular<br />
College/School.<br />
3. Department: From your department, you may obtain<br />
information about individual or specific program<br />
accreditation requirements and standards, certifications,<br />
pre-requisites, available resources, etc.<br />
4. Faculty: Faculty, especially those who have taught the<br />
course before you, may be an excellent source of<br />
information for course planning. Such individuals can<br />
share with you their personal experiences and also provide<br />
you with suggestions and ideas on how to structure the<br />
course, recommendations on textbooks and actual copies<br />
of course syllabi. Faculty interactions should not be<br />
restricted to only those that have previously taught the<br />
course. They should be extended to include faculty in your<br />
department/college/university teaching different courses<br />
and faculty from other universities teaching similar<br />
courses. Views and advice form such diverse sources will<br />
greatly enhance your course.<br />
5. Professional Organizations (including Accreditation and<br />
Certification)/Practitioners/Journals: From professional<br />
organizations you will learn about specific standards and<br />
expectations required of your students. Practitioners/<br />
potential employers will provide you with an overview and<br />
information on expected skills required of potential and<br />
future employees. Journals will help identify the current<br />
state of the literature and knowledge in the area.<br />
Cumulatively, all these sources enhance your ability to<br />
structure and design a course that is relevant, up-to-date,<br />
stimulating and comprehensive.<br />
Course Design:<br />
This stage entails creating the<br />
course syllabus. You will need to<br />
decide upon the components of<br />
the syllabus. The components<br />
may comprise of:<br />
1. Goals for the course.<br />
2. Specific Learning Objectives:<br />
These refer to the desired learning<br />
outcomes.<br />
3. Activities to be used:<br />
Refer to activities that you will use to<br />
facilitate student learning. Examples<br />
include, lectures, guest speakers,<br />
role-playing, student presentations<br />
(individual/groups), course projects,<br />
discussions, seminars, field trips,<br />
interviews, etc. It is important to use<br />
different activities and strategies for<br />
instructional delivery because of the<br />
different learning styles of students.<br />
4. Assessment:<br />
The purpose is to demonstrate that<br />
students actually learned what you<br />
claim they did learn in the course.<br />
Some forms of evidence that may<br />
be used to support your assertion<br />
include: test/exam results, portfolios,<br />
copies of assigned projects, student<br />
self-assessment evaluations,<br />
certification exams, reflective<br />
journals, pre and post exit interviews.<br />
In other words, employ a variety of<br />
assessment methods to evaluate<br />
student learning. Using just test<br />
grades may not provide a sufficient<br />
and comprehensive learning profile<br />
of any individual student.<br />
Assessment results can provide<br />
an invaluable piece of<br />
information for course<br />
planning, restructuring,<br />
and re-design.
References:<br />
Fairweather, James, A. (1996) Faculty Work and Public Trust: Restoring the Value of Teaching<br />
and Public Service in American Public Life. Boston, Massachusetts: Allyn & Bacon.<br />
36<br />
Haworth, G., & Conrad C. (1997). Emblems of Quality Education: Developing and Sustaining<br />
High-Quality Programs. Boston, Massachusetts: Allyn & Bacon.<br />
George, P. (1995) College Teaching Abroad: A Handbook of Strategies for Successful<br />
Cross-Cultural Exchanges. Boston, Massachusetts: Allyn & Bacon.<br />
http://catalyst.washington.edu/planning/portfolio_design.html (retrieved: 2/6/04). Designing a<br />
Portfolio Assignment.<br />
http://online.fsu.edu/learningresources/handbook/instructionsatfsu/. Instructions at FSU: A<br />
Guide to Teaching and Learning Practices (retrieved: 2/6/04).<br />
Additional Resources for Planning and Preparing for the Classroom are linked below:<br />
Course Planning and Teaching – Linked with permission from “Teaching at <strong>Carolina</strong>,” a<br />
publication of the <strong>University</strong> of <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> at Chapel Hill.<br />
Planning a Class Session – Linked with permission from The Penn <strong>State</strong> Teacher II: Learning<br />
to Teach; Teaching to Learn, a publication of Schreyer Institute for Teaching<br />
Excellence at Pennsylvania <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>.<br />
Planning What You Are Going To Teach – Linked with permission from the <strong>University</strong> of<br />
California at Santa Barbara, Office of Instructional Development.<br />
Preparing To Teach – Linked with permission from <strong>University</strong> of Georgia.<br />
Preparing for Class – Linked with permission from John Hopkins <strong>University</strong>.<br />
The First Day of Class – Linked with permission from Iowa <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>.
Suggestions for the First Day of Class<br />
By Etta C. Gravely, Ph.D.<br />
Associate Professor<br />
Department of Chemistry,<br />
College of Arts and Sciences<br />
37<br />
Prior to going to class, obtain a validated class roster from the web site. Check the roll. If<br />
students are not on the roster, they must produce a validated receipt to remain in the class.<br />
Inform students to go to the registrar’s office if they are not on the roster. Non-validated<br />
students must not be permitted to remain in class.<br />
Introduce yourself to the students and inform them of your office location and office hours<br />
which should be written on the course syllabus. Use a student questionnaire to obtain background<br />
information on the student, the preparedness of the students (previous courses taken<br />
relevant to the discipline), present course load, what the student perceives as his/her talents,<br />
hobbies, weaknesses and strengths, their method of learning, and what grade the student<br />
expects to obtain from the course. Review the course syllabus, which should include<br />
the following:<br />
•Your name, office location, office hours, office<br />
telephone number and e-mail address.<br />
• Catalog course description.<br />
• Course goals.<br />
• <strong>State</strong> Department of Public Instruction<br />
Goals, if applicable.<br />
• Praxis goals, if applicable.<br />
• Performance objectives/goals or their location if<br />
included in the textbook.<br />
• Outline of subject matter (Point out if<br />
arrangement is different from textbook).<br />
• Name of textbook, edition, author and<br />
publisher. Point out special aids and<br />
features of the textbook and any<br />
supplementary materials provided<br />
with the textbook.<br />
• Method of evaluation.<br />
• Activities to be engaged in, how they will be<br />
evaluated and due date for each activity.<br />
• Date for make-up work.<br />
• Indicate co-requisites for the course and if they are<br />
graded as separate courses or part of the present course.<br />
• References including multimedia available.<br />
• Sample of an examination.<br />
• Sample of a quiz.<br />
• Sample of homework or special project, if applicable.<br />
• Safety rules and regulations contract for laboratory.<br />
• Attendance policy.<br />
• If freshman- Study strategies for succeeding in<br />
the discipline.<br />
• <strong>University</strong> policy on issuance of Incompletes and<br />
the dates for removal.<br />
• Sources for tutorial assistance and other types of<br />
assistance.<br />
Allow students to converse in pairs to obtain information about someone they do not know.<br />
Have each one to introduce the other. Use the questionnaires to identify various majors and<br />
ask students of each major to raise their hands so that they can identify others in their majors<br />
in the event they want to form study groups for some of their classes. Emphasize that<br />
preconceived beliefs about the class is detrimental to their success.<br />
Have students complete a form indicating that they understand the syllabus and that it was<br />
explained to them. Also ask them to sign a form permitting or not permitting the instructor to<br />
speak with their parent/guardian about their progress in the class.<br />
Inform students of emergency exits and where they will assemble outside the building in case of<br />
an emergency. Inform them they are not to return to the building until instructed by you to do<br />
so. If the emergency requires that students assemble inside a facility, designate a person to lead<br />
the student to that location while the instructor will follow the last student out.
Tips for Conducting The Class<br />
By Godfrey A. Uzochukwu, Professor, LSS<br />
Director<br />
Interdisciplinary Waste Management Institute<br />
38<br />
In order for graduate students to effectively and confidently carry out their responsibilities as<br />
teaching assistants it may be helpful for them to consider the following advice:<br />
Dress appropriately, smile big, and<br />
wear a name tag.<br />
Provide the following personal<br />
information about themselves to<br />
students: Full name, hometown,<br />
education, experience, and hobbies.<br />
Obtain the following information<br />
from students: Graduation date,<br />
contact information (e-mail, phone<br />
numbers, etc), course background<br />
(science, mathematics, English, etc.<br />
already completed), extracurricular<br />
activities (band, choir, football,<br />
basketball, etc).<br />
Course Materials (textbooks,<br />
workbooks, and laboratory books)<br />
must be carefully reviewed with<br />
students.<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Class policy, grading, attendance,<br />
participation, assignments, quizzes,<br />
examinations, and office hours should be<br />
explained to students on the first day<br />
of class.<br />
Students should be encouraged to write<br />
in class.<br />
Speak clearly and loud enough while<br />
conducting the class. The whole class<br />
must be engaged in discussions.<br />
Classroom time management is very<br />
important. Know when to start and<br />
when to stop.<br />
Develop a study guide, hold review<br />
sessions before examinations, compose<br />
reasonable examination and quiz<br />
questions, give adequate time for<br />
examinations and quizzes, be available<br />
to answer questions, grade fairly, look<br />
for creativity and innovation, return<br />
graded work promptly, and let<br />
students know their grades at all times.
Diversity in the Classroom<br />
By Muktha Jost, Ph.D.<br />
Assistant Professor<br />
Department of Curriculum and Instruction,<br />
School of Education<br />
39<br />
Much like the proverbial blind<br />
brothers attempting to understand<br />
the different parts of the elephant,<br />
much confusion, ambivalence, and<br />
contradiction awaits those wanting<br />
to open the diversity door for true<br />
understanding. What you see<br />
beyond the door depends very<br />
much on the lens you wear or the<br />
fact that your eyes are closed.<br />
What you learn with your eyes<br />
closed is that diversity is a<br />
cumbersome issue that makes your<br />
already challenging teaching<br />
life even more difficult. If you<br />
have your eyes open, you may be<br />
viewing diversity issues through<br />
the lens of –<br />
The Root of Diversity Issues:<br />
The Elephant in The Room<br />
While all the above ways of looking at diversity sheds light on the different parts of the<br />
elephant, they seldom illuminate the whole elephant, and it becomes just what it is in the<br />
classroom – a huge elephant that we mostly ignore because we don’t understand it.<br />
At the heart of all the above diversity issues is a paradox of the U.S. political, social, economic,<br />
and philosophical context: equality, fairness, and democracy for the majority culture on one<br />
end and domination and oppression toward minority cultures on the other. The current<br />
approach to addressing diversity issues is like attempting to cajole an elephant into your home<br />
through the front door. What makes the attempt futile is the push and pull between the two<br />
extremes of the paradox; the stresses and tensions caused by the inequities; the anger and<br />
sadness at the limited successes of the crusades and struggles by minority cultures; and the<br />
disappointment at the subversion and cooption of diversity issues.<br />
Barriers to Understanding the Diversity Elephant<br />
Teaching styles (Lecture?<br />
Group discussion? Cooperative learning? Quiz? Project?<br />
Service learning? Student-designed assignments?)<br />
Learning styles (Sensory or intuitive learner? Visual<br />
or verbal? Sequential or global? Inductive v. deductive?<br />
Active v. reflective?)<br />
Race (African-American or Black? Latino or Hispanic?<br />
Native American or Indian American? Stereotypes,<br />
differences, preferences)<br />
Gender (what are the inherent differences between<br />
male and female? Can they learn content the same way?)<br />
Culture (individualistic v. cooperative)<br />
Disability (special needs, inclusion, curriculum<br />
modification, adaptation of learning context)<br />
Sexual preference (right v. wrong, human rights, right to<br />
lifestyle)<br />
Religion (Christianity, Islam, Hindu, pacifism v.<br />
terrorism, moral v. immoral).<br />
• Fear of the elephant - Much of the dialogue on race, racism, institutional racism and<br />
internalized racism stems from fear, lack of knowledge, divisive propaganda, and human<br />
frailty. A true educator must go through this maze in order to understand them and then<br />
find a place of knowledge and compassion.<br />
• Racism v. Institutional Racism - The dialogue and debate about racism is confined to the<br />
personal level: what is done by one person to another because of personal hatred or prejudice.<br />
What follows from this perception is that if we work on individual feelings of racism, then the<br />
problem is addressed. What is a thousand times more powerful and a thousand times harder to<br />
understand is the power of institutional racism. This is the power that has been vested<br />
systematically with institutions, organizations, and society through a history of separation,<br />
exclusion, and oppression of minority cultures.<br />
• Institutional Racism - Institutional racism manifests itself in ways and places that actually<br />
double its power and makes people believe that social disparity exists because minorities are<br />
inferior. For instance, it is institutional racism that has prevented minorities from having a<br />
fair and equal education, deprived them of equal housing or health care, and lead to
deplorable statistics on prison population, school suspensions and dropouts, special<br />
education classes, and the achievement gap. At the other end of the paradox, corporate<br />
boardrooms, gifted education, academically advanced contexts, and places of power are<br />
filled with members of the majority culture leading many, including minorities, to believe<br />
that they are not up to par.<br />
• Internalized racism - Another outcome of institutional racism is internalized racism.<br />
Minorities living and breathing in the environment created by the subjugation and<br />
oppression of minority cultures eventually internalize those feelings of inferiority that are<br />
related to issues of self-esteem, self-confidence, depression, and anxiety.<br />
Scaling the Walls: A Look Back<br />
Once you understand the barriers and give the diversity elephant its rightful place in your<br />
classroom, the issues and challenges of diversity may not seem as insurmountable. There is one<br />
little course, however, that you have to go through yourself before you make any alterations to<br />
your syllabus, lesson plans, or assignments. It’s a look back at the history of the education of<br />
dominated cultures: Native Americans, African Americans, Asian Americans, and<br />
Hispanic/Latino Americans. While there are numerous resources, a slim book (127 pages) by<br />
Joel Spring called “Deculturalization and the Struggle for Equality: A brief history of the<br />
education of dominated cultures in the United <strong>State</strong>s” is an excellent one.<br />
As an educator at NC A&T you must be aware of the collective story of these cultures,<br />
especially African-American culture, if you plan to feel any satisfaction in your diverse class<br />
room. Educational policies in the United <strong>State</strong>s have historically served mainstream society<br />
and were often formulated with the notion of minorities,<br />
their language, culture, traditions, and religion, as<br />
inferior. The reading gives you a clear understanding of<br />
the systematic efforts to deculturalize the people from<br />
their cultures and the effects of that insidious process in<br />
society today. It also provides historical information on<br />
what was systematically denied to these cultures –<br />
democracy, equality, respect, and access to education.<br />
Issues of immigration, colonization, slavery, constitutional<br />
rights, justice and legal cases, citizenship, etc., are<br />
truthful pointers to the challenges in the classroom when<br />
it comes to diversity issues. For centuries, educational<br />
policy used the following methods of deculturalization<br />
(Spring, 2004):<br />
The popular discourse in society is that all things are equal now. Nothing can be farther from<br />
the truth. After 50 years of desegregation with Brown v. Board of Education, the judgment is<br />
that public schools are not successfully educating African-American and Hispanic-American<br />
students. One of the reasons attributed to this colossal educational failure is that schools were<br />
integrated without appropriate diversity training for teachers, principals, and administrators.<br />
Other reasons include institutional racism, racism, internalized racism, and various social<br />
inequities.<br />
At the Top of the Wall: A Look Within<br />
1. Segregation and isolation<br />
2. Forced change of language<br />
3. Curriculum content that reflects<br />
culture of dominant group<br />
4. Textbooks that reflect culture of<br />
dominant group<br />
5. Denial of cultural and religious<br />
expression by dominated groups<br />
6. Use of teachers from dominant<br />
group<br />
From this place of understanding, your view of yourself is likely to be altered. Where do I stand<br />
on the race circle? Where am I on the color continuum? What are my attitudes toward minority<br />
cultures (if you are white)? What are my attitudes about myself and people from other<br />
dominated cultures (if you are minority)? What is the nature of the content I am trying to<br />
teach? Is the content that I’m trying to teach completely reflective of the culture of the<br />
dominant group? Can my learners connect to the curriculum? Can they connect to me? How<br />
am I different from my students? How are they different from each other? What are my beliefs<br />
about teaching and assessment?<br />
40
Bridging the Gaps<br />
The diversity elephant is in full view now, and you begin to see the gaps. The gaps are spaces<br />
between you the teacher, your students, and those that create the curriculum or content that<br />
you are trying to teach. Many of those spaces are so challenging that they cannot be addressed<br />
in a semester or two, which is the time frame that you are likely to be involved in the lives of<br />
your students. Many others though can be understood and addressed through reflection, action<br />
research, and appropriate action.<br />
Action Research<br />
The disconnects or gaps that can be addressed often come in areas of prior knowledge and<br />
experiences, language, communication styles, racial and ethnic identities and histories, cultural<br />
value systems, and assessment. The writing, reading, and communication skills that students<br />
bring into the classroom are a result of their K-12 experiences, and you’ll gain valuable insights<br />
if you spend any significant time in those classrooms. While you cannot change those<br />
classrooms, coming to grips with those deplorable conditions can help you address the needs<br />
of your students in ways that build bridges between you and your students.<br />
Many of us in higher education make the mistake of running to the ‘literature’ for help. When<br />
it comes to diversity issues, the literature is often too diluted, too narrow, or too universal. The<br />
best strategy is to go to the source: your students. Observe them, ask them, poll them, goad<br />
them, but make every effort you can to understand them. If they are strong on one learning<br />
style, introduce another to them. If you have a preference for group discussions, try a lecture<br />
for a change. Ask them what they value, and ask yourself where you internalized your values.<br />
Ask them about their reading habits and check your syllabus to see for a connection between<br />
their reading habits and your expectations. If the gap is too wide, discuss it in class.<br />
Know your Curriculum Thoroughly<br />
Most of the dialogue about diversity centers on teaching styles and learning styles and ignores<br />
the tremendous role played by the curriculum. Like one master teacher says, make your course<br />
curriculum centered. Ultimately, your students are in the class to learn content, and the best<br />
way to communicate that content so each student understands it is a logical approach. Before<br />
you even begin to design the course, examine the curriculum. Ask yourself how well you know<br />
what you are trying to teach. Who are the people who contributed to the curriculum? What<br />
are their values and priorities? How is it connected to the needs of the students?<br />
Are the goals of the course mostly related to knowledge, skills, or attitudes? Each of the three<br />
categories call for different approaches in teaching and different methods of assessment, and it<br />
is only at this level that the teaching style and learning style comes into play. For instance, if<br />
you are teaching psychological principles related to motivation, which falls mostly in the<br />
category of attitudes and knowledge, then a lecture followed by an objective test is probably<br />
the least effective. If your curricular goals include the teaching of skills, then hands-on<br />
teaching with a performance assessment is better than a lecture.<br />
Integrate Categories of the Curriculum to Teaching Methods and Assessment Methods<br />
Do everything you can to make the curriculum come alive for<br />
students. This process begins with the goals of the course. If the plan<br />
is to take a trip to Paris, then make it explicit in your syllabus. Then<br />
explain to your students how you are planning to get everyone to Paris<br />
from Greensboro, <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong>. Your syllabus is essentially a road<br />
map of that trip. Most of us will not undertake a trip without<br />
knowledge of the cost, but our students often sign up for courses<br />
without considering the price they have to pay that semester to<br />
successfully complete the course. Explain to your students what it<br />
‘costs’ to take the course, what your role is, and what role you expect<br />
them to play. Most importantly, explore together how you’ll know<br />
when you’ve reached your destination (assessment).<br />
Once you come to<br />
grips with the diversity<br />
elephant, other issues<br />
begin to fall in place.<br />
Your understanding of<br />
these issues will begin<br />
to have a profound<br />
effect on the interest,<br />
achievement, and<br />
motivation of your<br />
students.<br />
41
References:<br />
Spring, J. (2004). Deculturalization and the Struggle for Equality: A brief history of the<br />
education of dominated cultures in the United <strong>State</strong>s. New York: McGraw Hill<br />
Diversity: A Selected and Annotated Bibliography<br />
Prepared by R. Johnson with Diane M. Enerson and Kathryn M. Plank at Pennsylvania <strong>State</strong><br />
<strong>University</strong>.<br />
42<br />
Borrowed with permission from The Penn <strong>State</strong> Teacher II: Learning to Teach; Teaching to<br />
Learn, a publication of Schreyer Institute for Teaching Excellence at Pennsylvania <strong>State</strong><br />
<strong>University</strong>.<br />
Although cognitive psychologists have long been interested in diverse learning styles, the<br />
debate about accommodating social diversity and creating multicultural classrooms in<br />
institutions of higher learning began only recently. Still in its infancy, research on the<br />
educational impact of socio-cultural differences has developed as a result of two things: larger,<br />
better organized, and more visible minority populations on American campuses; and, perhaps<br />
more importantly, increasing diversity among those actually doing the teaching and research.<br />
The bibliography below brings together a number of challenging and useful materials on<br />
diversity and multiculturalism in higher education. Besides being descriptive, each annotation<br />
is intended to provide the reader with a sense of the educational purpose the book or article<br />
could serve. Although several sources address cognitive diversity alone, most are concerned<br />
with the connection between students' approaches to learning and their socio-cultural<br />
backgrounds. For balance, one critique of the multicultural movement has also been included.<br />
Because issues of multiculturalism arouse strong emotions, we must address these issues with<br />
considerable patience and provide ample opportunities for dialogue. Our hope is that the<br />
bibliography below will provide you with one such opportunity, and we look forward to your<br />
reactions, comments, and suggestions.<br />
Border, Laura L. B., and Nancy Van Note Chism, eds. Teaching for Diversity. New Directions<br />
for Teaching and Learning, no. 49. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass, 1992.<br />
Capello, Doris Correa and Paul G. Kreuzer. ‘“Don't Teach It to Us; Teach It to Them’:<br />
Teaching Cross-Cultural Literature to a Multicultural Class.” In Teaching a "New<br />
Canon"?: Students, Teachers, and Texts in the College Literature Classroom, edited<br />
by Bruce A. Goebel and James C. Hall, 96-114. Urbana, Ill.: National Council of<br />
Teachers of English, 1995.<br />
Chism, Nancy. “Taking Student Diversity into Account.” In Teaching Tips: Strategies,<br />
Research, and Theory for College and <strong>University</strong> Teachers, 9th ed., by Wilbur J.<br />
McKeachie, 223-37. Lexington, Mass.: D. C. Heath, 1994.<br />
Crawford, Mary and Roger Chaffin. “The Reader's Construction of Meaning: Cognitive<br />
Research on Gender and Comprehension.” In Gender and Reading: Essays on<br />
Readers, Texts, and Contexts, edited by Elizabeth A. Flynn and Patrocinio P.<br />
Schweickart, 3-30. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins <strong>University</strong> Press, 1986.<br />
D'Souza, Dinesh. Illiberal Education: The Politics of Race and Sex on Campus. New York:<br />
Vintage, 1992.<br />
Davis, Barbara Gross. “Learning Styles and Preferences.” Chapter 22 of Tools for Teaching.<br />
San Francisco: Jossey-Bass, 1993.<br />
Davis, Barbara Gross. “Responding to a Diverse Student Body.” Part 2 of Tools for Teaching.<br />
San Francisco: Jossey-Bass, 1993.
Goebel, Bruce A. “‘Who Are All These People?’: Some Pedagogical Implications of Diversity<br />
in the Multicultural Classroom.” In Teaching a "New Canon"?: Students, Teachers,<br />
and Texts in the College Literature Classroom, edited by Bruce A. Goebel and James<br />
C. Hall, 22-31. Urbana, Ill.: National Council of Teachers of English, 1995.<br />
43<br />
Laube, Linda. “Gender, Assessment, and Writing Instruction.” In Teaching a “New Canon”?:<br />
Students, Teachers, and Texts in the College Literature Classroom, edited by Bruce<br />
A. Goebel and James C. Hall, 148-63. Urbana, Ill.: National Council of Teachers of<br />
English, 1995.<br />
Martin, Warren Bryan, ed. New Perspectives on Teaching and Learning. New Directions for<br />
Teaching and Learning, no. 7. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass, 1981.<br />
Metzger, Mary Jane. “A Journey Defined by Place: Anti-Racism in the College Classroom.” In<br />
Teaching a “New Canon”?: Students, Teachers, and Texts in the College Literature<br />
Classroom, edited by Bruce A. Goebel and James C. Hall, 67-80. Urbana, Ill.: National<br />
Council of Teachers of English, 1995.<br />
Steele, Claude M. “Thin Ice: 'Stereotype Threat' and Black College Students.” The Atlantic<br />
Monthly (August 1999): 44-54.<br />
Sternberg, Robert J. “Thinking Styles: Keys to Understanding Student Performance.” Phi<br />
Delta Kappan (January 1990): 336-71.<br />
Tatum, Beverly Daniel. “Talking about Race, Learning about Racism: The Application of<br />
Racial Identity Development Theory in the Classroom.” Harvard Educational Review<br />
62 (Spring 1992): 1-24.<br />
Tobias, Sheila. They’re Not Dumb, They’re Different: Stalking the Second Tier. Tucson,<br />
Ariz.: Research Corporation, 1990.<br />
Wertheim, Margaret. Pythagoras’ Trousers: God, Physics, and the Gender Wars. New York:<br />
Times Books, 1995.
SECTION V<br />
44<br />
Helping Students Learn - Overview<br />
By R. Trent Larson, Ph.D.<br />
Associate Professor<br />
Department of Human Performance and Leisure Studies,<br />
School of Education<br />
Learning is a dynamic process of making sense of the real world. It requires a purposeful effort<br />
on the part of both the instructor and the student. To build an environment conducive to<br />
learning, the instructor must develop a genuine interest in students and come to value the<br />
whole of students’ experiences (cultural, linguistic and historical). These experiences represent<br />
a wellspring of knowledge and information and provide a foundation for planning subsequent<br />
learning activities. Likewise, instructors should bring their own appropriate life experiences to<br />
the classroom to stimulate student interest and understanding of salient concepts.<br />
To help students learn, instructors must also teach them to value knowledge whether obtained<br />
through formal or informal activities. As they come to value knowledge, students will see what<br />
they lack and become motivated to learn more in these areas. The key is to make learning<br />
relevant and connected to the real lives of students. Through observation, dialogue and<br />
self-reflection, students come to a greater understanding of the world around them. The focus<br />
of the instructor should be to assist students in discovering their purposes for learning, where to<br />
go to find adequate information to make good decisions and how to become contributing<br />
citizens, even advocates for change in the community.<br />
There are a number of strategies or outcomes that instructors should consider in order to foster<br />
student learning and these must be addressed within a conceptual framework. Such a frame<br />
work should consist of the following elements: diversity, an assessment system, student selfreflection<br />
and the utilization of appropriate technology. Attention to diversity assists the<br />
teacher in presenting information in a format that encourages learning. This means developing<br />
an awareness of differences in students due to culture, gender or other personal issues. An<br />
assessment system provides the instructor with regular updates on the progress of students in<br />
the course. With ongoing assessment, evidence of student achievement is monitored and<br />
adjustments in instruction (e.g., new teaching strategies) can occur. Self reflection exercises<br />
such as reflective logs or diaries can help students better understand the concepts learned and<br />
the type of learning styles most preferred. Lastly, technology serves as a basis for stimulating<br />
student interest, understanding and involvement. Teaching the use the Internet and other<br />
related technologies empowers students to seek information on their own. Computers serve as<br />
a useful tool tracking performance within and without the classroom.<br />
With a conceptual framework in place, the instructor becomes prepared to incorporate various<br />
strategies to encourage the learning process. Some of the concepts/strategies that could be<br />
important in this process include: learning styles and preferences, cooperative learning, seven<br />
principles, time management and how students learn.
Helping Students Learn<br />
By Richard A. Jackson, Ph.D.<br />
Adjunct Assistant Professor<br />
Department of Curriculum and Instruction,<br />
School of Education<br />
45<br />
Depending on the course and the lesson to be taught, there are numerous strategies one can use<br />
to help students learn. In general, the following tools and techniques will have a positive effect<br />
on student learning.<br />
(1) Require students to explain their answers. Pose questions during the instructional process.<br />
Do not simply accept a brief answer or response to a question. Ask the student to explain<br />
their reasoning for their answer and to justify their answer. Higher order questions require<br />
students to apply, analyze, synthesize and evaluate concepts.<br />
(2) Reframe your questions or break them into smaller parts. Teachers often need to adjust the<br />
delivery of their lesson depending on the needs of the students and their ability to<br />
understand the content. Where students seem unsure, you may need to provide prompts or<br />
clues. You may even need to reframe the question or present it in a different way. This is<br />
especially true if the subject matter is complex.<br />
(3) Other strategies to help students learn include:<br />
Select various procedures<br />
for monitoring and<br />
judging student performance.<br />
Decide how and when to<br />
give feedback and/or<br />
rewards.<br />
Select various types of<br />
feedback and rewards such<br />
as verbal praise, awards,<br />
rewards, etc.<br />
Use mistakes and re-doing<br />
work as learning<br />
opportunities, not punishment.<br />
Press students to think. Make<br />
them explain and justify their<br />
answers.<br />
Monitor for comprehension<br />
rather than just procedural<br />
correctness.<br />
Additional information is available at the following link:<br />
Helping Students Learn – Linked with permission from Iowa <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong> TA Handbook -<br />
Section III (scroll about a fourth of the way down the article)
How Students Learn<br />
By Richard A. Jackson, Ph.D.<br />
Adjunct Assistant Professor<br />
Department of Curriculum and Instruction,<br />
School of Education<br />
46<br />
Students learn in a variety of ways, and one of the challenges every teacher must face is<br />
determining what is the best approach for each lesson taught. Making that decision involves an<br />
analysis of a number of factors – Is lecture the best approach? Should a combination of lecture<br />
and demonstration be used? Does the lesson lend itself to demonstration, or is that approach<br />
impractical for the subject matter? Would a student best learn by practice and repartition?<br />
Determining the best teaching method and instructional delivery system to be employed is a<br />
fundamental question that must be answered before effective teaching can occur. Students learn<br />
best by building on information and/or knowledge they already have acquired. Mastering new<br />
information occurs when they integrate what they already know with the new material, thus<br />
expanding their knowledge base.<br />
The techniques of learning work successfully once the basic fundamentals occur. Take a<br />
chemistry experiment or physics exercise. Once one understands what is happening on a<br />
theoretical level, the experiment reinforces the knowledge by verifying that which is expected<br />
or known.<br />
Practice and repartition are approaching teaching tools in some instructional settings. This<br />
method is typically used in settings where eye-hand coordination or other dexterity-based skills<br />
are required.<br />
In order for learning to be effective, there must be a feedback system in place between the<br />
student and the teacher. It is extremely important that the student receive progress feedback<br />
from the teacher and understand the level and quality of their learning.<br />
Additional information is available at the following link:<br />
How Students Learn - Borrowed with permission from Ohio <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong> - Teaching<br />
Handbook<br />
Learning Styles and Preferences<br />
By R. Trent Larson, Ph.D.<br />
Associate Professor<br />
Department of Human Performance and Leisure Studies,<br />
School of Education<br />
According to Litzinger & Osif (1992), learning styles are described as “the different ways in<br />
which . . . adults think and learn” (p. 73). Each individual possesses a unique set of behaviors<br />
or strategies to acquire, process and apply new information. Litzinger & Osif (1992) also<br />
indicate that this learning process depends on several processes including cognition (how one<br />
acquires knowledge), conceptualization (how one processes information) and affective (one’s<br />
motivation, decision-making styles and emotional preferences also characterize learning styles).<br />
Many researchers (e.g., Kolb) have identified different types of learning styles.<br />
Kolb (1984) placed learning styles along a continuum ranging from concrete experiences<br />
(learning by putting concrete ideas into practice), reflective observation (learning by<br />
observation or thinking), abstract conceptualization (using abstract thought to consider<br />
relationships), and active experimentation (learning by participating in activities or<br />
experiments). Kolb observed that while individuals move from one learning style to another<br />
over the course of time, they usually settle on one style they prefer over the others.
Some students prefer a particular type of learning style involving the senses. They may be<br />
visual learners, auditory learners, kinesthetic learners or tactile learners. Visual learners want to<br />
see the information in front of them (e.g., a movie over the Internet or a PowerPoint<br />
presentation to view pictures). Auditory learners enjoy providing verbal feedback to questions,<br />
listening to speeches through web-sites, or collaborating with other students on projects that<br />
require someone to read the directions while the others perform some operation. Kinesthetic<br />
learners prefer “hands-on activity” and participate in projects involving a computer (especially<br />
the mouse and keyboard). Tactile learners require extensive input using their hands and<br />
brains.They might, for example, use computer-drawing tools to illustrate a product or idea, or<br />
use a tablet to produce an art creation. Other students like seeing the overview of a concept or<br />
problem and require the big picture to gain a complete understanding. Some prefer to view<br />
concepts or processes from a step-by-step perspective.<br />
47<br />
In contrast to learning styles, preferences refer to the conditions under which students prefer to<br />
work and learn. These may refer to things such as the arrangement of the classroom, student<br />
groupings or whether the instruction is teacher driven or self-taught via independent learning.<br />
An observant instructor will detect which preferences work best with particular students.<br />
Learning styles and preferences are also knowable through diagnostic tests and personal<br />
observations. The salient point regarding teaching is that, although students have preferred<br />
learning styles and preferences, it may be unrealistic to expect to meet everyone’s needs<br />
entirely. Therefore, the best approach is to provide instruction using a variety of strategies<br />
during each class period and throughout the semester to attempt to satisfy the needs of as many<br />
different types of learners as possible.<br />
References:<br />
Kolb, D. (1984). Experiential Learning: Experience as the Source of Learning and<br />
Development. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.<br />
Litzinger, M., & Osif, B. (1992). Accommodating Diverse Learning Styles: Designing<br />
Instruction for Electronic Information Sources. (pp. 73-82) In Linda Sharito (Ed.)<br />
What is Good Library Instruction Now? Library Instruction for the 1990s. MI: Pierian<br />
Press.<br />
Other resources on Learning Styles:<br />
Learning Styles - Linked with permission from “Teaching at <strong>Carolina</strong>,” a publication of the<br />
<strong>University</strong> of <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> at Chapel Hill.<br />
Principles for Good Practice in Undergraduate Education<br />
By Kimberly Richards, NCC, SACC, Ph.D.<br />
Assistant Professor<br />
Department of Human Development and Community Services,<br />
School of Education<br />
Chickering and Gamson (1991) formulated seven principles for good practice in undergraduate<br />
education after undertaking a meta-analysis of 50 years of educational research. Though the<br />
seven principles they developed relate to undergraduate education, these principles can be<br />
applied to learning at any level. These principles imply a collective and constructivist learning<br />
environment. Learning is enhanced in collective constructivist environments as working with<br />
others can increase student involvement in learning and knowledge construction. Using these<br />
principles provides an approach to education that makes learning more relevant, evocative,<br />
and meaningful for the student. Students take co-responsibility for their knowledge and skill<br />
acquisition and the educator becomes a guide to help students gain/construct new knowledge.<br />
These seven principles are briefly described below and examples for implementing the<br />
principles are provided so that the Teaching Assistant can become familiar with the types of<br />
activities that can be used to enhance the classroom experience for both the students and<br />
the educators.
Encourage student-faculty contact.<br />
Student-faculty contact in the classroom and, perhaps even more importantly, outside of the<br />
classroom, can provide the motivation for a student to pursue his/her professional and personal<br />
interests. Individual contact with the student encourages reflection, critical thinking, and<br />
independent learning, which is learning for the love of learning. This contact can enhance student<br />
self-worth and can help a student through academic, professional and personal uncertainty. Below<br />
are listed some ways to increase individual contact with students:<br />
Communicate with students on a personal<br />
level, for example, learn about their<br />
educational and career goals.<br />
Personalize feedback on student tasks.<br />
Be visible.<br />
Learn students’ names.<br />
If possible arrive to class early and stick<br />
around after class.<br />
Serve as an informal mentor to students.<br />
Involve students in professional activities<br />
such as presentations, conferences, research,<br />
and writing.<br />
Have on-line time with students such as<br />
through discussion boards/chat facilities.<br />
Advise students about professional opportunities.<br />
Communicate with students through the<br />
e-mail.<br />
At the end of each test/task have students<br />
comment on how they feel they are doing<br />
and how the class is going.<br />
Encourage Cooperation Among Students<br />
Learning can be heightened and reinforced when students work together to construct knowledge.<br />
Students sharing ideas and knowledge and responding to each other help develop thinking<br />
abilities and deepens students’ knowledge and understanding. Students working together<br />
strengthens student participation in the learning process. Educators help create positive<br />
interdependence but emphasize individual accountability of students. Some techniques that can<br />
be used to facilitate cooperative learning are:<br />
48<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Group assignments, problem solving,<br />
reviewing, and testing.<br />
Activities that encourages students to get to<br />
know each other, such as students sharing<br />
their viewpoints on topics discussed in class.<br />
Create learning communities/teams.<br />
Make use of peer evaluations.<br />
Have students explain difficult ideas or<br />
teach each other.<br />
Good Practice Encourages Active Learning<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Have students give classroom and public<br />
presentations of their papers, projects,<br />
discussions, etc.<br />
Break up into small groups for discussions<br />
and other activities.<br />
Have games, skits, and panel discussions.<br />
Lead by example – team teach classes.<br />
Active learning promotes the appreciation of both knowledge construction and knowledge itself.<br />
The educator can provide scaffolding for the students such as brief lectures, individualized<br />
instruction, prepackaged information, and assignments, and with this scaffolding students can<br />
then create their own knowledge. Active learning gives students control and ownership of the<br />
learning process and the knowledge they create. Active learning can take on a variety of forms of<br />
both individual and group work in and outside the classroom. Though through the use of active<br />
learning students are more likely to understand, retain, appreciate, and apply this knowledge to<br />
real life situations, many students may feel anxiety and even resentment at having to construct<br />
their own knowledge as most students are use to being spoon-fed knowledge. Students may<br />
perceive that the instructors who have active learning classrooms are not doing their jobs. One<br />
way of preventing this misunderstanding is to explain to the students your philosophy of<br />
education and have them read some articles that speak to active learning and its benefits. The<br />
following ideas can help you develop an active learning classroom:
✰ Provide students with or have students<br />
identify field work opportunities to<br />
participate in, such as, job shadowing,<br />
service learning, practicum, internships,<br />
apprenticeships, activities they participate in.<br />
✰ Encourage students to apply ideas learned or<br />
constructed in the course and reflect on the<br />
implementation process.<br />
✰ Encourage students to challenge ideas.<br />
✰ Give students real-life situations to analyze<br />
and explain or assign projects with real life<br />
application.<br />
✰ Encourage students to suggest curriculum.<br />
✰ Make subject material more relevant by<br />
making course content related to the local<br />
community or home.<br />
49<br />
Good Practice Gives Prompt Feedback<br />
Most students want and appreciate appropriate and timely feedback. This feedback helps<br />
students to access their levels of knowledge and focus their learning efforts on suitable<br />
topic/areas and sources of information. Feedback is important in that it helps students acquire<br />
the greatest benefit from their education. This feedback allows the student to reflect on not only<br />
their knowledge base, but for example, who they are as individuals; that is, their believes, values,<br />
culture, career choice, and identity. Ways to provide feedback are:<br />
When possible provide immediate and<br />
direct feedback on classroom<br />
activities/events.<br />
Return papers, assignments, and testing<br />
material the following week they were<br />
handed in.<br />
Provide student evaluations throughout the<br />
semester/quarter.<br />
Provide meaningful written comments.<br />
Give homework and quizzes even if they are<br />
upgraded.<br />
Have classroom exercises that provide<br />
immediate feedback.<br />
Schedule individual student conferences to<br />
discuss student progress.<br />
Have students reflect on and record their<br />
progress.<br />
Contact students who miss classes.<br />
Good Practice Emphasizes Time on Task<br />
Time on task refers to both the time a student is engaged in learning and the student’s use of<br />
time management. Time on task helps the student learn both efficiently and effectively and<br />
helps instructors teach effectively. For example, students who use their time ineffectively may<br />
interrupt the teaching process and, as such, hinder other students’ ongoing learning. Learning<br />
time management skills is a practical way for students to prepare themselves for both continuing<br />
academic studies and for the ‘real world’ . Effective use of one’s time is a key element in having<br />
successful careers and positive personal relationships. Time expectations need to be made clear<br />
for students in order to establish the basis for high levels of functioning for all involved in the<br />
learning process. Ways to help students stay on task are:<br />
⋆<br />
⋆<br />
⋆<br />
⋆<br />
Have well defined guidelines and due dates<br />
spelled out in the syllabus and go over<br />
timelines in class.<br />
Refer back to the syllabus on occasion<br />
throughout the term to see if class is on<br />
track.<br />
Assign realistic time values for each task.<br />
Let students know the minimum amount of<br />
time they should spend preparing for class<br />
and working on assignments.<br />
⋆<br />
⋆<br />
⋆<br />
Encourage students to prepare papers/<br />
assignments and presentations well in<br />
advance.<br />
Help student develop time management<br />
skills when they fall off task.<br />
Students can be asked to identify how they<br />
can best use their classroom time.
Good Practice Communicated High Expectations<br />
When instructors indicate that they believe all students have the potential to achieve academic<br />
success, students may then be encouraged to set high expectations for themselves. This<br />
philosophy indicates that the instructor believes in the good of all students and can become a<br />
self-fulfilling prophecy for students that feel respected. Communicating high expectations needs<br />
to be followed up by creating humanistic environments where it is possible for students to<br />
attain and maintain high standards of academic support and student behavior. The following<br />
techniques may help the students live up to high expectations set by the instructor:<br />
✰ Support students in living<br />
up to classroom expectations.<br />
✰ Provide students with<br />
examples of outstanding<br />
student work.<br />
✰ Recognize students who do<br />
extraordinary work and provide<br />
other positive reinforcement.<br />
✰ Encourage students to<br />
always be at their best.<br />
✰ Expect students to participate<br />
in the learning process.<br />
✰ Make course expectations<br />
clear.<br />
50<br />
Good Practice Respects Diverse Talents and Ways of Learning<br />
The diversity of student epistemology in any given class would require instructors to construct<br />
classes in ways in which students have a variety of ways of learning/discovering knowledge and<br />
indicating the depth of their knowledge for assessment purposes. Each student should be<br />
provided with the chance to highlight their knowledge, skills, and talents and to learn in ways<br />
that make sense to them. Instructors need to identify diverse classroom methods and practice<br />
them. This expands the educators teaching skills toolbox. In essence, educators that recognize<br />
the diversity of epistemology create a climate that acknowledges and respects cultural diversity.<br />
Engage as many ways of<br />
learning as possible.<br />
Let students know it is okay<br />
to speak up when they do<br />
not understand.<br />
Frequently change the<br />
methodology of material<br />
delivery.<br />
Use diverse teaching<br />
activities to address student<br />
diversity.<br />
Make use of multimedia<br />
presentations to enhance the<br />
learning of all students.<br />
Develop learning contracts<br />
with students in order to<br />
provide students with<br />
alternative learning<br />
methodologies.<br />
Encourage all students to<br />
share their viewpoints during<br />
classroom discussions.<br />
Set activities that relate to<br />
the local community/<br />
background of the students.<br />
Select a variety of types and<br />
options for student<br />
assessment.<br />
Allow students to identify<br />
the ways they would like to<br />
be assessed.<br />
These principles and the examples provided can be useful guidelines for the Teaching Assistant<br />
in transforming the classroom into a vital and vibrant learning community. This, in turn, will<br />
augment and facilitate the student learning process. While instructors are responsible for the<br />
outcome of their learning communities, students also become responsible for their education<br />
and this empowers the student not only as a learner, but also as a member of the academic<br />
community, and as a member in the community at large. Such andragogy provides the learner<br />
with both direction and freedom and can liberate the learning processes of the student and<br />
create students that can empower themselves and others.<br />
Bibliography<br />
Chickering, A.W., and Gamson, Z.F. (1991). Applying the Seven Principles for Good Practice in<br />
Undergraduate Education. In New Directions for Teaching and Learning. San Francisco:<br />
Jossey-Bass Inc.<br />
<strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong> of West Georgia. (2003). Faculty Manual. The <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong> of West Georgia,<br />
Carrollton, GA.<br />
California <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong> Bakersfield. (2003). Constructivist Learning Environments. Faculty Teaching<br />
and Learning Center, California <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>, Bakersfield.<br />
Additional Resources:<br />
Seven Principles for Good Practice: Enhancing Student Learning - Linked with permission from the<br />
<strong>University</strong> of Delaware TA Handbook – as adapted from The Seven Principles Resource<br />
Center, Winona <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>, Winona, Minnesota.
Cooperative Learning<br />
By Jane Davis-Seaver, Ph.D.<br />
Associate Professor<br />
Department of Curriculum and Instruction,<br />
School of Education<br />
51<br />
Cooperative learning can be accomplished in several ways. The central purpose of those ways,<br />
however, is the same. Many students enjoy working in groups; they tend to do higher quality work,<br />
retain more information, and raise the overall level of learning for the whole group when they work<br />
in cooperative or collaborative groups. Advantages for the teacher are that more coverage of subject<br />
matter can be done, more students are actively engaged in the topics, and the students take over the<br />
responsibility for accomplishing the tasks required. It is important, however, for the groups to spell<br />
out exactly what is expected from each group member, to be ure the work is divided fairly, and that<br />
all members are satisfied with the final project before it is submitted for evaluation. Each group<br />
member should clearly understand that any member who does not uphold the goals of the group, does<br />
not attend the group meetings and does not hand in high-quality work on time may be removed from<br />
the group by the other members of the group. Evaluation of group projects should be done by rubric.<br />
Working in pairs is perhaps a good way to begin for those students who are not accustomed to working<br />
together. The possibilities for problems are minimized when students can establish their own pairings.<br />
However, at times it may be more efficient for the instructor to assign the pairs.<br />
“Jigsaw” is another way to establish cooperative groups. The advantage of this strategy is that a lot of<br />
material can be covered in a short amount of time. A key to making this work, however, is that at the<br />
end of the project or research adequate time be given to presentations, and hand outs for everyone<br />
must be given. “Jigsaw” means that subtopics under a larger topic are divided among several groups.<br />
Each group researches or creates a part of the larger presentation, and when all group work is done,<br />
each group presents their work to the rest of the groups. For example, a large topic in an education<br />
class might be Teaching Methods. Several students can collaborate on the Montessori Method, another<br />
group can research teacher-directed methods, and a third group could research student-directed<br />
methods. Each group would present their findings and provide hand-outs for the other groups. All<br />
students, however, would be responsible for knowing the information found by all the groups.<br />
Groups can be formed in several ways. One quick and easy way is to have students “count off.” That is,<br />
each student says a number. Then, all the 1’s are in a group, the 2’s are in another group, the 3’s in<br />
another, etc. Another way is to have students choose a group according to their interest in or<br />
knowledge about the topic the group will be working on. Another way is to have students analyze the<br />
task, and then choose their members according to whom they feel can best meet the goals of the<br />
project. For example, if artwork is going to be required, the group will want to have a member who is<br />
talented in that area.<br />
Additional Resources on Cooperative Learning:<br />
Cooperative Learning - Linked with permission from the <strong>University</strong> of California at Santa<br />
Barbara, Office of Instructional Development.<br />
Reading Resources:<br />
Cooper, Jim (1990), Cooperative Learning and College Teaching: Tips from the Trenches, The<br />
Teaching Professor, 4 (5).<br />
Crowley, Mary and Dunn, Ken (1993). Cooperative Learning at Dalhousie, a workshop<br />
presented at Dalhousie <strong>University</strong>.<br />
Fennell, Hope-Arlene (1994) Cooperative Learning: Students' Perceptions and Preferences,<br />
The Lakehead <strong>University</strong> Teacher, 4 (1).<br />
King, Alison (1993), From Sage on the Stage to Guide on the Side, College Teaching, 41 (1).<br />
Millis, Barbara (1993), Cooperative Learning, a workshop presented at Dalhousie <strong>University</strong>.<br />
Sego, Arlene (1991), Cooperative Learning: A Classroom Guide, Info-Tec, Cleveland, Ohio.
Adults as Learners<br />
By Judie Bucholz, Ph.D.<br />
Adjunct Assistant Professor<br />
Department of Human Development and Services,<br />
School of Education<br />
52<br />
◆<br />
◆<br />
◆<br />
◆<br />
◆<br />
◆<br />
Part of being an effective instructor involves understanding how adults learn. Malcolm<br />
Knowles, who pioneered the field of adult learning, identified the following characteristics of<br />
adult learners:<br />
Adults are autonomous and self-directed. Effective instructors actively involve adult students<br />
in the learning process and serve as facilitators for them. They get adult perspectives on topics<br />
and let the students work on projects that reflect their interests. Effective instructors allow the<br />
adult students to assume responsibility for presentations and group leadership. Instructors act as<br />
facilitators, guiding students to their own knowledge rather than simply supplying them with<br />
facts. Effective instructors show adult students how the class will help them reach their goals.<br />
Adults have accumulated a foundation of life experiences and knowledge that includes workrelated<br />
activities, family responsibilities, and previous education. Adults need to connect<br />
learning to this knowledge and experience base. Effective instructors can help do this by<br />
drawing out the student’s experience and knowledge that is relevant to the topics in the course.<br />
Effective instructors relate theories and concepts to the students and recognize the value of<br />
experience and sharing of experiences in the learning process.<br />
Adults are goal-oriented. When adults enroll in a program, they usually know what goal they<br />
want to attain. They, therefore, appreciate an educational program that is organized and well<br />
defined. Most adults who are motivated to go to school do so primarily because they have use<br />
for the knowledge or skill being sought. Effective instructors show how the course will help<br />
them reach their goals early in the course. Effective instructors are organized in the delivery of<br />
the course and reach the objectives outlined in the syllabus.<br />
Adults are relevancy-oriented. They want to see a reason for learning something. Learning must<br />
be applicable to their work or other responsibilities to be of value to them. Effective instructors<br />
identify objectives for adult students before the course begins; theories and concepts should be<br />
related to a setting familiar to adults. Allowing adults to choose projects that reflect their<br />
interests and experience can bring relevancy into the classroom.<br />
Adults are practical, focusing on the aspect of a lesson most useful to them in their work. Adults<br />
may not be interested in knowledge for knowledge sake. While adults may tend to learn new<br />
concepts more slowly, they compensate for this by being more accurate and making fewer trial<br />
and error ventures. Effective instructors show adults how the lesson will be useful to them on<br />
the job or their other responsibilities.<br />
Adults, and all learners, need to be shown respect. Effective instructors acknowledge the wealth<br />
of experiences that adult students bring to the classroom. Adults should be treated as equals in<br />
experience and knowledge and be allowed to voice their opinion freely in the class room.<br />
Shared lessons in life can prove an invaluable learning experience.<br />
Educators must remember that learning occurs within each individual as a continual process<br />
throughout life. People learn at different speeds and in different ways. Effective instructors<br />
recognize this and incorporate different methodologies in their classrooms.<br />
It is natural for some adult learners to be anxious or nervous when faced with a new learning<br />
situation and many adults take errors personally. Positive reinforcement by the instructor can<br />
enhance learning and overcome anxiety.<br />
Learning results from stimulation of the senses. In some people, one sense is used more than<br />
others to learn or recall information. Effective instructors present materials using technology<br />
and other sources that stimulate as many senses as possible in order to increase their chances of<br />
teaching success.<br />
Sources used:<br />
“30 Things We Know for Sure About Adult Learning” by Ron and Suzan Zembe.<br />
“Principles of Adult Learning” by Stephen Lieb.
Time Management in the Classroom<br />
By Muktha Jost, Ph.D.<br />
Assistant professor, Department of Curriculum and Instruction,<br />
School of Education<br />
53<br />
The key to time management in the classroom starts with a good, clear, and interesting<br />
syllabus. The syllabus is your road map to the course and should include simply written sections<br />
on goals of the course, topics covered, textbooks and other materials required, methods of<br />
instruction, methods of assessment, grading scale, calendar, academic honesty and integrity,<br />
and information about the instructor (office hours, phone number, e-mail, etc.)<br />
For a semester filled with learning, take the first class and focus it on getting to know your<br />
students and giving them opportunities to get to know each other. Communicate the best ways<br />
to get in touch with you, ways to reach you and ask you for help, what you expect from them,<br />
and what they can expect from you. If you can, learn the names of each and every one of your<br />
students (depending on class size). For large class sizes, a digital camera can be handy to store<br />
pictures of students.<br />
Before the semester starts, design the course calendar. Make sure that each class meeting is at<br />
least outlined with readings and activities. Make it a habit to assess continuously whether the<br />
class activities are in sync with the goals of the course and the work assigned to the students.<br />
Once you design and circulate the calendar, stick to it and announce any changes that you<br />
may have to make to the calendar.<br />
Before the class, spend time prepping the class space. Arrange it in ways that can make the<br />
kind of communication and interaction that you want possible. When you design the agenda<br />
for the class, make sure that you are matching it to the attention span of learners, interest in<br />
the topic, prior knowledge about the subject, and familiarity with teaching methods. Breaking<br />
up the class in segments for mini-lectures, group discussion, activity, reflection, etc are very<br />
effective in conveying content in the time provided. If you are using technological tools, make<br />
sure that they are set up and ready before class, and that you have a back up plan when the<br />
tools fail.<br />
Communication related to assessment is important when it comes to using class time<br />
effectively. Grade student work promptly and return with constructive feedback to students.<br />
This will help with student confusion or anxiety about their performance in your course.<br />
While it’s important to keep your eye on the clock and make those transitions to the next<br />
segment, do keep in mind that there are teachable moments that must be seized at the expense<br />
of time. In addition, being around a few minutes before class begins to greet students and<br />
answer questions, and staying after class to clarify questions and provide help can give that<br />
extra support to those students hesitant to take class time for their needs.<br />
Additional Resources include:<br />
Time Management in the Classroom - Linked with permission from John Hopkins <strong>University</strong>.<br />
(Scroll down to near the bottom of linked page to locate the Time Management section.)<br />
The Role of Motivation & the Classroom Environment – Linked with permission from Ohio<br />
<strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>. (Section begins on Page 2 of linked PDF file)
SECTION VI<br />
Multiple Instructional Strategies, Situations, Techniques,<br />
Technologies, and Tools<br />
54<br />
The courses I remember the most are the ones where the professor talked, used<br />
videos, did demonstrations, used overheads and did other things to save us from<br />
just listening to him droning on.<br />
- Graduate student<br />
Teaching with Technology<br />
By Karen Smith-Gratto, Ph.D.<br />
Associate Professor<br />
Center for Professional Development,<br />
School of Education<br />
In order to insure that all students are provided with the opportunity to learn, learning<br />
environments must be designed in ways that allow learners to approach learning in diverse<br />
ways. First and foremost we need to understand that all learners are unique and interact with<br />
the content based upon their experiences. Once we understand this, it becomes clear that<br />
educational environments need to include a variety of techniques and tools to enhance<br />
student learning.<br />
Students come to the learning environment with their own experiences that affect how<br />
they interpret the content. Students’ cultures, previous school experiences, and previous<br />
interactions with the concepts will impact how much they interact with the material. How<br />
well students learn and understand content is also influenced by the way the student<br />
approaches learning (learning style), what type of intellectual approach a student uses,<br />
and the student’s motivation to learn the subject at hand.<br />
If we want students to “learn” then we have to provide experiences that address not just one<br />
way of learning but multiple ways of learning and different levels of motivation. By planning<br />
the learning experiences to take the differences of students into consideration, there is a<br />
higher probability of student success. In this section, we will examine different ways to<br />
address student diversity through the use of multiple teaching strategies that incorporate a<br />
variety of techniques, technologies and tools.<br />
Technology includes not only equipment and media but how we plan, deliver, and evaluate<br />
instruction. In order to insure that we use instructional time effectively, systematic planning<br />
is essential. While this section emphasizes the use of media and equipment, the importance<br />
of the previous sections in which planning was discussed can not be overemphasized. In the<br />
previous sections you learned that knowing the goals and objectives of the instruction were<br />
important to establish so that the planning, delivery, and ultimately the evaluation of student<br />
learning is consistent. Once we have established what students will be expected to know we<br />
can choose the appropriate tools to help students achieve success. Media and technology are<br />
just tools that can be employed to enhance learning.
Media (Audio-Visual Aids)<br />
This section will be divided into the following types of media: Visual, Audio and Motion.<br />
These types of media can be delivered through a variety of means. Visual media includes<br />
non-projected and projected media. Chalk and white boards; posters; flipcharts (easels);<br />
photographs; models; and real objects are examples of non-projected media. Projected media<br />
includes overhead projection, filmstrip projection, slide projection and the use of Liquid Crystal<br />
Display (LCD projectors) units. Audio can be delivered via tape, sound CD, and computer.<br />
Motion media can be presented using both projected and non-projected means. The most<br />
familiar means of delivering motion media is through the use of the television often combined<br />
with the use of a video tape player (VCR). The LCD projector can project motion media via<br />
a connection between the projector and a television, VCR, video camera, or computer.<br />
55<br />
Later in this section you will learn about diversity among learners. Perceptual preference is<br />
one way that we can address diversity. Some students prefer auditory means, others prefer<br />
visual stimulus, and still others must be kinetically involved in the learning environment.<br />
Support for the use of different media and the development of different media by students as<br />
a learning activity is also supported by Howard Garnder’s work in multiple intelligences. The<br />
variety of media is one way to address different learning styles and multiple intelligences.<br />
Visual Media<br />
Visual media can help instructors by providing a concrete reference for abstract information.<br />
Visuals run along a continuum from photographs which are the most realistic to drawings that<br />
are easily identified with concrete objects, to symbolic graphics, and finally to verbal symbols.<br />
Most visual forms can be delivered in both non-projected and projected formats. Regardless of<br />
the delivery method, there are specific characteristics that need to be considered when<br />
choosing or creating visuals. General visual design principles need to be followed in order to<br />
avoid distracting or confusing students with the visual.<br />
Visuals can help students understand material or can interfere with that understanding. The<br />
application of visual design principles can help insure that the visual will contribute to<br />
student understanding. You can refer to some of the books and web-sites in the Resource<br />
section to gain a fuller understanding of what those principles are. One of the most<br />
important to consider for instructional purposes is simplicity.<br />
When the principle of simplicity is applied to visuals it serves as a guide to making the visual<br />
easy for students to interpret. For example, let’s suppose we are teaching students to identify<br />
different types of columns. We have two visuals available for use: a photograph of a building<br />
with ionic columns and trees and people in the picture and a drawing of an ionic column.<br />
For introductory purposes, the drawing would be best. Once students have been introduced to<br />
different columns using the simpler representation, the photograph could be used to help<br />
students transfer what was learned to the more complex representation.
When one uses visuals that incorporate text it is essential to have legible text. The following<br />
elements need to be considered when using text in visuals:<br />
56<br />
<br />
Font style – Plain and simple (for projected<br />
media use sans serif style fonts)<br />
<br />
Special considerations for projected<br />
media (like PowerPoint):<br />
<br />
Font size – Should be large enough to be seen<br />
easily by students sitting in the back of a<br />
classroom when used with large groups. If the<br />
fonts are small, the graphic should be used for<br />
small groups only. When using PowerPoint or<br />
other projections, font size should be at least<br />
14 point for ease of reading by students<br />
when projected.<br />
❍ Use key phrases and words rather<br />
than paragraphs.<br />
❍ Use about six lines per slide (do not<br />
crowd lines on the screen).<br />
❍ Use graphics, animation, video to<br />
support topic.<br />
<br />
<br />
Use a combination of Upper and Lower case,<br />
not all upper case. Text that is all upper case is<br />
more difficult for readers to decode.<br />
Foreground/background contrast – the color<br />
of text should be quite distinct from the<br />
background color. The use of textured<br />
backgrounds (such as bricks) can hinder the<br />
clarity of the text. When using textured<br />
backgrounds make sure the text stands out<br />
clearly or box the text with a solid<br />
color background of sufficient<br />
contrast.<br />
❍ Motivational graphics and animation<br />
should be used sparingly.<br />
❍ Use screen transitions/animations<br />
when changing concepts (do not use<br />
for every screen).<br />
❍ Use text animations to gradually<br />
introduce information.<br />
❍ Use sound effects sparingly as they<br />
can distract learners.<br />
Auditory Media<br />
Auditory media provides learners with an additional means of learning material. We are used<br />
to listening to lectures, but audio materials can be used for other types of learning experiences.<br />
The first content areas that we consider as appropriate for auditory media are foreign language<br />
and music. However, auditory media can be used to provide auditory instruction for individual<br />
learners. Radio broadcasts, recordings of speeches, sound effects, and music can be used in<br />
other content areas when appropriate.<br />
Motion Media<br />
For the purposes of this discussion, video and animation are motion media. Video and<br />
animation can be delivered via VCR, laser disc, DVD player, and computer. In general, video<br />
can provide step by step demonstrations of skills, case studies for analysis, or direct instruction.<br />
Animation can present simplified examples of complex processes that would be difficult to<br />
capture with video.
Chart of Media Use Applications and Suggestions<br />
Media Techniques Uses<br />
57<br />
Non-projected<br />
Chalk or white board<br />
Real objects<br />
•Write only short phrases or words.<br />
•Write with side to board (half facing<br />
board and half facing students).<br />
•Print or write clearly.<br />
• Appropriate for full class presentation as<br />
long as text is large enough to be seen<br />
in the rear of the classroom.<br />
• Pass small objects.<br />
• Point out specific details for notation<br />
by students.<br />
•Note key points or equations during<br />
lecture.<br />
• List student ideas as students produce<br />
those ideas during discussions or<br />
brainstorming.<br />
• Use as reference point during lecture.<br />
• Use to stimulate student discussion<br />
or analysis prior to direct instruction.<br />
• Demonstrate operation or use of object.<br />
Flip Chart or Easel<br />
• Write only short phrases or words when<br />
not prepared prior to instruction.<br />
• Write with side to board (half facing<br />
board and half facing students).<br />
• Print or write clearly.<br />
• For prepared visuals, a pointer or ruler<br />
can help focus students’ attention to<br />
specific elements within the visual.<br />
• Appropriate for full class presentation<br />
as long as the text is large enough to be<br />
seen in the rear of the classroom.<br />
•Note key points or equations during<br />
lecture.<br />
• List student’s ideas as students produce<br />
those ideas during discussions or<br />
brainstorming.<br />
• Have students use in small groups for<br />
making notes to present to class.<br />
• Have visuals placed on easel (for<br />
example a graph, photograph, or<br />
drawing that helps clarify the topic).<br />
Poster<br />
• Place where the poster will be steady<br />
(holding up by hand is inappropriate).<br />
Posters are best placed on an easel, on<br />
a chalkboard tray, or tacked to<br />
corkboard.<br />
• Use to introduce new topic.<br />
• Use to close topic.<br />
• Provide a reference point during lecture.<br />
• Provide a starting point for student<br />
discussion.<br />
Photographs and<br />
Drawings<br />
• Regular size photographs and drawings<br />
are best used for small groups and by<br />
individual learners.<br />
• To stimulate discussion among students.<br />
• To have students analyze information<br />
from the photographs or drawings.<br />
• To provide concrete reference for<br />
students when being introduced to a<br />
concept or reviewing a concept.
Media Techniques Uses<br />
Projected<br />
58<br />
Overhead<br />
transparencies<br />
LCD Projections<br />
ELMO Projections<br />
Auditory<br />
CDs, tapes, and<br />
radio<br />
• Follow visual design principles.<br />
• Follow the elements for using text in<br />
PowerPoint stated above.<br />
• Prepare graphic and extensive text<br />
overhead transparencies in advance<br />
of class.<br />
• Use permanent pens when creating<br />
transparencies in advance.<br />
• Can be used to project video tapes<br />
from VCR or computer based<br />
information.<br />
• Can be used to project photographs,<br />
drawings, small graphs, maps, tables,<br />
and real objects. This allows large<br />
class use of these items.<br />
• An ELMO projector can also be<br />
used to switch between projecting<br />
real objects, and photographs, and<br />
video and computer based materials.<br />
• Make sure that volume will reach all<br />
students and that the sound is clear.<br />
• Use to provide visual focus during<br />
lectures.<br />
• Use blank transparencies to make notes<br />
during student discussion and/or<br />
brainstorming.<br />
• Use blank transparencies for students to<br />
put problem solutions on to share and<br />
discuss with classmates.<br />
• PowerPoint presentation to support<br />
lecture.<br />
• Interactive PowerPoint presentation<br />
(designed with built in discussion<br />
questions for students).<br />
• To show videos for demonstration<br />
purposes.<br />
• To show animations to demonstrate<br />
complex concepts.<br />
• To show video case studies for analysis.<br />
• Refer to photographs, drawings, and<br />
real objects for uses.<br />
• To provide examples of pronunciation.<br />
• Individualized study.<br />
• Analysis activities.<br />
Video tape<br />
DVD<br />
Motion<br />
• Can be shown using a VCR with a<br />
television or with an LCD projector<br />
(check to see if the projector needs<br />
speakers when used with the VCR).<br />
• Can be shown using a DVD player on<br />
a television, or DVD player with<br />
LCD projector, or computer with<br />
DVD drive with LCD projector.<br />
• Present new information.<br />
• Provide demonstrations.<br />
• Provide video case studies.<br />
• Provide vicarious experience through<br />
documentaries and dramatizations.<br />
• Provide individualized instruction.<br />
• Same as video tape.
Media Techniques Uses<br />
Motion<br />
59<br />
Computer-based<br />
animation<br />
Computer-based<br />
video<br />
• When not used for individualized<br />
instruction, the animations are<br />
projected using an LCD projector.<br />
• When not used for individualized<br />
instruction, the video can be<br />
projected using an LCD projector.<br />
• Present a simulation of a process<br />
(like cell division).<br />
• Present a motivational animation.<br />
• Same as video tape.<br />
Computers and Instruction<br />
Computers can be used to help students address a variety of objectives. Taylor (1980) divided<br />
computer use in educational settings into three major categories: tools, tutors, and tutees.<br />
Tools are applications that can be used by instructors or by students to create products.<br />
Word-processing is the most common of these. However, depending upon the field of study<br />
others are just as important. Auto-cad, graphic programs, and statistical analysis packages are<br />
just a few that are appropriate in different areas of study.<br />
Tutees are primarily programming languages and authoring software. Use of tutees is dependent<br />
upon the area of study.<br />
Tutors as a category covers a variety of software that can be considered instructional:<br />
Drill and practice software is software that provides students with practice for skills that have<br />
been previously taught. For example, a program that provided students with practice solving<br />
equations. An example of a drill and practice program can be found at:<br />
http://science.widener.edu/svb/tutorial/sigfigurescsn7.html (Significant Figures).<br />
Notice the program presents problems for the student to solve.<br />
Tutorial software as a specific category under tutors describes software that is used to<br />
introduce new information and requires learner input to which the program responds in ways<br />
that helps the student master the material. For example, students are presented with<br />
animations and audio that explains different types of chemical bonding. Students would<br />
watch the animations as a voice would tell them what was happening. The next text might<br />
be used to describe how one would complete chemical equations based upon what was shown<br />
in the animations. Examples of equations and their solutions would be provided. Throughout<br />
the introduction of the materials students would be asked questions to evaluate their<br />
understanding of the concepts. When students demonstrate understanding, the tutorial<br />
would introduce another type of bonding or more complex equations to solve. When<br />
students respond incorrectly, the tutorial would reteach the information in a different way.<br />
An example of a tutorial that provides pretesting (question by question) and presents<br />
information when asked for or as reteaching can be found at:<br />
http://www.biology.arizona.edu/immunology/tutorials/immunology/main.html<br />
(Introduction to Immunology).<br />
Simulations are also a type of tutor.<br />
One type of simulation shows students how something works and does not require<br />
student input. An example of this can be seen at http://www.med.ucla.edu/wilkes/inex.htm<br />
(The Auscultation Assistant) which is a web-site that allows medical students to hear<br />
heart and breathing sounds of different types.
The second type of simulation is one that can be considered problem-solving. Students are<br />
given “real world” or “authentic” type problems to address. These can be simple problems in<br />
which the student provides information for variables and then sees whether the solution<br />
succeeded. An example of this is a “Gas Simulation” which can be found at:<br />
http://intro.chem.okstate.edu/2001ACS/MoLEGasLawManual.pdf. The web address gives<br />
directions on how to use the simulation and the link to the simulation. Students input<br />
information and then see how that impacts the gas molecules.<br />
Simulations Problem-solving software also falls under the category of tutors. Students are<br />
presented with logic problems or other types of problems such as visual analysis problems<br />
(similar to jigsaw puzzles). These are simulations when they use “authentic” or “real world”<br />
situations so that this area overlaps simulations. An example of problem-solving software<br />
(which is also a game) is found at: http://www.shockwave.com/sw/content/picturepyramid and<br />
is called Picture Pyramid.<br />
Simulations Games are also considered under the tutorial category. Consider a game such as<br />
hangman (there are computer versions). Games have individuals compete either against<br />
themselves, the computer or another person. Usually there is a score.<br />
60<br />
As you can see from the above categories, software often combines elements for different<br />
categories. A tutorial can have elements of drill and practice and problem-solving combined<br />
with the direct instruction. Drill and practice can be combined with game elements to make it<br />
more palatable to students. Taylor’s categories did not include the use of the Internet. As can<br />
be seen from the reading above, his categories show up on the Internet. The tutors are quite<br />
evident but so too are tools. Students can access a variety of databases from disks, intranets,<br />
and the Internet (the government ERIC database is just one example). The use of the Internet<br />
includes more than the publicly accessible information and programs, it also includes courses<br />
that must be accessed using logins and passwords. One such program is BlackBoard.<br />
Platforms such as BlackBoard are used for on-campus course support or on-line course delivery<br />
over the Internet. BlackBoard contains several tools that can be used for either purpose. All<br />
students registered in the class are usually automatically enrolled in the course shell for the<br />
appropriate semester. This allows the instructor to e-mail students without looking up addresses.<br />
If the instructor prepares students and requires that they log into BlackBoard (for face-to-face<br />
courses), announcements can be placed that appear when the student opens the course. In<br />
addition, there are live chat capabilities (synchronous conversation), discussion board<br />
capabilities (asynchronous conversation), course document areas, assessment (quiz and test)<br />
capabilities, and the ability to place student grades in a format that students can access.<br />
As a support for face-to-face courses, it can be used to post the syllabus, provide live links to<br />
web-based materials that students will use in the course, and provide a common location for<br />
assignments and additional course documents.<br />
While the delivery method is different from face-to-face delivery similar concerns about active<br />
student involvement apply. As an on-line delivery system, usually all materials are placed in<br />
the shell, including quizzes. However, some instructors choose to put all materials on a CD<br />
and have the students use the shell only for uploading assignments and participating in<br />
on-line discussions.
Incorporating Instructional Technology<br />
By Karen Smith-Gratto, Ph.D.<br />
Associate Professor<br />
Center for Professional Development,<br />
School of Education<br />
61<br />
Systematic planning of instruction is one of the elements of instructional technology. This has<br />
been discussed previously so in this section, how to consider the use of media and other<br />
technological tools will be addressed. Once you know what your goals and objectives are for<br />
the instruction (which can include state or professional organization standards), you establish<br />
learning activities. Not all goals and objectives require the use of media or technology,<br />
however, by examining the type of learning expected, you can best determine what type of<br />
media or technological tools would be appropriate. In addition, the learning activities and<br />
methods chosen will also influence the choice of the most appropriate media or technological<br />
tools. Refer to the Chart for Media Use and in the section on Computers and Instruction to<br />
help determine which are most appropriate.<br />
Additional Resources on Teaching and Learning<br />
Brightman, H. J., & Bahda, Y. K. (n.d.). Master Teacher Programs. Retrieved: February 14,<br />
2004. http://www.masterteacherprogram.com/ This source provides basic information<br />
about teaching and learning styles.<br />
Campbell, L., Campbell, B., & Dickinson, D. (2004). Teaching and Learning Through Multiple<br />
Intelligences. 3rd ed. Boston: Allyn and Bacon. This book provides concrete examples of<br />
activities that can be used to help students access learning through the use of different<br />
learning activities.<br />
Chang, D., Dooley, L., & Tuovinen, J.E. (2002). Gestalt Theory in Visual Design – A New Look<br />
at an Old Subject. Paper presented at: Seventh World Conference on Computers in<br />
Education. Copenhagen, July 29 – August 3, 2001. Retrieved: February 14, 2004<br />
http://crpit.com/confpapers/CRPITV8Chang.pdf This article provides insights into<br />
using this theory to improve the visual design for instructional materials.<br />
Heinich, R., Molenda, M., Russell, J.D., & Smaldino, S. E. Instructional Media and Technologies<br />
for Learning. (7th edition). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Merrill-Prentice-Hall. This book<br />
provides theoretical and practical information about the use of media and computers in<br />
educational settings.<br />
Indiana <strong>University</strong>. (2004). CTL Learning Styles Site. Retrieved: February 14, 2004.<br />
http://www.indstate.edu/ctl/styles/ls1.html This web-site provides information about<br />
learning styles.<br />
Lajoie, S. P. & Derry, S. J. (Eds.). (1993). Computers as Cognitive Tools. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence<br />
Erlbaum Associates, Publishers. This book discusses how computers can be used to<br />
address higher level learning objectives.<br />
Leflore, D. & Smith-Gratto, K. (1999). Using learning theory to improve instructional<br />
computer presentations. American Association of Behavioral and Social Sciences Journal, 2.<br />
Retrieved: February 14, 2004. http://www.aabss.org/journal1999/f16Leflore.html This<br />
article provides theoretical and practical ways to design PowerPoint presentations to<br />
encourage active participation by students.<br />
Lever-Duffy, J., McDonald, J. B., & Mizell, A. P. (2003). Teaching and Learning with Technology.<br />
Boston:Allyn and Bacon. This book provides information about using media in<br />
educational settings with emphasis on computer uses.
Multimedia Educational Resource for Learning and Online Teaching (MERLOT). Retrieved:<br />
February 15, 2004. This is a data base created for university instructors in many different<br />
fields.The sites listed as instructional sites are reviewed and described. This is an<br />
excellent resource for finding computer-based resources to enhance learning.<br />
62<br />
New Horizons for Learning. (2002). Multiple Intelligences. Retrieved: February 14, 2004.<br />
http://www.newhorizons.org/strategies/mi/front_mi.htm This web-site provides<br />
information about Gardner’s theory of multiple intelligences.<br />
Shin, S., Smith, S. & Job, K. (n.d.). Visual Design of Web Pages. Retrieved: February 14, 2004.<br />
http://www.people.memphis.edu/~kjob/wbi/Index.html#indextopofpage This web-site<br />
provides information about visual design principles. While the authors say that the<br />
principles are for the design of webpages the principles apply to other forms of visual<br />
media, too.<br />
Teaching Methods & Instructional Strategies – Linked with permission from <strong>University</strong> of<br />
Georgia.<br />
Teaching with Technology – Linked with permission from The Penn <strong>State</strong> Teacher II: Learning<br />
to Teach; Teaching to Learn, a publication of Schreyer Institute for Teaching Excellence<br />
at Pennsylvania <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>.<br />
<strong>University</strong> of Delaware - Center for Teaching Effectiveness<br />
Full-length articles on these topics were linked with permission from the TA Handbook -<br />
• Interactive Lecturing<br />
• Audiovisual Aids<br />
• Instructional Technologies<br />
• Student Participation<br />
• Internal Student Involvement<br />
• Active Student Involvement<br />
• Questioning Strategies<br />
• Instructional Discussion<br />
• Choosing Groups<br />
• Laboratory Instruction<br />
• Demonstrations<br />
• Teaching Problem Solving Skills<br />
(See also <strong>University</strong> of Washington)<br />
• Problem Based Learning
Teaching Through Discussion<br />
By Marihelen Glass, Ph.D., CPH<br />
Professor of Horticulture<br />
School of Agricultural and Environmental Sciences<br />
63<br />
Class discussion can be a powerful tool<br />
for teaching and learning, but good<br />
discussions rarely happen by accident.<br />
Discussions should be interesting, lively,<br />
and most important — used as an<br />
effective tool for helping students<br />
learn. Good discussions are prepared in<br />
advance. As the instructor, you need<br />
to prepare yourself before a discussion<br />
takes place.<br />
Good discussions are purposefully led.<br />
Develop strategies to keep the discussion moving.<br />
What do you want students to learn from this<br />
discussion?<br />
Clarify your goals for the discussion.<br />
Plan guiding questions for the discussion.<br />
Design activities that will prepare students to discuss.<br />
Provide focused study questions before class.<br />
Post guiding questions prior to the discussion.<br />
Ask students to respond to the guiding<br />
questions, in writing or in small groups,<br />
prior to the discussion.<br />
Before the discussion, work with<br />
the students to set ground rules<br />
for participation, courtesy, and<br />
inclusiveness.<br />
During the discussion, ask<br />
questions that establish what<br />
students understand<br />
(comprehension and review)<br />
before asking them to do more<br />
complex or original thinking<br />
(apply or critique).<br />
Pause 5-10 seconds after a<br />
question so that students have<br />
time to formulate thoughtful<br />
responses.<br />
Ask follow-up questions that<br />
allow students to develop or<br />
clarify a response.<br />
Be aware of the effect of<br />
non-verbal cues such as eye<br />
contact, gestures, posture, and<br />
position in the room.<br />
After the discussion, provide a<br />
record or summary of key points<br />
as they have emerged, either<br />
orally or on the board.<br />
Draw connections between the day’s discussion and other topics students are learning in the<br />
course. Good discussions are assessed. How will you determine what students learned from the<br />
discussion? Leave time at the end of class for students to write key points from the discussion or<br />
list important questions that remain for them.<br />
Develop continuing assignments or quiz questions based on class discussions. Good discussions<br />
lead to more discussions. How will the next discussion build on the learning created in this<br />
discussion? Use students’ end-of-class comments or written responses to help you plan the next<br />
discussion. Then emphasize connections between the new topic and earlier discussions.<br />
Reference:<br />
Teaching and Learning Bulletin, Center for Instructional Development and Research.<br />
<strong>University</strong> of Washington.<br />
For further information on facilitating class discussions, see Frequently Asked Questions about<br />
Discussion, link provided with permission by Indiana <strong>University</strong>.
Planning A Class - Guidelines for Lectures<br />
By Kenneth H. Murray, Ph.D., PE<br />
Associate Vice Chancellor of Academic Affairs and<br />
Dean of Graduate Studies<br />
64<br />
Below are slides from a PowerPoint presentation that outline how to plan a class session by<br />
organizing the lesson and creating board notes that allow students to more easily follow the lesson.<br />
Planning A Class<br />
Lesson Organization<br />
and Board Notes<br />
ExCEEd Teaching Workshop 13-18 July 2003<br />
A Structured Methodology for<br />
Organizing a Class<br />
✰ Formulate learning objectives<br />
Develop in-class learning activities.<br />
Prepare a lesson outline.<br />
Prepare “board notes.”<br />
Develop out-of-class learning activities.<br />
Select reading assignments.<br />
Develop homework assignments and projects.<br />
ExCEEd Teaching Workshop 13-18 July 2003
A Structured Methodology for<br />
Organizing a Class<br />
✰ Formulate learning objectives<br />
Develop in-class learning activities.<br />
Prepare a lesson outline.<br />
Prepare “board notes.”<br />
Develop out-of-class learning activities.<br />
Select reading assignments.<br />
Develop homework assignments and projects.<br />
65<br />
ExCEEd Teaching Workshop 13-18 July 2003<br />
Prepare a Lesson Outline<br />
Identify major topics to be covered or learning<br />
activities to be performed.<br />
Typically 5 - 8 per class.<br />
Should address the lesson objectives.<br />
Determine the hierarchy of concepts.<br />
Determine a logical sequence.<br />
Plan visual aids and demonstrations.<br />
ExCEEd Teaching Workshop 13-18 July 2003<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
Some Ideas<br />
For sensory learners, include practical example<br />
problems (with real numbers).<br />
For visual learners, use sketches, graphs, pictures,<br />
demonstrations, and video clips.<br />
For inductive learners, work a problem or show an<br />
application first then develop the theory.<br />
For active learners, use small group exercises in class,<br />
and allow students to collaborate on homework.<br />
For global learners, discuss the relevance of the subject<br />
and relate it to concepts from other lessons and courses.<br />
ExCEEd Teaching Workshop 13-18 July 2003
Example Lesson Outline<br />
EM302, Lesson 16: WORK-ENERGY 1<br />
66<br />
I. Introduction<br />
II. In-class assessment quiz; review as<br />
necessary<br />
A. “Big Picture” where Work-Energy<br />
fits into EM302<br />
B. Scaler/Dot products<br />
III. Characteristics of Work-Energy<br />
Method<br />
IV. Derivation of W-E relationship from<br />
Newton’s Second Law<br />
A. Signs on energy terms<br />
B. Can use this relationship to solve<br />
for one unknown<br />
V. Identify forces/moments that “do<br />
work” and that “do not work”<br />
VI. Determine work due to:<br />
A. Weight<br />
B. Kinetic friction<br />
C. Springs (students do this and<br />
others for homework)<br />
VII. Unbalanced wheel on ramp example<br />
to demonstrate sign of work term.<br />
Use group work.<br />
VIII. Little Red Wagon (LRW) example solving<br />
a problem using entire W-E relationship<br />
A. Read the problem<br />
B. Draw the method<br />
C. Apply Priciples<br />
D. Use math to solve<br />
E. “Does the answer make sense?”<br />
IX. Homework/Next class<br />
Prepare “Board Notes”<br />
The entire classroom presentation recorded<br />
accurately on paper.<br />
Generally one board per topic.<br />
Plan use of colored chalk.<br />
Illustrates hierarchy of ideas.<br />
Enhances clarity, especially for graphics.<br />
Adds distinctive character to the class.<br />
ExCEEd Teaching Workshop 13-18 July 2003<br />
Blank “Board Notes” Sheet
67<br />
Content of Board Notes<br />
All lesson content that you intend to discuss<br />
in class.<br />
May include:<br />
Administrative announcements.<br />
Visual aids and demonstrations.<br />
Questions.<br />
Transitions.<br />
ExCEEd Teaching Workshop 13-18 July 2003<br />
Why Are Transitions Important?<br />
Integrate discrete topics into a coherent whole.<br />
Establish relationships between topics.<br />
Establish relationships between a given topic,<br />
prior knowledge, and the “big picture”.<br />
ExCEEd Teaching Workshop 13-18 July 2003
Using “Board Notes”<br />
68<br />
Preparation:<br />
Facilitates lesson organization.<br />
Serves as a rehearsal for class.<br />
Use for reference during class.<br />
Frees up your hands.<br />
Frees up a lot of RAM.<br />
Use a record of what you taught.<br />
ExCEEd Teaching Workshop 13-18 July 2003<br />
Classroom<br />
Assessment<br />
Technique<br />
Approximate Analogy<br />
Board Notes are to a Class Presentation<br />
as _________________ is to __________________<br />
ExCEEd Teaching Workshop 13-18 July 2003<br />
A Structured Methodology for<br />
Organizing a Class<br />
✰ Formulate learning objectives<br />
Develop in-class learning activities.<br />
Prepare a lesson outline.<br />
Prepare “board notes.”<br />
Develop out-of-class learning activities.<br />
Select reading assignments.<br />
Develop homework assignments and projects.<br />
ExCEEd Teaching Workshop 13-18 July 2003
Notes on Effective Lecturing<br />
By Mrs. Susan M. Payne<br />
Research Assistant<br />
School of Graduate Studies<br />
69<br />
In your role as a Teaching Assistant, you may be called upon to present a lecture. Your purpose<br />
should not simply be to transmit information – a book can do this more efficiently. Think of<br />
lecturing as a useful way to provide structure, organize scattered material, pace student<br />
learning, and reinforce assigned reading by providing an alternative perspective or source of<br />
information. A few tips to make lecturing easier and more effective include:<br />
• Speak clearly and loudly enough to<br />
be heard. This may seem obvious,<br />
but according to undergraduates,<br />
some TAs are ‘mumblers.’ Before you<br />
begin, you might suggest that people<br />
signal with a raised hand if they<br />
can’t hear you.<br />
• Avoid distracting mannerisms<br />
including verbal tics like “um” or<br />
“you know,” or methodically<br />
straightening your notes or adjusting<br />
your tie.<br />
• Provide an introduction. Begin with<br />
a concise statement, something that<br />
will preview the lecture. Give the<br />
listeners a “map” of where you are<br />
going during the remainder of your<br />
presentation. Refer to previous<br />
lessons to attract and focus the<br />
attention of your audience on what<br />
is to come.<br />
• Repeat your points in two or three<br />
different ways. Your listeners may<br />
not have heard or understood the<br />
first time, or they may need more<br />
time to write your points down.<br />
• Present an outline. Use the<br />
chalkboard, an overhead<br />
transparency, or better yet – a<br />
handout. Then be sure that you refer<br />
to the outline as you move from<br />
point to point in your lecture so the<br />
students do not get ‘lost’ or lose<br />
sight of the big picture.<br />
• Emphasize principles and<br />
generalizations. Research suggests<br />
that these are what people really<br />
remember—and they are probably<br />
what you really want to teach.<br />
• Include examples or concrete ideas.<br />
Use specific examples that help both<br />
understanding and remembering.<br />
• Use short sentences. Very long or<br />
overly complex sentences are more<br />
difficult to understand when<br />
listening than when reading.<br />
• Stress important points. This can be<br />
done with your tone of voice and by<br />
being explicit (e.g., “Write this<br />
down”; “This is important”; “This<br />
will be on the test.”).<br />
• Pause often. Don’t rush through your<br />
material. Give your listeners time to<br />
think and to write.<br />
• Make eye contact with each<br />
student at least once during the<br />
lecture. This personalizes the<br />
lecture and increases a student’s<br />
sense of involvement.<br />
• Do not read from your lecture notes<br />
or from your presentation slides if it<br />
is a PowerPoint presentation. Use a<br />
set of guide notes to make certain<br />
you cover all intended items.<br />
Remember these points about the style, content, and clarity of your presentation and your<br />
students will gain maximum benefit from the lecture.<br />
For further information on lecturing, see Improving Lecturing Skills: Some Insights From<br />
Speech Communication, linked with permission by Indiana <strong>University</strong>.
Teaching Laboratory Sections<br />
By Vallie Guthrie, Ph.D.<br />
Director<br />
Greensboro Area Math/Science Education Center (GAMSEC)<br />
70<br />
The purpose of laboratory instruction is to allow students to actively participate in real science<br />
experiments and processes of science, and to allow them to discover science phenomena for<br />
themselves. Lab classes help students gain competence in the following science processes:<br />
1. Stating and delimiting problems<br />
2. Controlling variables<br />
3. Controlling conditions<br />
4. Making measurements<br />
5. Tabulating and interpreting data<br />
Genuine discovery or problem solving laboratory experiences are generally preferred to the<br />
structured ‘cookbook-type’ exercises. The discovery/problem solving activities allow students to<br />
construct their own knowledge and to minimize the idea that the scientific method is a<br />
magical route to scientific discovery. It becomes, instead, a method whose effectiveness is<br />
determined to a large extent by the care with which disciplined, but often quite ordinary<br />
persons find answers to ordinary as well as extraordinary problems.<br />
Typical Daily Activities in the Classroom<br />
Start and end on time.<br />
6. Completing laboratory reports<br />
7. Drawing conclusions<br />
8. Solving problems related to experiments<br />
9. Developing laboratory techniques<br />
Take roll every class period. Keep your roll book up-to-date and in a secure location. Make a<br />
photocopy of the pages periodically and keep at home or another safe place as a backup.<br />
Students cannot receive credit for completing an experiment if they did not attend the class<br />
and perform the experiment themselves under the supervision of the assigned instructor.<br />
Prepare yourself well and outline in writing (being very specific) what you are going to teach.<br />
Share your plans with an experienced colleague or mentor and practice before the lesson.<br />
Outline your goals for the class period on the chalkboard or overhead for the students to<br />
follow. This provides a focus for students as the lesson unfolds.<br />
Start each class with a brief recap or summary of the previous class. This may include<br />
returning corrected lab reports to students, reviewing the purpose of the experiment,<br />
providing answers to key activity questions and exercises, and summarizing scores made<br />
by the class.<br />
Then initiate an ‘assessment of prior knowledge’ activity or question to determine what/how<br />
much students already know about the subject matter to be taught or experiment to be<br />
performed in the forthcoming class period.<br />
When using the chalkboard or overhead projector, make sure it is clean, uncluttered, and<br />
easily visible by all students in the room.<br />
When lecturing or discussing material with the class, stand to the side so students can view<br />
what you have on the chalkboard or overhead.<br />
Look into their faces as you talk and look for signs of comprehension, confusion, problems,<br />
etc. as you cover the material.<br />
If students do not ask questions, plan your lessons so that you can ask THEM questions along<br />
the way to determine if they are getting a grasp of the material you are covering.
Make sure your voice projects so everyone in the room can hear adequately.<br />
Remember that students retain only 10% of what you say in a lecture, but by showing some<br />
visual element or action you can increase that retention to about 30%. By involving them in<br />
some activity related to the learning that retention of knowledge increases to about 50%.<br />
Students learn/retain the most (around 90%) when they are teaching other students. Design<br />
a strategy for getting students to work in study groups where they can learn from each other.<br />
71<br />
Conclude each class with a prepared summary. This means you should stop “teaching” about<br />
10 minutes before the end of class so that you have time to summarize what you have covered<br />
that day and answer any questions that arise. For lab classes, allow enough time for students to<br />
complete the experiment.<br />
Evaluate yourself after each class and keep a record of your findings. Make note of errors so<br />
you will not repeat them in future teaching of same concepts. Also note what you did<br />
exceptionally well. Review your prepared notes and mark anything that left students confused<br />
or where you noticed problems. This will help you prepare for the lesson differently next time.<br />
Reviewing the Experiment for the Day<br />
The Pre-Laboratory Discussion is designed to introduce the experiment for the day, its objectives,<br />
and to share safety tips, laboratory tips, etc. Be careful not to tell the students so much that they<br />
do not have the enthusiasm to carry out the experiment. The following are the components of<br />
the pre-laboratory discussion:<br />
Write the TITLE of the<br />
experiment and the<br />
PURPOSE on the board.<br />
Review the OBJECTIVES<br />
for the experiment.<br />
Safety is the NUMBER<br />
ONE priority in the<br />
laboratory! The instructor<br />
must closely monitor<br />
students by moving through<br />
the room as experiments are<br />
being conducted. NEVER<br />
leave students alone in the<br />
Give a definition of terms<br />
and explanation of the undergirding<br />
science of the<br />
experiment.<br />
Provide safety tips (see below).<br />
Review clean-up procedures<br />
and requirements.<br />
Safety Tips<br />
lab when experiments are<br />
taking place.<br />
Students and instructor must<br />
wear goggles if there will be<br />
any heating, hammering,<br />
etc.<br />
Clean Up Procedures<br />
Decide and announce what<br />
is due at the end of the lab<br />
and what to do if they<br />
cannot complete the entire<br />
experiment in the specific<br />
time period.<br />
The hood must be turned on<br />
if there is any heating and<br />
all heating must be done<br />
under the hood.<br />
No solids should be poured<br />
into the sinks. The sinks will<br />
be checked before and after<br />
each lab.<br />
Cleaner laboratories are a 2003-2004 focus!<br />
They will be inspected after each laboratory<br />
class and a condition report will be prepared<br />
and provided to the chemistry chairperson<br />
each week.<br />
It is easier to require students to clean -up<br />
after themselves than to do it yourself.<br />
All glassware should be washed.<br />
All bottles/jars should be wiped with a paper<br />
towel to remove spills. All desktops should be<br />
wiped down.<br />
All lids and tops for chemicals must be<br />
returned and screwed on tightly.<br />
All equipment should be returned to desk<br />
drawers or other designated areas.<br />
The hood should be turned off.<br />
Every student must turn in the lab report for<br />
the experiment performed that day before<br />
leaving the lab.
Teaching Tips<br />
Move around the classroom and monitor<br />
students as they perform experiments and<br />
procedures. Move from group to group and<br />
observe. Ask questions. Look for safety in<br />
progress. Look for examples of students not<br />
having read the experiment or for students<br />
who have the answers and are not doing the<br />
experiment. Review the wording of the<br />
answers to questions the students are writing.<br />
When you note an answer that is not correct<br />
or well stated, ask the student to review the<br />
answer again.<br />
Some type of laboratory report should be<br />
required of all students and for all<br />
experiments completed in the lab. Laboratory<br />
reports or notebooks must be corrected by the<br />
instructor and returned to each student on a<br />
regular basis. Students need constant and<br />
periodic evaluation of their work in order to<br />
know whether they correctly understand the<br />
required course work or not.<br />
72<br />
Lost and Found<br />
If any personal items (textbooks, notebooks, calculators, etc.) are left by students, leave<br />
them with the secretary in the department each day. Inform students that this is the<br />
procedure and they should check with the secretary if they are missing an item.<br />
Accidents and Incidents<br />
All accidents and incidents must be<br />
reported to the department chair as soon<br />
as they occur.<br />
Write down the name, SS#, local address<br />
and phone # of the student(s) involved,<br />
the course # and section #, date, time,<br />
name of instructor, and title of<br />
experiment. Then describe exactly what<br />
happened and what you did in response.<br />
Students are not to be allowed to use<br />
profanity, be disrespectful, or pose any<br />
danger to the instructor, their classmates,<br />
or themselves during class. The instructor<br />
should address all such cases by writing it<br />
up and notifying the chairperson or<br />
supervising instructor.<br />
A first aid course will be provided by the<br />
course coordinator at an agreed upon<br />
time/place and all instructors are required<br />
to attend.<br />
Quizzes and the Final Examination<br />
For laboratory classes, two<br />
quizzes will be given on<br />
the dates listed in the<br />
schedule of experiments.<br />
An experiment is<br />
scheduled after each quiz.<br />
Each instructor will write<br />
the quiz for each class and<br />
remind students of quizzes<br />
during the pre-laboratory<br />
discussion two weeks prior<br />
to each quiz.<br />
Make sure students have<br />
received their corrected<br />
experimental papers prior<br />
to each.<br />
The final exam covers all<br />
experiments done in and<br />
out of class. It is given on<br />
Tuesday and Thursday of<br />
the last week of the<br />
semester at the time the<br />
class regularly meets.<br />
There should be a review<br />
session for the final<br />
examination.<br />
Teaching Laboratory Sections - Linked with permission from Iowa <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>.<br />
(Scroll about half way down through linked article to locate this section)
Safety Considerations<br />
By Etta C. Gravely, Ph.D.<br />
Associate Professor<br />
Department of Chemistry,<br />
College of Arts and Sciences<br />
73<br />
To achieve safe conditions for students in the classroom and other laboratory workers in the<br />
laboratory setting, evacuation routes should be prominently and permanently posted in every<br />
classroom, laboratory and other appropriate locations throughout the building. If this is not<br />
prominently displayed so that the Graduate Teaching Assistant (GTA) can direct the students<br />
as to where they are to exit the building and assembly outside of the building, the GTA should<br />
request that the building representative or safety officer provide the information to them.<br />
GTAs should know the location of and how to operate the fire exits, telephones and alarms in<br />
the buildings where they are teaching. For each group exiting, designate one or two persons to<br />
be responsible for counting those present after exiting and report the information to the<br />
individual in charge. No one should return to the building until the individual in charge<br />
authorizes the students to do so.<br />
Before doing demonstrations in the classroom, the GTA should review the Material Safety<br />
Data Sheets (MSDS), which provide information on the hazards and precautions for<br />
chemicals that are normally used in an industrial workplace. Please note that some of the<br />
information included in an MSDS may not apply to the chemical when it is used, handled or<br />
stored as a laboratory chemical. Consult the ACS Publication “Safety in the Academic<br />
Laboratories” for a list of the Common MSDS Errors regarding academic settings.<br />
Proper ventilation is essential for demonstrations producing airborne toxic substances (dusts,<br />
mists and fumes) that are considered to be chronic toxins. If someone needs medical attention,<br />
call campus security, the laboratory technician in charge, and the medical personnel at the<br />
Sebastian Health Center (334-7880). The laboratory technician will arrange for someone<br />
knowledgeable to accompany the victim to get help in the event of an accident. Report all<br />
accidents and near misses to your supervisor and the building safety officer. Maintain records of<br />
all accidents, including those requiring only minor medical treatment. If a student causes an<br />
accident or a near miss, require the student to write a report indicating how the student thinks<br />
it could have been prevented. File this report with your supervisor and the building safety officer.<br />
The laboratory instructor must be in the laboratory during the entire laboratory period.<br />
Do not allow untrained students or visitors to work with chemical. Prior to each laboratory<br />
session, discuss with the students the possible hazards involved in the specific experiment.<br />
Model appropriate protective equipment and insist that each student wear the same protective<br />
equipment. Inform students to report unsafe acts engaged in by other students to you.<br />
Apprise students of the location and use of safety equipment and facilities such as exits, safety<br />
showers and eyewash fountains. Ascertain from each student the chemicals that they are<br />
known to be allergic or sensitive to. Also inquire if students have any medical conditions that<br />
may be complicated by exposure to certain chemicals.<br />
During the pre-laboratory discussions, model or illustrate the set-up of equipment required for<br />
the experiment. Illustrate the proper method for detecting the odor of a non-toxic chemical.<br />
Laboratory Safety Guidelines<br />
(Extracted from the Student Safety Contract, Department of Chemistry, N.C. A&T <strong>State</strong><br />
<strong>University</strong>)<br />
Conduct yourself in a responsible manner at all times in the laboratory.<br />
Follow all written and verbal instructions carefully. If you do not understand a direction or<br />
part of a procedure, ask the instructor before proceeding.<br />
Never work alone. No student may work in the laboratory without the instructor present.
Do not touch any equipment, chemicals, or other materials in the laboratory area until you<br />
are instructed to do so.<br />
Any time chemicals, heat, or glassware are used, students will wear laboratory glasses or goggles.<br />
There will be no exceptions to this rule! Safety glasses are provided for each student upon<br />
checking into the laboratory. It is the student’s responsibility to bring the safety glasses to each lab.<br />
Do not eat food, drink beverages, or chew gum in the laboratory. Do not use laboratory<br />
glassware as containers for food or beverages.<br />
Dress properly during a laboratory activity. Long hair, dangling jewelry, and loose or baggy<br />
clothing are a hazard in the laboratory. Long hair must be tied back and dangling jewelry and<br />
loose or baggy clothing must be secured. Shoes must completely cover the foot. No sandals<br />
allowed.<br />
Contact lenses should not be worn in the laboratory.<br />
Be prepared for your work in the laboratory. Read and complete all pre-lab assignments prior to<br />
coming to the laboratory. Never fool around in the laboratory. Horseplay, practical jokes, and<br />
pranks are dangerous and prohibited.<br />
Observe good housekeeping practices. Work areas should be kept clean and orderly at all times.<br />
Bring only your laboratory instructions, lab notebooks, worksheets and/or reports to the work area.<br />
Dispose of all chemical waste properly. Sinks are to be used only for water and those solutions<br />
designated by the instructor. Solid chemicals, metals, filter paper, and all other insoluble materials<br />
are to be disposed of in the proper waste containers, not in the sink.<br />
Keep hands away from face, eyes, mouth, and body while using chemicals. Wash you hands<br />
thoroughly after performing all experiments. Clean, rinse, and wipe dry all work surfaces and<br />
apparatus at the end of the experiment. Return all equipment clean and in working order to the<br />
proper storage area.<br />
Dispose of all broken glassware in the designated glass receptacles only.<br />
Experiments must be personally monitored at all times. You will be provided a laboratory station<br />
at which to work. Do not wander around the room, distract other students, or interfere with the<br />
laboratory experiments of others.<br />
Students are never permitted in the chemistry storeroom or the chemical preparation area.<br />
Know the locations and operating procedures of all safety equipment including the first aid kit,<br />
eyewash station, safety shower, fire extinguisher, and fire blanket. Know where the fire alarm and<br />
the exits are located.<br />
All chemicals in the laboratory are to be considered dangerous. Do not touch, taste, or smell any<br />
chemicals unless specifically instructed to do so. The proper technique for smelling chemical<br />
fumes will be demonstrated to you.<br />
Never return unused chemicals to their original containers.<br />
Never use mouth suction to fill a pipet. Use a rubber bulb or pipeter.<br />
Report any accident (spill, breakage, etc.) or injury (cut, burn, etc.) to the instructor immediately.<br />
If a chemical should splash in your eye(s) or on your skin, immediately flush with running water<br />
from the eyewash station or the safety shower for at least 20 minutes. Notify the instructor<br />
immediately.<br />
Exercise extreme caution when using a gas burner. Take care that hair, clothing, and hands are a<br />
safe distance from the flame at all times. Never reach over an exposed flame.<br />
Never leave a lit burner unattended. Never leave anything that is being heated or is visibly<br />
reacting unattended. Always turn off the burner or hot plate when it is not in use.<br />
Heated materials and glass remain very hot for a long period of time. Do not place any hot<br />
apparatus directly on the laboratory desk. Always use the wire gauze pad.<br />
NEVER sit on any laboratory counter surface! All aisles must be kept clear.<br />
74
Strategies to Enhance Learning<br />
By Anthony Graham, Ph.D.<br />
Adjunct Assistant Professor<br />
Department of Curriculum and Instruction,<br />
School of Education<br />
75<br />
It is important that Graduate Teaching Assistants (GTAs) vary their instructional methods<br />
and styles in the classroom to meet the needs of all learners. The GTA should set a goal to<br />
educate all students and their charge should be to find ways to include students in the learning<br />
process rather than ways to exclude them.<br />
The biggest error that most teachers make is they teach the way that they learned best. Thus, a<br />
teaching assistant who learns best through visual representations will often rely heavily on<br />
visual aids in the classroom. While this method may prove beneficial to some students, it can<br />
be dreadful to others. Consequently, you must make a conscientious effort to create a classroom<br />
environment that welcomes all students to the table of knowledge.<br />
Central to this idea of teaching all students are learning styles. There are two learning styles<br />
with which students possess when they enter the classroom -- analytic learning styles and<br />
relational learning styles. Students who are analytic learners feel comfortable using small pieces<br />
of information to build a larger picture. These students tend to focus on facts, and typically feel<br />
more comfortable working individually. Those students who are relational learners feel more<br />
comfortable beginning with the large picture and breaking it down into smaller parts.<br />
In order to reach each student regardless of learning style, GTAs must address the various<br />
learning modalities, or receptive learning styles, within their classroom instructional methods.<br />
There are three learning modalities that GTAs should recognize and address in their pedagogical<br />
practices: visual learning styles, auditory learning styles, and tactile (kinesthetic) learning<br />
styles. The classroom should be arranged in a manner that each student has the opportunity to<br />
receive information through one of these learning modalities.<br />
Although this task may seem overwhelming, GTAs can address these learning modalities with<br />
various teaching strategies that they implement during the planning stage of their courses.<br />
They should recognize that students who are visual learners prefer to receive information<br />
pictorially. Thus, classroom instruction that involves television or movie clips, paintings,<br />
drawings, charts, graphs, timelines, Internet sites, and drama/stage productions will help these<br />
students “see” the main idea of the instruction.<br />
Those students who are auditory learners will prefer to listen to material rather than read<br />
about them. Class lectures and discussions will benefit these students, as well as music or radio<br />
excerpts, speeches, and debates. Students who are kinesthetic learners prefer to be physically<br />
involved in the learning process, because they learn through touching, moving, and<br />
manipulating objects. Effective classroom instruction for these learners involves role playing,<br />
hands-on activities like labs and experiments, creating productions like plays or movies, or<br />
conducting fieldwork.<br />
Graduate Teaching Assistants who develop thoughtful lessons that are sensitive to each of<br />
these learning modalities into their classes often see the greatest gains in their students’<br />
performances. Students in these instructors’ classes often discuss how “fun” the class was or<br />
how engaged they were in the learning process, because the GTA kept the students at the<br />
center of the instruction rather than catering to his/her individual preferences. In addition,<br />
these GTAs put much thought and consideration into their lesson planning for the course. In<br />
order to address these students’ needs, it is imperative that you give much thought and<br />
consideration about the various mediums that you can use to address students’ learning<br />
modalities. Thus, GTAs who prepare properly will prevent their students’ poor performance.
Table of Suggested Instructional Activities for Learning Modalities<br />
Discipline Mathematics/ Physical Sciences Humanities/<br />
Modality<br />
Engineering/<br />
Social Sciences<br />
Technology<br />
76<br />
VISUAL<br />
Demonstrations<br />
Graphs, flow charts<br />
Projections<br />
Trajectories<br />
Vector diagrams<br />
Sketches<br />
Numerical examples<br />
Overhead transparency<br />
Demonstrations<br />
Simulations<br />
Concept maps<br />
Flowchart<br />
Colored chalk<br />
Films/Movies<br />
Field Observations<br />
Storyboards<br />
Paintings<br />
Drawings<br />
Films/Movies<br />
Television clips<br />
Multimedia presentations<br />
(PowerPoint, Frontpage)<br />
AUDITORY<br />
Teacher-led lectures<br />
Interactive lectures<br />
Verbal directives<br />
Descriptive problems<br />
Descriptive projects<br />
Group discussions<br />
Class discussions<br />
Peer conferences<br />
Instructor conferences<br />
Teacher-led lectures<br />
Interactive lectures<br />
Class discussions<br />
Group discussions<br />
Panel discussions<br />
Guest speakers<br />
Peer conferences<br />
Instructor conferences<br />
Speeches<br />
Teacher-led lectures<br />
Interactive lectures<br />
Panel discussions<br />
Class discussions<br />
Group discussions<br />
Case study discussions<br />
Debates<br />
Peer conferences<br />
<br />
<br />
Instructor conferences<br />
KINESTHETIC<br />
Lab experiments<br />
Poster presentations<br />
Peer teaching<br />
Graphing<br />
Proof work<br />
Project building<br />
Problem-solving<br />
activities<br />
Manipulatives<br />
Lab experiments<br />
Manipulatives<br />
Categorizing activities<br />
Creating pictures,<br />
drawings, and graphs<br />
Peer teaching<br />
Class presentations<br />
Games<br />
Poster presentations<br />
Field experiments<br />
Role playing<br />
Movie productions<br />
Interactive games<br />
Writing assignments<br />
(journals, one minute<br />
papers)<br />
Research<br />
Peer teaching<br />
Dance/movement<br />
Drama productions
In addition, effective GTAs use various strategies in their classroom to create a sense of<br />
community with their students. To achieve this end, you may want to consider the<br />
following ideas:<br />
77<br />
Involve students in the planning of your course: Make the course truly “student<br />
centered” by learning from the students what they want to learn within the course and<br />
how they would like to go about learning this information.<br />
Begin with what students know: Rather than assuming that all students are on the<br />
same playing field, determine exactly where students are in regard to course knowledge.<br />
Once accomplished, the effective Graduate Teaching Assistant can begin to plan<br />
creative and challenging lessons that will move the students from where they are to<br />
where the instructor (and the students) would like for them to be.<br />
Make material meaningful and relevant to the real world: The effective Graduate<br />
Teaching Assistant is able to connect the course content to the world in which students<br />
live. When students can make these connections, then the course material becomes |<br />
more meaningful to their lives.<br />
Allow immediate application of knowledge: Once students have been introduced to<br />
the course content, provide opportunities for them to apply that knowledge.<br />
Application exercises reinforces the content material. The key, however, is that the<br />
application exercises should be meaningful and authentic to the students’ lives.<br />
Provide immediate feedback: Students need to know how they are doing and where<br />
they need to improve. Effective Graduate Teaching Assistants provide ongoing feedback<br />
to their students that encourages them to reflect on their work and promotes positive<br />
change in their work behaviors. Thus, providing immediate, honest, and ongoing<br />
feedback benefits all learners.<br />
These specific strategies used in conjunction with varied pedagogical practices can help<br />
students learn at a maximal level, which is the outcome of all effective instruction.<br />
Additional Resources:<br />
Strategies to Enhance Learning - Linked with permission from <strong>University</strong> of California –<br />
Santa Barbara, Office of Instructional Development.
Teaching Strategies for a Diverse Student Body<br />
By Gloria M. Palma, Ph.D.<br />
Associate Professor<br />
Department of Human Performance and Leisure Studies,<br />
School of Education<br />
78<br />
Currently, culturally and linguistically diverse students in the classrooms face barriers and<br />
challenges to their academic success on a daily basis. Providing excellence in the classroom is<br />
difficult if the instructor and students have different styles of communication, cultural beliefs,<br />
and modes of interaction. In order to minimize these barriers to academic excellence in a class<br />
room characterized by a diverse student body, the following teaching strategies are suggested:<br />
Set high expectations for all students<br />
and specify task outcomes in terms of<br />
learning.<br />
Be sure to communicate clearly when<br />
giving directions and new information.<br />
Monitor student progress and provide<br />
immediate feedback relevant to<br />
student work.<br />
Feedback should be clear, specific, and<br />
task-related and should be given to all<br />
students regardless of race, gender, or<br />
color.<br />
Provide class activities that require<br />
“teamwork” or “cooperative learning.”<br />
Working in a group setting will build<br />
the students’ self-confidence and<br />
interpersonal skills.<br />
Provide opportunities for active learning<br />
that can be pursued independently or<br />
with peers. Class activities that require<br />
application of theories or concepts<br />
learned in class will motivate the<br />
students to engage in class work rather<br />
than sitting still listening to the<br />
instructor’s lecture the whole time.<br />
Use a variety of teaching styles. Students<br />
have individual learning styles and learn<br />
best in different ways. Although some<br />
students may be visual learners, others<br />
may use more of auditory or tactile modes<br />
of learning.<br />
Be culturally responsive as an<br />
instructor. Make ways to learn more<br />
about the diverse cultural and linguistic<br />
backgrounds of your students.<br />
Encourage students to ask questions.<br />
Provide lecture outlines or copies of<br />
PowerPoint presentations. Some students<br />
may need time to write class notes during<br />
a lecture. In order to avoid important<br />
points missed during a lecture, handing<br />
students an outline of the instructor’s<br />
lecture presentations will be very helpful.<br />
Give reasonable extended deadlines<br />
for class projects.<br />
Try to rephrase directions or<br />
instructions if unclear to students.<br />
Use instructional materials that are<br />
accurate and free of stereotypes.<br />
Utilize the resources within the<br />
classroom among various cultural and<br />
linguistic groups.<br />
Encourage peer assisted learning<br />
and/or group studies.<br />
In addition to learning style preferences, students also have differences in terms of gender,<br />
sexual orientation, religious beliefs, learning abilities and disabilities, and minority vs. majority<br />
social status. Teaching strategies that address these differences are outlined in charts that are<br />
linked below to provide you with ideas on how to organize and plan instruction to address<br />
these differences:<br />
Linked with permission from <strong>University</strong> of California – Santa Barbara - under Chapter 3 -<br />
Strategies to Enhance Learning – are the following articles:<br />
Gender socialization<br />
Students with learning disabilities<br />
Sexual orientation and religion<br />
Students with minority status<br />
Addressing value conflicts in the classroom<br />
Non-native speakers of English (ESL)
Using Your Voice Effectively<br />
By Robin Guill Liles, Ph.D.<br />
Assistant Professor<br />
Department of Human Development and Services,<br />
School of Education<br />
79<br />
Of importance to most teaching assistants is responsible pedagogy surrounding a specific content<br />
area; and in most university environments, these young academicians are uniquely poised to<br />
facilitate undergraduate learning. However, in addition to their teaching assignments, graduate<br />
teaching assistants will often find themselves engaged in other academic activities, ranging<br />
from commitment to their own graduate studies, to teaching and research assistance for faculty,<br />
to providing basic support services for departmental, school, university and professional activities.<br />
On any given day, Graduate Teaching Assistants may wear many academic “hats,” whereby it is<br />
reasonable to assume that they can experience feelings of confusion about their multiple academic<br />
roles. (Massy & Wilger, 1994) Thus, helping Graduate Teaching Assistants recognize and<br />
develop “effective voices” to move their professional lives in a positive and productive direction<br />
is important.<br />
Common wisdom suggests that open dialogue is helpful in accomplishing many, if not all, of our<br />
daily tasks. Open dialogue has been operationalized across two primary domains, specifically,<br />
respectful speaking and reflective listening. Like most professionals, Graduate Teaching<br />
Assistants may employ these dialoguing skills in multiple contexts, including self-discovery,<br />
interpersonal relationships, teaching and learning, as well as other professional activities.<br />
However, developmental theory suggests that the process of self-discovery, or what may be<br />
generally referred to as identify formation, is fundamental to positive interpersonal behaving,<br />
regardless of the nature of the relationship. If developmental theory holds true, then graduate<br />
teaching assistants may wonder that their greatest personal and professional responsibilities<br />
necessarily spring from this process of self-discovery. Moreover, Graduate Teaching Assistants<br />
should understand that self-discovery is a dynamic and fluid experience, inevitably filtered<br />
through life learning and experiences. Finally, developmental theory dictates that individuals<br />
who positively and courageously engage in the self-discovery process are rewarded with a strong<br />
sense of personhood, and with a clear and resilient vision of their personal values and beliefs.<br />
This vision can be profoundly useful to Graduate Teaching Assistants when negotiating the real<br />
and often bewildering challenges of “wearing many hats.” In confusing situations, exacerbated<br />
by their professional inexperience, Graduate Teaching Assistants may be left with nothing more<br />
than their personal values and beliefs to inform their thinking and decision-making, and to pilot<br />
their behaviors\and actions. Graduate Teaching Assistants whose values and beliefs hold them<br />
to an ethical standard which exceeds simple punishment avoidance or rule implementation, and<br />
who strive to do the greater good, are bound to speak with a more effective voice.<br />
For practical purposes, Graduate Teaching Assistants are most likely to find their professional<br />
time spent in preparing and engaging in their own graduate studies, and in planning and<br />
teaching their undergraduate classes. Massy and Wilger (1994) reported that one difficult reality<br />
which may occur in academia is that faculty work alone. Such autonomy has long been viewed<br />
as providing faculty and young academicians with the scheduling flexibility necessary to<br />
cultivate academic creativity and productivity, as well as personal initiative.<br />
Unfortunately, highly autonomous environments can also generate feelings of professional<br />
isolation, as well as impugn collegial communication and collaboration. These negative<br />
consequences may be further aggravated by other regrettable academic characteristics,<br />
including discrete and specialized teaching and research interests and departmental politics.<br />
Inexperienced Graduate Teaching Assistants are particularly vulnerable to the negative<br />
consequences stemming from more autonomous and less interactive environments, which may<br />
practically translate into no more expert assistance and guidance than a prescribed textbook and<br />
an erstwhile syllabus. Within these environments Graduate Teaching Assistants’ efforts to<br />
activate and utilize their effective voices may be largely unobserved or outright ignored.
By contrast, supportive academic cultures typically portray qualities intended to facilitate both<br />
professional growth and development among faculty, as well as student learning. Teaching is<br />
largely perceived as a collegial and cooperative activity, wherein faculty are about the business<br />
of helping one another sharpen and polish their teaching skills and practices, which naturally<br />
gives way to improved student learning experiences.<br />
80<br />
Supportive cultures also encourage respectful and reflective dialogue among faculty and young<br />
academicians whose professional opinions and personal worldviews may differ. Such dialogue<br />
advances professional and personal growth and development, and precludes the stagnating<br />
effects often associated with overly civil and essentially inauthentic social veneers. Finally, the<br />
generational chasm which can exist among senior and junior faculty and Graduate Teaching<br />
Assistants is narrowed in supportive academic cultures. Senior faculty are more likely to regard<br />
junior faculty as the future of the academic program, department, school, and university.<br />
Similarly, senior and junior faculty are more likely to deem Graduate Teaching Assistants as<br />
pivotal to the daily running of the program, department, school, and university. Of additional<br />
importance in bridging the generational chasm is the necessity of positive role modeling<br />
among <strong>University</strong> administrators. Within supportive academic cultures, it is reasonable to<br />
assume that Graduate Teaching Assistants’ efforts to activate their effective voices will not only<br />
be observed, but encouraged and valued.<br />
Bronfenbrenner (1979) posited that both personal and professional development evolves in<br />
context, and is a function of bi-directional interactions occurring between an individual and<br />
his or her contextual influences. If we characterize having an effective voice as an important<br />
and useful professional characteristic within academia, then we are obliged to define the<br />
individual and contextual pieces which necessarily work together to engender an effective<br />
voice. It is suggested here that three elements must co-exist to help the Graduate Teaching<br />
Assistant create and refine his or her effective voice.<br />
First, the Graduate Teaching Assistant ought to have a clear vision or his or her personal values<br />
and beliefs. This vision provides the Graduate Teaching Assistant with the solid footing crucial<br />
in guiding his or her professional thinking and behaving, regardless of which “hat” he or she<br />
may be wearing. Second, the university should define a supportive academic culture as one<br />
intended to maintain a healthy balance between creative professional autonomy, collegial<br />
cooperation, intergenerational collaboration, and student learning. Finally, growth-focused<br />
interaction between theGraduate Teaching Assistant and members of his or her academic<br />
culture must occur. In most if not all cases, such interaction becomes a function of open<br />
dialogue, framed by respectful speaking and reflective listening.<br />
In conclusion, the Graduate Teaching Assistant’s ability to use his or her voice effectively<br />
increases the probability that he or she will be able to grow and develop, both personally and<br />
professionally At the heart of every educational venue is the aim to help others as they<br />
advance through life. Thus, helping the Graduate Teaching Assistant recognize, expand, and<br />
refine his or her effective voice may be deemed a worthy goal across supportive academic cultures.<br />
References:<br />
Bronfenbrenner, U. (1979). The Ecology of Human Development: Experiments by Nature and<br />
Design. Cambridge: Harvard <strong>University</strong> Press.<br />
Massy, W. F., & Wilger, A. K. (1994). Overcoming ‘hollowed’ collegiality. Change, 26, p. 10.
SECTION VII<br />
Grades and Classroom Management<br />
Testing and Grading<br />
By Karen Smith-Gratto, Ph.D.<br />
Associate Professor<br />
Center for Professional Development,<br />
School of Education<br />
81<br />
Introduction<br />
One of the responsibilities of teaching is evaluating student learning. There are many ways to<br />
do so, not just paper and pencil testing. In fact, the best grading (or evaluating of student<br />
learning) should incorporate more than paper and pencil tests. The learning objectives or<br />
standards (often set by professional organizations and/or the state) are always the foundation<br />
for deciding what assessment methods and techniques will be used to determine what a student<br />
has learned. Assessing student learning must reflect what students are told they are expected to<br />
learn. If the learning objectives are clearly articulated and followed, the design of appropriate<br />
graded assignments and tests should logically follow. The articulation of how and when student<br />
learning will be evaluated should be included on the syllabus, so that students have a clear<br />
understanding of what is expected. Informed students are more successful students.<br />
Planning in advance how student learning will be evaluated enhances the ability to carefully<br />
consider how to make sure that the activity or test actually addresses the learning objectives for<br />
the course. In addition, for such things as performance tests, advance planning enables you to<br />
carefully consider the objectives and how to design a grading rubric and activity that<br />
encourages fairness and objectivity when you grade students’ work. It is important to have<br />
objective criteria by which you can judge the student’s performance, either on tests or on other<br />
graded assignments.<br />
With all assessment activities, we want to grade in ways that accurately reflect the learning<br />
objectives (content validity), be consistent over time and between students (reliability), and<br />
be constructed in such a way that it does not embarrass or upset students by inappropriate<br />
cultural, gender, or ethnic descriptions or examples (without bias). First, to ensure content<br />
validity, assignments need to draw directly from the learning objectives and reflect those<br />
objectives accurately. (Please note that there are other types of validity – refer to some of the<br />
additional resources to learn about those). For example, if we have the following objective:<br />
“Students will compare and contrast the underlying causes of World War I and World War II,”<br />
an essay that simply has the students describe the underlying causes of either war is not a valid<br />
way to assess this objective. However, an essay that follows the exact wording of the objective<br />
or even a group assignment that follows the exact wording of the objective would be valid.<br />
Reliability should also be a concern. This means that graded assignment should reflect<br />
consistency (students who normally do well on most assignments (or the other items on a test)<br />
can be expected to do well on the particular assignment (or test item) and students who lack<br />
preparation and do poorly on most assignments (or on the other items on a test) will do poorly<br />
on the particular assignment (or test item). Another area that should be of concern is that of<br />
bias. Case studies and other activities in which language can impact student reaction should be<br />
carefully monitored in order to avoid terms, inadvertent slurs, or stereotypes because their<br />
emotional impact can influence how well the student does and cause an inaccurate evaluation<br />
of student knowledge.<br />
In addition to the consideration one gives to validity, reliability, and bias; it is important to<br />
provide feedback to the students as soon as possible after the assignment or test is completed.<br />
Assignments and tests should be used in order to help students learn, not just provide grades.<br />
By providing feedback, as soon as possible after the assignment or test, the student can review<br />
his or her mistakes and began correcting his or her understanding of the material. The longer<br />
the wait between completion of the assignment and feedback about the assignment or test the<br />
longer the student has to accept his or her incorrect knowledge as correct.
Grading Assignments and Activities<br />
Learning Activities and Products<br />
One way to accurately and fairly evaluate activities and products is to create a “Grading<br />
Rubric” that can be given to students in advance of the activity or production of the product.<br />
By creating a rubric, both you and the students will have a clear understanding of what is<br />
expected of the student. The rubric helps the grader maintain a more objective point of view<br />
than might otherwise be possible without the criteria being spelled out. Rubrics can be<br />
structured in a variety of ways. Rubrics can be developed that will address a variety of student<br />
performance activities: including but not limited to: laboratory exercises; musical performances;<br />
sport activities; and construction steps. Products of various sorts can also be evaluated by using<br />
rubrics. Some products that might be developed by students are: models; web-sites; computer<br />
programs; papers; and so forth. Regardless of the activity or product assessed, all rubrics require<br />
similar decisions and the development of certain characteristics.<br />
82<br />
Must address the<br />
evaluation of at least one<br />
objective or standard<br />
from the course.<br />
May address subobjectives<br />
that may be<br />
derived from the primary<br />
objective that is<br />
evaluated.<br />
May address additional<br />
objectives that are not a<br />
stated part of the course<br />
(such as writing style in<br />
an essay or research paper).<br />
Must articulate observable<br />
elements of the product<br />
or performance.<br />
Scoring must be planned<br />
in advance.<br />
Characteristics of Rubrics for Assessing Performances or Products<br />
While these characteristics sound simple, the development of a rubric for evaluating student<br />
learning should be thoughtfully constructed. The rubric should reflect what is important for<br />
the student to demonstrate. Three examples will be shown.<br />
The first example shown on the next page shows the element of part of the activity (an oral<br />
report) that is evaluated. In this example, each element is assigned a specific number of points.<br />
Students can not earn more than the stated number of points on a given element. However, if<br />
the element assessed is below a particular achievement level (say the student talks so quietly<br />
that others can not hear the student in the back of the room) points will be subtracted from<br />
the total points for that element (“Appropriate volume and rate” would lose 3 points). Once<br />
the activity is finished the points are summed.<br />
The second example (a rubric for a literature review paper) indicates the number of total<br />
points that can be assigned for the entire paper). Notice that for this rubric more points can be<br />
deducted for some of the items than would add up to the total number of points for this<br />
assignment. Using this technique can indicate to students that some errors (like grammar) can<br />
result in all points being deducted, even when other criteria is met.<br />
The third partial example (Final Project Evaluation) gives verbal descriptions of each level of<br />
performance for each element (or criteria) evaluated. Notice that each level (1 through 4)<br />
clearly describes the performance for that level. This format takes more time to develop, but<br />
facilitates quick grading because everything is clearly stated.
Example 1. Oral Report Rubric that provides the number of points that can be earned when each<br />
element is addressed.<br />
Oral Report Rubric<br />
83<br />
Area Evaluated Points Possible Total Received<br />
Content<br />
Presentation is well organized 10<br />
Concepts are clearly expressed 8<br />
Main ideas of topic are covered 10<br />
Demonstrates Understanding of topic 10<br />
(through how presented and responses to questions)<br />
Presentation<br />
Good pronunciation 5<br />
Good eye contact 5<br />
Good posture 3<br />
Neat Grooming 3<br />
Appropriate volume and speech rate 3<br />
Does NOT read from POWERPOINT slides 3<br />
PowerPoint Slides and other media<br />
Choice of media is appropriate 5<br />
Original media demonstrates good practice<br />
(visual design, sound quality, etc.) 5<br />
Handouts<br />
Adequately summarize topic from chapter<br />
(not PowerPoint slides) 10<br />
Includes your conclusions or position on the topic 5<br />
Demonstrate good writing and layout 5<br />
Learning Activity<br />
Activity reinforces learning and is on topic 10<br />
Total Points Earned 100<br />
Developed for CUIN 743 by Dr. Karen Smith-Gratto © 2004<br />
Oral portion should be from 10 to 15 minutes in length<br />
Activity portion should be from 10 to 15 minutes in length
Example 2. Literature Review with a table that provides how many points can be deducted for<br />
specific elements within the literature review.<br />
Rubric for Literature Review<br />
Your paper starts out with 100 points. Area evaluated explains what will be graded, the next column<br />
gives the total number of points that can be deducted for that area of evaluation. The third column<br />
will show what you earned. You can earn a minus grade but the grade entered would then be a zero<br />
(0).<br />
Area evaluated Points that can Points<br />
be subtracted for Subtracted<br />
item<br />
Introduction – must establish the importance of the topic Up to 20 points<br />
Body of the paper should have the following:<br />
Up to 40 points<br />
! Each article should be summarized<br />
! Logical organization of body – often done by categorizing<br />
articles<br />
! Identify the relationships among articles<br />
! Identify the differences in research, theory and/or opinion<br />
! Identify gaps in the literature<br />
Conclusion should have the following:<br />
! Summarize the general patterns of the literature reviewed<br />
! Describe what research you think would add to and enhance<br />
the research reviewed<br />
! Describe how the literature contributes to theory<br />
development or refinement<br />
! Explain possible steps in solving identified problems<br />
! Apply the literature reviewed to practice<br />
Writing style – the paper must exhibit the following:<br />
! Good paragraphing<br />
! Transitions between sections of the paper and between<br />
paragraphs<br />
! Good sentence structure that reads smoothly<br />
Demonstrates good APA format – 1 point per error deducted<br />
Demonstrates good grammer – 1 point per error deducted<br />
Demonstrates appropriate use of mechanics and correct<br />
spelling – 1 point per error deducted<br />
Up to 30 points<br />
Up to 40 points<br />
No limit<br />
No limit<br />
No limit<br />
84<br />
TOTAL POINTS deducted from 100<br />
SCORE FOR ASSIGNMENT<br />
Developed for: CUIN 743 by Dr. Karen Smith-Gratto © 2004
Example 3. Partial example of project rubric that describes the required elements at each level of<br />
accomplishment.<br />
Final Project Evaluation for Multimedia Development and Evaluation<br />
85<br />
Area 0 1 2 3 4 Weight Total<br />
Adequate Instructional Design Documentation and Thought (Part One)<br />
Audience<br />
is clearly<br />
defined<br />
(students)<br />
- Analysis<br />
Not<br />
found<br />
Shows an<br />
inadequate<br />
number of<br />
characteristics<br />
and<br />
characteristics<br />
that are not<br />
relevant – and<br />
does not<br />
specifically<br />
state diversity<br />
characteristics<br />
Shows an<br />
inadequate<br />
number of<br />
characteristics<br />
or shows some<br />
characteristics<br />
that are not<br />
relevant and/or<br />
does not<br />
specifically<br />
state diversity<br />
characteristics<br />
Shows both an<br />
adequate<br />
number of<br />
characteristics<br />
and all<br />
characteristics<br />
are relevant –<br />
does not<br />
include<br />
description of<br />
diversity<br />
characteristics<br />
Shows<br />
extensive<br />
student<br />
characteristics<br />
that are<br />
relevant – this<br />
includes a<br />
description of<br />
diversity<br />
characteristics<br />
x2<br />
The Not<br />
instructional found<br />
need is<br />
established<br />
and the<br />
objectives<br />
are clearly<br />
stated and<br />
adequate for<br />
the content<br />
– Analysis<br />
and Design<br />
No explanation<br />
or an<br />
inadequate<br />
explanation<br />
about why the<br />
objectives are<br />
important *<br />
*<strong>State</strong> or<br />
District<br />
Curriculum<br />
Guide for<br />
teachers or<br />
stated<br />
explanation of<br />
importance for<br />
business &<br />
industry<br />
The<br />
explanation<br />
about why the<br />
lesson is<br />
important is<br />
inadequate *<br />
Exhibits at least<br />
two of the<br />
following<br />
characteristics:<br />
The<br />
importance of<br />
the lesson is<br />
completely and<br />
adequately<br />
stated; the<br />
objectives are<br />
all correctly<br />
written; and<br />
there are<br />
sufficient<br />
objectives to<br />
meet the need<br />
Exhibits all of<br />
the following<br />
characteristics:<br />
The<br />
importance of<br />
the lesson is<br />
completely and<br />
adequately<br />
stated; the<br />
objectives are<br />
all correctly<br />
written; and<br />
there are<br />
sufficient<br />
objectives to<br />
meet the need<br />
x5<br />
From Complete Form – K. Smith-Gratto © 2002 Developed for CUIN 763
Testing – Planning the Test<br />
Testing is one means by which we evaluate student learning. Tests should address objectives that<br />
can most productively be evaluated by paper and pencil (or computer-based testing – such as in<br />
BlackBoard). Usually, several objectives are addressed through testing. It is easiest to develop a<br />
sound test by creating a “Table of Specifications” which outlines the objectives or sub-areas of<br />
objectives that will be tested. The identification of areas to be tested is only the first step. Next<br />
the test developer must determine how many points or what percentage of the test will be<br />
assigned to each objective or sub-objective. This is done by determining: 1) how important the<br />
objective is when considered in comparison with the other objectives to be tested; 2) how much<br />
class time was spent addressing the objective; 3) the number of activities and assignments that<br />
addressed the objective; and 4) how much the instructor emphasized the importance of the<br />
objective. The determination of weight requires thought and consideration because the decision<br />
made here can result in a student who works hard being unfairly assessed. For example: Dr.<br />
Who’s class spent 5 days on the impacts of WWII. In that time there were whole class discussions,<br />
mini lectures, additional readings, and brief group presentations. On the other hand, students<br />
read about the dates of different battles in the text but Dr. Who did not lecture about the dates<br />
of the battles nor did Dr. Who tell the students that they were responsible for the dates even<br />
though the dates and battles would not be discussed in class. Dr. Who writes the test and<br />
students are graded more heavily on the dates than on the impacts of WWII. This would be an<br />
invalid assessment of what the students learned.<br />
After determining the total number of points or percentage of the test will address the objectives<br />
and sub-objectives the developer might want to consider what level of questions that students<br />
will receive. You can refer to Bloom’s Taxonomy for more detail and include those levels on your<br />
“Table of Specifications” or you can consider low and high cognitive questions. Low cognitive<br />
questions would be those that address memorization or comprehension only. High cognitive<br />
questions would involve such things as comparing and contrasting, evaluating, analyzing, and<br />
synthesizing information. A low level question might ask what date something happened. A high<br />
level question would require that the student know and understand the lower level information<br />
and be able to use it in some way. An example of a Table of Specifications follows.<br />
Example of a Table of Specification that provides the number of points per objective and<br />
the objective the table is based upon.<br />
Objectives for Table of Specifications<br />
86<br />
• Explain what hypermedia is.<br />
• Describe what a flowchart is and when to<br />
use a flowchart.<br />
• Describe what a storyboard is and when to<br />
use storyboarding.<br />
• Describe what a script is and when to use a<br />
script.<br />
• Describe linear design.<br />
• Describe non-linear design.<br />
• Compare and contrast menu design with<br />
network design.<br />
• Describe hybrid design.<br />
• Explain the ADDIE model of Instructional<br />
Design.<br />
• Explain what a hyperlink is.<br />
• Explain what an action button is.<br />
• Explain the difference between slide masters<br />
and design templates.<br />
• Explain the difference between object<br />
linking and embedding.<br />
• List the six kinds of multimedia development<br />
software and give examples.<br />
• Create hyperlinks, action buttons, links to<br />
other applications or programs.<br />
• Draw a variety of lines and shapes in<br />
PowerPoint.<br />
• Create a slide master for PowerPoint.<br />
• Create a design template for PowerPoint.<br />
• Create a data sheet, a Graph in<br />
PowerPoint.<br />
•Create a PowerPoint that can be<br />
read on a computer without<br />
PowerPoint (Pack and Go and<br />
web-based).
Table of Specifications Quiz 2 CUIN 763 Fall 2003<br />
Topic High Low Total<br />
87<br />
Planning - ADDIE 4 2 6<br />
Planning – storyboard, flowchart, script 2 1 3<br />
Planning - Five basic multimedia design paradigms 3 3 6<br />
Triggers and hyperlinks 1 2 3<br />
Drawing (Chapter 36) 0 1 1<br />
Slide Masters and Design Templates (Chap 37) 0 1 1<br />
Creating Charts, Graphs, Tables, and Equations (Chap 38) 0 1 1<br />
Application Development Packages (Chap 9 and class –<br />
i.e. Lectora, Vox Proxy) 1 1 2<br />
Pack and Go (Chap 39) 0 1 1<br />
PowerPoint to Web Page 0 1 1<br />
TOTAL 11 14 25<br />
K. Smith-Gratto developed for CUIN 763 © 2003<br />
Notice that many of the objectives have a performance component. This does not mean that<br />
some aspects can not be evaluated via a paper and pencil test, only that a paper and pencil test would<br />
be inappropriate for a full assessment of the student’s knowledge. Also, if you look at the objectives<br />
and at the table you will see that some of the objectives have been combined. Usually for a full blown<br />
test this is not a good idea, but you will notice that the “test” is a “quiz”, which is normally accepted<br />
as being of less count in the overall grade than a test. The table was prepared not just to plan the quiz<br />
but to provide the students with a study guide. While you don’t need to provide students with a copy<br />
of the “Table of Specifications”, it can provide the students with information that can help them be<br />
successful in choosing what to study and answers the perennial student question “What’s on the test?”.<br />
Constructing and Grading Tests<br />
Test items can be constructed once what will be tested and at what level it will be tested has been<br />
systematically established. Test items can be divided into two categories: selected response items and<br />
constructed response items. Selected response items include: True/false and yes/no items; multiple<br />
choice items; and matching items. Constructed response items include: short answer items and essay<br />
items. There are advantages and disadvantages to both general types of questions. One disadvantage of<br />
selected response items is that it is easier for students to guess a correct answer. In order for selected<br />
response questions, particularly matching and multiple choice to be effective for assessment, care and<br />
time must be spent in the construction. In general grading selected response items is simple, objective,<br />
and reliable. When using constructed response items, guessing on the part of the student is less likely.<br />
However, when using constructed response items, a variety of answers may prove to be correct. One<br />
disadvantage to using constructed response items is that grading is often more subjective. This is<br />
particularly true because depending upon the question; several answers may be logically supported.<br />
Regardless of the type of item there are certain characteristics in good test writing that apply. Items<br />
should be written clearly, using plain unambiguous language. The student should be able to<br />
demonstrate knowledge of the content without being confused by the writing. Also, directions for all<br />
types of items on a given test should be clearly written and descriptive of what the student is expected<br />
to do.
Selected Response Items<br />
• True/false and Yes/No items<br />
o Use clear concise language<br />
o Avoid using “not” or other words that negate the statement<br />
o Use only one main idea or point<br />
e.g. Good – Pack and Go requires that users have a web browser.<br />
Bad – Pack and Go does not require that users have a web browser and they do not<br />
need to have PowerPoint.<br />
• Multiple Choice<br />
o Clear concise language.<br />
o Use simple sentences and appropriate vocabulary.<br />
o Avoid using “not” or other words that negate the statement. If you use “not” be sure to<br />
emphasize the word – for example: “Which of the following is NOT” or “Which of the<br />
following is not”<br />
o Do not give clues as to the correct answer.<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
o<br />
The stem (the part of the multiple choice problem that asks a question or problem)<br />
should be about only one problem or question.<br />
The possible answers should be about the same length.<br />
Avoid answers that are “all of the above” and “none of the above”<br />
Use random assignment of correct answers for position of (a, b, c, etc.)<br />
You may have several answers based upon a reading selection. For example, a scenario<br />
or case study that the student may analyze is appropriate for higher level multiple choice<br />
questions.<br />
(Example follows).<br />
Wording of can be a question – such as: “Where is Greensboro located?” or a statement<br />
that needs completion – such as: Greensboro is located in _______.”<br />
Format of a multiple choice item requires a stem, an answer, and distractors.<br />
Stem – the first part of the item (Where is Greensboro located?)<br />
Answer – central <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong><br />
Distractors – central South <strong>Carolina</strong>, southern <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong>, eastern <strong>North</strong><br />
<strong>Carolina</strong>, southern South <strong>Carolina</strong><br />
e.g. Good stem, answer, and distractors - A habit that develops from imitation is<br />
called ________.<br />
a. Discriminative imitation<br />
b. Generalized imitation<br />
c. Vicarious imitation<br />
d. Delayed imitation<br />
Bad stem - When a person imitates someone else and the person who does the imitating<br />
develops a habit it is called __________.<br />
Bad answer and distractor combinations –<br />
a. Discriminative habit<br />
b. Generalized imitation<br />
c. A vicariously developed habit<br />
d. A delayed imitation and habit<br />
88
An Example of a Case Study/Scenario Type Multiple Choice Question –<br />
Read the following case study and answer the questions that follow it. (Items 8- 10).<br />
Scenario<br />
John is a very good worker and his boss appreciates how hard John works. However, John is a<br />
very sloppy dresser. If John’s work required him to be out of sight of customers his boss wouldn’t<br />
mind, but John must interact with customers. He is polite and always tries to help customers<br />
who need help. Unfortunately, some customers have complained John looks like a bum. In<br />
fact, both customers and co-workers have complained about John’s body odor. His boss doesn’t<br />
want to fire John. He knows John can be neat and that John doesn’t always have body odor. In<br />
fact, John was well groomed when he applied for the job and for the first few weeks on the job.<br />
How can John’s boss help John be better groomed?<br />
89<br />
8. One course of action for John’s boss to take according to what you have learned so far in the<br />
course is:<br />
A. Use classical conditioning to change John’s behavior by withholding part of John’s pay<br />
each day that John shows up for work improperly groomed.<br />
B. Use operant conditioning to change John’s behavior by withholding part of John’s pay<br />
each day that John shows up for work improperly groomed.<br />
C. Use social learning theory to change John’s behavior by withholding part of John’s pay<br />
each day that John shows up for work improperly groomed.<br />
9. If John’s boss did withhold some of John’s pay, it would be considered which of the following?<br />
A. Reinforcement<br />
B. Punishment<br />
C. Modeling<br />
D. Stimulus<br />
• Matching items<br />
o Consist items from one related topic<br />
o Relatively short<br />
o Have more responses than items to be answered<br />
o Make order logical in some way (alphabetical, chronological, or other logical<br />
organization)<br />
o Make it clear how items are to be matched.<br />
e.g. Good –<br />
Directions: In the space to the left of the state listed in Column 1, write the letter of the city<br />
that is the capitol of the state from Column 2. Each city in Column 2 may only be selected once.<br />
Column 1 Column 2<br />
____ 1. Louisiana<br />
a. Albany<br />
____ 2. New York<br />
b. Baton Rouge<br />
____ 3. <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong><br />
c. Olympia<br />
____ 4. Oregon<br />
____ 5. Utah<br />
d. Raleigh<br />
e. Salem<br />
f. Salt Lake City<br />
g. Tallahassee<br />
h. Trenton<br />
Bad –<br />
Directions: Match the items on the left with the items on the right.<br />
Column 1 Column 2<br />
_____1. Utah<br />
a. Salt Lake City<br />
_____2. <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong><br />
b. Baton Rouge<br />
_____3. Oregon<br />
c. Albany<br />
_____4. Louisiana<br />
d. Raleigh<br />
_____5. New York<br />
e. Salem
Constructed Response Items.<br />
• Short Answer<br />
o Questions or sentences with blanks at the end are appropriate.<br />
o All blanks for all items should be the same length.<br />
o Limit the number of words needed.<br />
o Plan possible answers in advance (to facilitate more objective grading).<br />
90<br />
• Essay<br />
o Use essays for in-depth and high level assessment, not fact or comprehension level<br />
questions.<br />
o Plan the criteria by which the essay will be assessed in advance. Also consider elements<br />
within the answer that will be required (but remember if a student logically supports a<br />
different answer you may need to give credit). For example, if an essay item is “What<br />
event in the 1950’s do you believe had the most impact on American Society? Support<br />
your answer with specific examples of the impact.” Notice, one student could say that<br />
the launching of Sputnik was the most important and support his/her answer, while<br />
another could say that the Brown vs. the Board of Education was the most important<br />
event and support that. In evaluating these types of essay questions, you must look<br />
carefully at the support provided. As can be seen, this is more subjective than other<br />
kinds of questions. Essay questions can be written in a more precise way that would<br />
exclude variety in the answers but that can also lower the cognitive level of the<br />
question. For example, an essay question that reads “Describe the impact of Brown vs.<br />
the Board of Education.” The result of this wording will lend itself to specific<br />
information without making the student evaluate events and then provide support for<br />
his/her evaluation of the events. The more open-ended questions, requires more<br />
thought on the student’s part than the second question.<br />
Course Grading<br />
Now that you have learned a bit about how to establish grading for assignments and create<br />
and grade tests, you need to look at the overall structure of grading for the course. When<br />
considering how to assign grades for a course you need to consider what the goals and<br />
objectives for the course are. First, the objectives should have been designed to allow students<br />
to meet the goal or goals for the course. If that is the case then establishing how to determine<br />
what gets the most weight in a course becomes easier. For example, in the example of<br />
assignments and grading from a syllabus for a graduate course in Educational Multimedia<br />
Development and Evaluation, you will notice that some of the assignments provide a<br />
foundation for the final assignment which is worth 50% of the grade. For some classes, you<br />
can provide students with choices for their assignments and let the students complete a<br />
contract (see Additional Resources for How to Develop Contracts). However, when using<br />
alternative assignments and contracts, make sure you are meeting the course objectives. The<br />
choices should be clearly defined on the syllabus and then individual contracts developed<br />
from those choices for the instructor and the student to sign.
Example of Information from Syllabus that informs students about assignments, testing, and<br />
grading policies.<br />
Activities:<br />
Class activities will include: lecture, large group discussion, small group discussion, group activities,<br />
hands-on activities, and individual activities.<br />
Assignments:<br />
Practice Multimedia Development Assignments (5% of your grade): You are expected to complete<br />
ALL parts of this assignment. You are expected to complete the following tasks to demonstrate that<br />
you have the skills needed by saving ALL of the files to a CD:<br />
• Audio work:<br />
o Create a voice file to e-mail to me<br />
o Create a digital file from the audio tape that I send you<br />
• Graphics work:<br />
o Graphic file made by scanning an image sent to you and edited by having the text “practice”<br />
added<br />
o Digital photo file made by you taking a picture of a person holding a sign with the current<br />
date on it (the date the picture is being taken)<br />
o A drawing file that you make which includes the following elements:<br />
freehand crooked line in red<br />
a square with a blue external line around it and yellow inside (yellow square with a blue a<br />
line around it).<br />
a green line circle (no fill color).<br />
A straight violet line<br />
Has Arial text in 12 point font<br />
• Animation work:<br />
o Create a gif animation file using Ulead animator using the the gif files: ani1.gif;<br />
ani2.gif; ani3.gif; and ani4.gif<br />
o Using the provided PowerPoint file animate:<br />
The text on the screen in two different ways<br />
Make each drawn object animate in different ways<br />
Include one sound effect<br />
• Video digitizing work:<br />
o Create a digital video file from the video tape provided. Add the title practice using a digital<br />
editing program (if you are familiar with a particular program use it - if not, you can<br />
download test editors from Ulead, Adobe, and others) .<br />
o Create a short video file using a digital video camera (you must have a handheld or posted<br />
sign that indicates the date the file is created). DO NOT edit in a date.<br />
Web Resource List (5% of your grade): Students will create a list of five useful web resources.<br />
The list must exhibit the following:<br />
o Be a Word Document with the filename: initials_web.doc (example: ksg_web.doc)<br />
o Put your name at the top of the document.<br />
o Create a table that looks like the following:<br />
Web-site name and address Web Address Description of the web-site and usefulness.<br />
One web-name<br />
In this cell you will describe the resource<br />
http://awebsite.address/index.html<br />
and why you think it is useful.<br />
Second web-name<br />
In this cell you will describe the resource<br />
http://awebsite.address/index.html<br />
and why you think it is useful.<br />
The others should follow the pattern of this table.<br />
Upload your completed document to the Provided Discussion Board in BlackBoard (Name of<br />
Discussion – Web Resources)so that your classmates can get the benefit of your research.<br />
91
Quizzes (10% of your grade) • Units 1 - 4 • Units 5 - 7 • Unit 10<br />
Short Literature Review Paper (15% of your grade): You may choose any topic related to<br />
multimedia in education. This can include: using multimedia in education in some way;<br />
developing different kinds of media for educational use; new developments in multimedia; and<br />
so forth. Note the following:<br />
• The Literature Review Rubric will be used to grade your paper. <strong>Download</strong>: litrev.doc from<br />
document sharing.<br />
• Paper should be 3 - 5 pages in length (this does not include the title page or the reference<br />
list page(s). (If you have three pages - you MUST have THREE FULL pages not 2 1/2).<br />
• You must have at least 10 references.<br />
• The references must include professional journals! You cannot use just web-based materials<br />
(see the Literature Review Rubric for the percent of web-sites allowed).<br />
Attendance (10% of your grade): Class activities and instruction will begin promptly at 6 p.m.<br />
Roll is taken at 6 p. m. Students who have complete attendance (you can miss or be late for one<br />
class) at the end of the semester earn 10%, those who have missed (or were late) two classes<br />
earn 8%, and those who missed 3 (or were late) classes earn 5%. Those who miss (or are late)<br />
more than 3 classes do not receive any credit for attendance.<br />
Evaluation of an Instructional Web-site (5% of your grade) - You will use the criteria established<br />
in the provided evaluation form. You will:<br />
• Choose one instructional web-site from one of the list at:<br />
http://www.ncat.edu/~student3/pt3/inweb.html<br />
• <strong>Download</strong> the evaluation form: filename - eval2.doc<br />
• Complete the evaluation form and save it to a file named yourintials_eval.doc (save on<br />
your course assignment CD)<br />
Final Project (50% of your grade): Students will complete a final multimedia/hypermedia<br />
project which will enable the students to demonstrate what was learned during the semester.<br />
Note the following information:<br />
• See Final Project Rubric.<br />
• You will include an instructional design plan.<br />
• You will create an instructional web-site that includes multimedia elements.<br />
• You will create a Lectora, Hyperstudio, Toolbook, PowerPoint, or other multimedia<br />
authoring tool instructional presentation that includes interactivity and multimedia<br />
elements.<br />
• You will write at least a one page reflection in which you explain the following:<br />
o What gave you problems when doing the project and how you addressed those problems.<br />
o How you have applied some of the theories explored in the course.<br />
You will save the whole project to a CD that will be handed in. The CD will NOT be returned to you.<br />
Evaluation:<br />
Grades are on a 4 point scale.<br />
3.8 – 4.0 = A (outstanding work that EXCEEDS criteria)<br />
3.0 – 3.79 = B (work meets all criteria)<br />
2.0 – 2.99 = C (work does not meet criteria adequately)<br />
Below 2.0 = F (work is substandard and inadequate to meet graduate standards)<br />
92
How to Calculate your own grade:<br />
Assignment Weight Total<br />
Practice<br />
Audio<br />
Average of the items<br />
Multimedia Grade:<br />
to the left X .05<br />
Development Graphics<br />
– Average Grade:<br />
of all sections<br />
Animation<br />
Grade:<br />
Video<br />
Grade:<br />
Web Resource List Grade X .05<br />
Quizzes –<br />
Quiz1<br />
Average of the quizzes<br />
Averages of all quizzes Grade:<br />
X .1<br />
Quiz 2<br />
Grade:<br />
Quiz 3<br />
Grade:<br />
Short Literature Review Grade X .15<br />
Attendance Grade X .1<br />
Evaluation of instructional web-site Grade X .05<br />
Final Project Grade X .5<br />
FINAL GRADE<br />
To determine final grade<br />
add all of the numbers in<br />
the far right column<br />
93<br />
Conclusion<br />
The assignment of grades needs to be systematic and adequately address the goals and objectives of the<br />
course. Keep in mind that all graded assignments and tests must strive to be valid, reliable, and without<br />
bias. In addition, a concerted effort must be made to grade each student fairly and objectively. In<br />
order to meet all of the demands of grading, one should think carefully about what will be assessed,<br />
how it will be assessed, and what weight the assessment should take in the course. By thinking about<br />
this and including the information in the syllabus, students are given specific information which helps<br />
them plan for wise time management and prepare for the course properly. The additional resources can<br />
be used to further develop skills for designing assessments that can be used to grade student learning.<br />
Additional Resources on Testing and Grading<br />
Astin, A. W., et al. (2003) 9 Principles of Good Practice for Assessing Student Learning. American<br />
Association of Higher Education http://www.aahe.org/assessment/principl.htm Retrieved:<br />
March 8, 2004. This web-site provides a list of principles for good assessment.<br />
Atherton, J. S. (2003). Learning and Teaching: Learning Contracts. UK.<br />
http://www.dmu.ac.uk/~jamesa/teaching/learning_contracts.htm. Retrieved: March 14, 2004.<br />
Bloom’s Taxonomy. (2003). Learning Skills Program. Counselling Services – <strong>University</strong> of Victoria.<br />
http://www.coun.uvic.ca/learn/program/hndouts/bloom.html Retrieved: March 8, 2004. This<br />
web-site provides information about Bloom’s Taxonomy, including verbs that can help indicate<br />
the level of test items and objectives.<br />
Codde, J. R. (1996). Using Learning Contracts in the College Classroom. Michigan <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>.<br />
http://www.msu.edu/user/coddejos/contract.htm Retrieved: March 14, 2004.<br />
Davis, B. G. (2002). Tools for Teaching: Quizzes, Tests, and Exams. <strong>University</strong> of California, Berkeley.<br />
http://teaching.berkeley.edu/bgd/quizzes.html Retrieved: March 10, 2004.
Grading – Linked with permission from the <strong>University</strong> of Delaware.<br />
Gronlund, N. E. (2003). Assessment of Student Achievement. 7th Ed. Boston: Allyn and Bacon.<br />
This book provides information about validity and reliability of assessments and detailed<br />
information about constructing assessments.<br />
High Plains Regional Technology in Education Consortium. (2003). Rubistar.<br />
http://rubistar.4teachers.org/index.php Retrieved March 12, 2004. This web-site helps<br />
you make rubrics to use for assessing student learning and assigning grades.<br />
Popham, W. J. (1995). Classroom Assessment: What Teachers Need to Know. 2nd Ed. Boston:<br />
Allyn and Bacon. This book provides information about validity and reliability of<br />
assessments and detailed information about constructing assessments.<br />
Testing – Linked with permission from the <strong>University</strong> of Delaware.<br />
Walvoord, B. E. and Anderson, V. J. (1998). Effective Grading: A Tool for Learning and<br />
Assessement. San Francisico: Jossey-Bass Publishers. This book addresses grading and<br />
assessment in higher education.<br />
94<br />
Evaluating Student Performance<br />
By Gloria M. Palma, Ph.D.<br />
Associate Professor<br />
Department of Human Performance and Leisure Studies,<br />
School of Education<br />
Evaluation is important to any systematic approach to learning, and should be aligned with<br />
instructional objectives and students’ expected progress. Measuring a student’s progress means<br />
that evaluation should be conducted in relation to the student’s own abilities without regard<br />
to gender, age, cultural status, or disability. In addition, evaluation can be formative<br />
or summative.<br />
Formative evaluation is an ongoing process and is conducted while corrections or improvements<br />
in student behaviors are still possible. For example, information from quizzes, peer assessment,<br />
and self-testing activities permit changes in the learning process while changes can still affect<br />
final performance. On the other hand, cumulative evaluation is focused on the extent to which<br />
a student has been successful in mastering specific learning objectives. This type of evaluation is<br />
usually conducted at the end of the instructional unit. The following measures are cited as<br />
evaluation tools that can be utilized to measure student progress and performance:<br />
• Systematic observation with the use of a checklist or a rating scale. This method is often used<br />
to observe a student’s expected behavior associated with attitudes, preferences, emotions,<br />
values, and interests.<br />
• Written tests to measure cognitive learning to provide a systematic assessment of the student’s<br />
expected academic progress. Examples of objective written tests are short-response questions<br />
such as true or false, multiple-choice, matching, fill-ins, short essay answers, and<br />
problem-solving questions.<br />
• Peer evaluation involving one or more peers evaluating the behavior of another student.<br />
Peers can use a checklist or a rating scale in this type of evaluation.<br />
• The use of portfolio as a form of authentic assessment is rapidly emerging because it does not<br />
only enhance teacher-students involvement in evaluation, but clearly shows the achievements<br />
of the students in relation to the course objectives.<br />
• Other authentic assessment tools that can be utilized in evaluating students’ progress include:<br />
Independent work contracts<br />
Student reflections<br />
Teacher’s anecdotal reports<br />
Task sheets<br />
Workbook pages, and<br />
Class projects
Additional Resources on Student Evaluation are Listed and/or Linked below with Permission<br />
by the Host Institution:<br />
Classroom Assessment Techniques: A Handbook for College Teachers. Angelo, Thomas A.,<br />
and K. Patricia Cross. 2nd ed. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass, 1988.<br />
95<br />
Commenting on Student Papers – Linked with permission from Schreyer Institute for Teaching<br />
Excellence at Pennsylvania <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>.<br />
Evaluating Student Learning – Linked with permission by the <strong>University</strong> of Washington,<br />
Center for Instructional Development & Research. Sub-topics also linked include:<br />
• Cheating or Plagiarism • Evaluation Methods • Grading<br />
Evaluating Student Performance - Linked with permission from the <strong>University</strong> of Georgia.<br />
Article begins at bottom of first page of linked PDF file.<br />
Evaluating What You've Done – Linked with permission from the <strong>University</strong> of California -<br />
Santa Barbara, Office of Instructional Development.<br />
Evaluating Your Students – Linked with permission from John Hopkins <strong>University</strong>.<br />
Testing and Grading: Assessing Student Performance – Linked with permission from Ohio<br />
<strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>.<br />
Keeping Records<br />
Keeping Records – Linked with permission from the <strong>University</strong> of Washington.<br />
Office Hours<br />
By Mrs. Susan M. Payne<br />
Research Assistant<br />
The School of Graduate Studies<br />
The GTA’s office hours are an important extension of the classroom. Most GTAs establish<br />
office hours, but students are not necessarily required to come in during those times. Usually<br />
office hours are scheduled before the semester begins and announced to the students at the first<br />
class session. One alternative is to check with the students about convenient times before<br />
establishing your office hours. Some professors may ask that you schedule your office hours at<br />
times that alternate with theirs, thus increasing the time that one or the other of you is available<br />
to students.<br />
How do you get students to come in? Let them know frequently that they are welcome. Invite<br />
them individually. A comment on a paper (e.g., “Please see me about this”) brings about a 75%<br />
response. Stress the importance and value of office visits both to you and to them. Most GTAs<br />
deal with freshmen and sophomores who are not yet use to personal contact with their<br />
instructors at the university. If those first few who come in have positive experiences, the word<br />
will spread.<br />
Some GTAs find that posting the answers to quizzes or homework problems on or around their<br />
doors is an effective means of attracting students to office hours. While many students may not<br />
take advantage of office hours, on occasion you may encounter those who are overly dependent<br />
on you either for assistance with course material or for companionship and counsel. It may be<br />
necessary to set limits with these students. You might ask them to try assignments on their own<br />
before coming to you for help.
96<br />
Getting students to come to your office hours is<br />
not always a problem. You may find that many<br />
students will come in, for many different reasons.<br />
You should be aware of ways to facilitate a<br />
helpful tutorial session:<br />
• Be approachable. The best thing to do when students come in to your office<br />
during hours is to make them feel welcome. It takes only a little bit of care to<br />
create a relaxed, pleasant atmosphere where communication is natural and easy.<br />
• Be Professional. After you have scheduled your office hours, keep them. Show<br />
up on time, and remain for the full office hour period. If you must make a<br />
cancellation, notify your students that you will not be in ahead of time.<br />
• Let the student tell you the purpose of their visit. You may suspect some<br />
hidden problem, but you should not press the student to disclose. You can help<br />
the students if they actively request it, but your responsibility need not extend<br />
further than responding to their requests.<br />
• Listen to your students. Give them your undivided attention. The best way to<br />
show that you are listening is to reflect their concerns in your own words. This<br />
also shows students that you find their concerns important. Students often fear<br />
that they are wasting your time. By listening attentively and responding<br />
thoughtfully, you can help allay their anxiety.<br />
• Don't be afraid to say, “I don't know, but I'll find out for you.” You should<br />
realize that you won't always be able to provide all the answers students may ask.<br />
• Be non-judgmental and try to see situations from the student's perspective.<br />
Work with students to achieve positive solutions.<br />
• Be aware of your own limitations. Refer serious problems beyond your<br />
expertise to the Counseling Services Department on campus at (336)334-7727<br />
or if the student is seriously depressed or emotional, walk with them to Room<br />
108 in Murphy Hall and stay with them until someone in Counseling Services<br />
can see them.
Advising Students<br />
By Rita Lamb, Ph.D.<br />
Director of<br />
The Center for Student Success<br />
97<br />
WHY ADVISING?<br />
Academic advising is an essential part of the educational<br />
process and an important aspect of the teaching and<br />
learning process. The primary function of advisors is to<br />
monitor closely the progress of their students while<br />
stressing to them their importance of accepting academic<br />
responsibility. Through proper advising, students are<br />
motivated to clarify values, set goals, establish priorities,<br />
develop management and leadership skills, and<br />
understand how the academic system works and their<br />
role in it.<br />
WHAT IS ADVISING?<br />
Advising is a developmental process that helps students<br />
clarify their life/career goals and to develop educational<br />
plans for realizing these goals. It is a decision-making<br />
process that helps students realize their maximum<br />
educational potential through communication and<br />
information exchange with an advisor.<br />
WHO ADVISES?<br />
At <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>, students are<br />
advised in their academic departments by faculty.<br />
Academic counselors advise undeclared students in<br />
The Center for Student Success.<br />
WHERE IS ADVISING DONE?<br />
Academic advising takes place in the academic<br />
departments of each school and college. Undeclared<br />
students receive advising in The Center for Student<br />
Success. Advising can also take place on-line.<br />
WHEN IS IT DONE?<br />
Academic advising is an ongoing process. Faculty<br />
advisors post office hours of times available for advising.<br />
Students may request appointments at other times as<br />
needed. On-line advising allows advisement during<br />
extended hours.<br />
HOW IS IT DONE?<br />
The Role of the Academic Advisor<br />
• Help students define and develop<br />
realistic career plans.<br />
• Assist students in planning a<br />
program consistent with their<br />
abilities and interests.<br />
• Monitor progress toward<br />
education/career goals.<br />
• Discuss and reinforce linkages and<br />
relationships between instructional<br />
program and occupation/career.<br />
• Interpret instructional policies,<br />
procedures, and requirements.<br />
• Perform designated educational<br />
transactions (e.g., schedule, drops<br />
and adds, etc.)<br />
• Maintain an advising file on each<br />
advisee.<br />
• Refer students when academic or<br />
other personal problems require<br />
intervention by other professionals.<br />
• Inform students of the nature of<br />
the advisor/advisee relationship.<br />
• Assist advisees in identifying<br />
advisor opportunities.<br />
• Develop a caring relationship<br />
with advisees.<br />
• Inform students of special<br />
services available to them for<br />
remediation, academic assistance,<br />
and other needs.<br />
• Refer to the NCA&TSU<br />
Comprehensive Academic<br />
Advising handbook for additional<br />
information.<br />
The advising methods implemented include Individual, Academic Course, Group, Computer<br />
and Self-Advising. It is multi-faceted and the responsibility of both student and advisor. The<br />
advisor serves as facilitator of communication, coordinator of learning experiences through<br />
course and career planning and program progress review, and agent of referral to other campus<br />
services as necessary. Academic advising is coordinated through The Center for Student Success.
Role of the TA as a Faculty/Student Liaison<br />
By Robin G. Liles, Ph.D.<br />
Assistant Professor, Department of Human Development and Services,<br />
School of Education<br />
98<br />
Woessner and his colleagues (2000) found that students<br />
generally prefer to seek academic guidance and advice from<br />
peers rather than professors. These findings are not entirely<br />
surprising in view of the long-held belief suggesting that a<br />
natural, perhaps even necessary, divide exists between<br />
students and senior faculty. In this respect, Graduate<br />
Teaching Assistants may find themselves uniquely poised to<br />
act as a liaison between undergraduate students and their<br />
senior faculty.<br />
Within the context of most graduate and professional<br />
programs, there is the expectation that graduate students<br />
should strive to develop skills and abilities which distinguish<br />
them as future professionals and educators (Landrum &<br />
Nelsen, 2002). Moreover, common wisdom suggests that<br />
teaching assistantships provide multiple opportunities for<br />
graduate students to experience and engage in activities<br />
important to professional preparation. Specifically, Graduate<br />
Teaching Assistants routinely observe senior faculty as they<br />
negotiate the demands and complexities of the larger academic<br />
structure, little of which the typical undergraduate student is<br />
likely to understand. Similarly, Graduate Teaching Assistants<br />
often view the academic plights of undergraduate students<br />
with empathy, which may accordingly “set the stage” for<br />
positive Graduate Teaching Assistants/student interaction.<br />
Undergraduate students vary in their abilities to<br />
communicate effectively with senior faculty (Kelly, Duran,<br />
& Zolten, 2001). Many reasons may exist to explain this<br />
variance. However, most educators would agree that student<br />
learning moves in a positive direction when the student<br />
perceives the teacher, instructor, or professor as both caring<br />
and approachable. Thus, encouraging effective communication<br />
between students and teaching personnel seems important.<br />
As a practical matter and as indicated above, it is reasonable<br />
to assume that Graduate Teaching Assistantss may<br />
experience fewer impediments to positive communication<br />
when interacting with undergraduate students and that this<br />
interpersonal advantage could translate into helping smooth<br />
and improve communication between undergraduate<br />
students and senior faculty. Facilitating positive<br />
communication is an important trait or characteristic of an<br />
academic liaison.<br />
Martin, Meyers, and Mottet (1999) suggested undergraduate<br />
students have five primary objectives when communicating<br />
with senior faculty. These student objectives include: (a)<br />
participation (or making evident that they understand course<br />
content); (b) relational (or showing they desire a more personal<br />
relationship with the instructor); (c) excuses (or<br />
explaining tardy work or disappointing test scores);<br />
(d) functional (or trying to improve their understanding of<br />
course content); and (e) sycophancy (or trying to get on the<br />
teacher’s “good side”). At first blush, these objectives may<br />
appear somewhat transparent, and largely set to serve the<br />
student in his or her academic pursuits. In other words,<br />
student concerns regarding the overall academic picture,<br />
including Graduate Teaching Assistants’ and senior faculty’s<br />
scholarly activities, as well as the university’s administrative<br />
responsibilities, appear under-represented, if not altogether<br />
absent, among the listed objectives. Nonetheless,<br />
professional educators, the rank and file of which Graduate<br />
Teaching Assistants aspire to join, cannot lose sight of one<br />
fundamental goal – to impart knowledge to the next<br />
generation of learners. As an academic liaison, Graduate<br />
Teaching Assistants can foster among students a better<br />
understanding of the over all academic picture, and<br />
engender among senior faculty a greater sensitivity to the<br />
developmental nuances of typical undergraduate behavior.<br />
In conclusion, university Graduate Teaching Assistants find<br />
themselves set upon a professional course designed to allow<br />
them full admission into academia. Accordingly, Graduate<br />
Teaching Assistants can realistically define their academic<br />
role as one which spans multiple academic arenas. Moving<br />
comfortably and fluidly among multiple academic arenas is<br />
the hallmark of the liaison’s role. Graduate Teaching<br />
Assistants are encouraged to utilize this exclusive role to<br />
facilitate the teaching and learning occurring between<br />
senior faculty and students, as well as to further their own<br />
personal and professional growth and development.<br />
References<br />
Kelly, L., Duran, R. L., & Zolten, J. J. (2001). The effect of reticence on college students’ use of electronic<br />
mail to communicate with faculty. Communication Education, 50, 170-176.<br />
Landrum, R. E., & Nelsen, L. R. (2002). The undergraduate research assistantship: an analysis of the benefits.<br />
Teaching of Psychology, 29, 15-19.<br />
Martin, M. M., Meyers, S. A., & Mottet, T. P. (1999). Students’ motives for communicating with<br />
their instructors. Communication Education, 48, 155-164.<br />
Woessner, R., Honold, M., Stehr, S. N., & Steidel, W. I. (2000). Support and faculty mentoring programmes<br />
for medical students in Germany, Switzerland, and Austria. Medical Education, 34, 480-482.
Additional information is available at:<br />
Serving as a Faculty/Student Liaison - Linked with permission from Iowa <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong> TA<br />
Handbook. (Scroll about half way down linked article to locate this section.)<br />
99<br />
Recommending ESL for International Teaching Assistants<br />
By Jason DePolo<br />
Lecturer<br />
Department of English,<br />
College of Arts and Sciences<br />
Introduction<br />
Language skills are essential to any individual placed in a teaching situation. The importance<br />
of these skills is amplified when the Graduate Teaching Assistant’s native language is not<br />
English. Concerns over pronunciation, speech clarity and volume, social interaction, and cultural<br />
awareness are only a few of the most important challenges the international Graduate Teaching<br />
Assistant will face. Developing sufficient English communication skills is a long and difficult<br />
process for ESOL learners. It is recommended that early on in an international Graduate<br />
Teaching Assistant’s program of study that he or she consider the proficiency at which English is<br />
used. The intention of this chapter is to outline the major concerns of international Graduate<br />
Teaching Assistants as well as suggest ways to improve communication in English.<br />
Cultural Awareness<br />
Awareness of the structure and diversity of the United <strong>State</strong>s’ education system is imperative.<br />
The educational system of the United <strong>State</strong>s drastically differs from learning institutions<br />
abroad. For example, students wishing to pursue higher education or vocational training are<br />
taught together in the same programs of study in most high schools unlike the specialized<br />
secondary training abroad. In addition, students often come from very diverse ethnic, cultural,<br />
sexual, age, and socio-economic backgrounds, which impact the way they learn, and<br />
consequently, how they are taught. It is very important to consider the cultural “make-up” of<br />
each class and approach instruction from diverse viewpoints. Three important classroom<br />
techniques exist that enable an instructor to be aware of student diversity and successfully<br />
meet the academic needs of the classroom community:<br />
Multiple Teaching Methods: By implementing various methods of instruction, the<br />
international Graduate Teaching Assistant can better address individual student learning<br />
needs. The learning styles of students have been, generally, categorized in three ways: visual,<br />
auditory, and kinesthetic. Visual learners are more successful when presented with material in<br />
texts, charts, graphics, and media. Auditory learners prefer oral explanations, lecturers, and<br />
even sound recordings. Kinesthetic learners need hands-on application of the material<br />
through explanations of how to apply the learned concepts or even physical manipulation of<br />
the lesson when possible. When these different approaches are used in the classroom, a<br />
greater number of students will actually learn the material.<br />
Student Interaction: Interaction should occur in the classroom in two ways: teacher/student<br />
and student/student. The international Graduate Teaching Assistant should be conscious that<br />
students not only learn from interaction with the instructor but also through in-class group<br />
work. A balance of these two types of interaction ensures diverse student needs are being<br />
addressed.<br />
Individual Student Needs: The international Graduate Teaching Assistant must be attentive<br />
to each student’s needs independent from the rest of the class. Regularly scheduling<br />
conferences and meeting office hours provides time for individual problems to be addressed.<br />
Because there is never enough time to adequately address all of the students’ needs during<br />
conferences or office hours, the IGTA needs to be aware of the various student support<br />
facilities available.
Classroom Communication<br />
Clear communication is essential. Undergraduates notice errors in pronunciation and grammar,<br />
which is often a concern for IGTA’s, and this can lead to classroom problems. Another issue is<br />
pacing. Pacing is the rate at which a teacher talks. If pronunciation and grammar are an issue,<br />
then the IGTA needs to speak slowly enough to allow comprehension to take place. The IGTA<br />
must be very careful that he or she is understood by the class. Comprehension can easily be<br />
checked by asking the class questions, analyzing the attentiveness of the class, and reviewing<br />
exams to check if an inordinate number of students are not grasping the material. If a problem<br />
does seem to exist that is rooted to the instructor’s English proficiency, the IGTA should seek help<br />
from on-line resources or the <strong>University</strong>’s ESOL program and lab. In addition, the IGTA should<br />
clearly outline on the board, or via overhead, the day’s lesson. This organizational strategy clearly<br />
provides students with a reference point that aids in comprehension.<br />
Conclusion<br />
Self-conscious teaching is the key to success for the International Graduate Teaching Assistant.<br />
Through monitored and careful practice, the ITA can meet diverse learner needs and even improve<br />
his or her proficiency in English. By presenting material in various ways to respond to individual<br />
learning styles, clarifying discussions with examples and illustrations, emphasizing and summarizing<br />
key ideas, and encouraging both teacher/student and student/student interaction, the international<br />
graduate teaching assistant can productively meet the needs of a diverse student body.<br />
100<br />
The Teacher - Student Relationship<br />
By Patricia Bethea-Whitfield, Ed.D.<br />
Rehabilitation Counseling Coordinator<br />
Department of Human Development and Services,<br />
School of Education<br />
The success of the teaching and learning process depends in large part on the relationship<br />
between the teacher and the student. While, the role of the teacher was once viewed as that of<br />
the impassive expert, today the teacher is more often viewed as facilitator and collaborator. Far<br />
from being a win-lose interaction, contemporary teaching sets up an academic partnership in<br />
which the teacher and student are each enriched by the presence and knowledge of the other.<br />
Consequently, the building of rapport is as important in teaching and learning as in any other<br />
relationship. From the outset, it will be necessary to accept the goodwill of the student<br />
recognizing that the student wants to achieve but may not have the skills or support to do so.<br />
Using the therapeutic principals of Rogers (1951), the teacher who demonstrates empathy,<br />
respect, and unconditional positive regard can create an atmosphere for growth and change.<br />
Empathy is an especially important part of healthy teacher-student relationships (Mendes, 2003).<br />
Being able to understand the student’s experience from his or her perspective requires the<br />
teacher to put away his/her judgments and value an issue because it is important to the student.<br />
To begin, identify the feeling the student is sharing and use it in a formula: ‘you feel ________<br />
because ____________’ (Egan, 2002).<br />
For example, “you feel frustrated because you do not have the background for this course”.<br />
Correctly identifying the feeling is a powerful connecting moment between two individuals but<br />
even if the first effort is not accurate, the student will perceive the caring of the teacher.<br />
To further understand the world of the student, teachers need an appreciation for diversity.<br />
Maintaining an open attitude to all students can help to create an environment for learning<br />
where students from different races, cultures and ethnic backgrounds can share and enrich the<br />
learning experience. This openness needs to extend to often neglected individual differences<br />
including age as in the case of non-traditional students, rural/urban backgrounds and<br />
socioeconomic status as well.<br />
Also, it is important to remember that while the classroom is an ideal place for students to voice<br />
their views, the teacher must remain the objective facilitator creating a level playing field for<br />
debate. It is never acceptable for students to attack or belittle other students. When the teacher
models an openness to diversity, students can learn to appreciate the diversity of peers at the<br />
university in preparation for the world of work later on.<br />
Along with student-centered teacher qualities, good listening is vital for the teacher-student<br />
relationship. First, remove the impediments to active listening such as being distracted or<br />
judgmental of the student. Secondly, do not jump to conclusions or generate premature<br />
solutions and thirdly, do not blame. ‘You’ statements generally are not effective. For example,<br />
‘you said you were going to come by yesterday. You kept me<br />
waiting’ communicates an attitude of blaming. Such a<br />
statement would rarely set the stage for productive dialog.<br />
Because what we do carries more weight than what we say,<br />
listening will be first reflected in our body language. Egan<br />
(2002) suggests a model for nonverbal communication,<br />
SOLER, which includes:<br />
☛ Relaxed<br />
Using these non-verbal cues can send a message that the student and his or her concerns are<br />
important. This attending is especially crucial because students often feel they are intruding by<br />
coming to the teacher’s office or desk after class. Never attempt to do several things at once or<br />
engage in any behavior that would make the student feel unvalued by your inattention. If you<br />
truly do not have time to meet, use good nonverbal responses as you say so and warmly invite<br />
the student to return when you will have the time to do your best listening.<br />
Ultimately, teachers who develop good rapport with their students may find themselves<br />
moving into a mentoring relationship as well. Mentoring occurs when professionals are willing<br />
to share their career experience and perspectives with students who are looking for direction.<br />
Sometimes mentoring takes the form of encouragement, information, advocacy or feedback<br />
that can help a student establish a career path. By investing in the mentoring relationship,<br />
mentors often find their lives enriched as well (Mullen, 2000). For further information on<br />
mentoring, see Adviser, Teacher, Role Model, Friend published by National Academy Press<br />
and available on the internet at http://www.nap.edu/readingroom/books/mentor/1.html.<br />
Finally, Egan (2002) makes the point that not all help is helpful. Despite the best efforts to<br />
develop quality relationships with students, conflicts can arise. Teachers do not help when they<br />
enable their students. In cases where a student refuses to accept responsibility for meeting<br />
deadlines or producing quality work, the teacher does not help who succumbs to requests for<br />
grade changes or accepts excessive absences and other manipulations. Learning how to<br />
confront without blaming can expedite the management of conflict. To achieve this, focus on<br />
the behavior, your reaction to the situation and what you want, avoiding the ‘you statement.’<br />
For example, “Ted, when you miss your appointment, I feel that you are not committed to your<br />
program. In the future, I will expect you to call if you cannot keep your appointment.” Helping<br />
students to accept responsibility for their choices helps to prepare them for learning and<br />
achieving in the classroom and beyond.<br />
References<br />
☛ Sitting square/facing the student<br />
and maintaining<br />
☛ Open posture (as opposed to<br />
crossed arms)<br />
☛ Leaning toward the other person<br />
and maintaining<br />
☛ Eye contact while remaining<br />
Egan, G. (2002). The Skilled Helper. Pacific Grove, CA: Brooks/Cole.<br />
Mendes, E. (2003). What empathy can do. Educational Leadership, 61(1), 56-60. Retreived<br />
February 24, 2004, from Academic Search Elite.<br />
Mullen, C.A. (2000). Constructing co-mentoring partnerships: Walkways we must travel.<br />
Theory Into Practice, 39(1), 4-12.<br />
Rogers, C. (1951). Client-Centered Therapy: Its current practice, implications, and theory. Boston:<br />
Houghton Mifflin.<br />
Additional information may be located at the following link:<br />
Managing Student/Teacher Conflicts - Linked with permission from <strong>University</strong> of Georgia -<br />
Handbook for Graduate TAs – Student-Teacher Conflicts Section.<br />
101
SECTION VIII<br />
Professional Development<br />
102<br />
Overview<br />
By Jason DePolo<br />
Lecturer<br />
Department of English, College of Arts and Sciences<br />
Graduate Teaching Assistants play a vital role at any university or college. It is a challenge<br />
often met with apprehension due to a lack of prior teaching experience. Primarily, the anxiety<br />
does not arise from questioning what to teach, but rather how to teach. However, teaching is a<br />
lifelong learning process. Both new and experienced teachers alike can grow and alleviate<br />
teaching anxiety through the simple practice of reflective teaching.<br />
Professional development constitutes activities generated by individual teachers, organizations,<br />
and schools that aid old and new teachers in learning current and effective ways to teach.<br />
Unfortunately, regular professional development opportunities are often not readily available<br />
when inexperienced teachers need them. The main focus of this section is to explore ways in<br />
which the Graduate Teaching Assistant can use the “self” as a source. Professional development,<br />
inherently, is the responsibility of the individual. As academics, new and old teachers possess<br />
the critical tools and insight necessary to invent new strategies and methods of teaching simply<br />
through self-reflection, or cognitively negotiating between what has been done and what could<br />
be done better. By reflecting on teaching, the Graduate Teaching Assistant can be involved<br />
directly in the constant pursuit of positively changing and tweaking his or her teaching methods.<br />
Reflective professional development can provide personalized, custom-designed, and self-directed<br />
insight into teaching ability and growth. This can be achieved through professional organization<br />
membership, teaching journals, case studies, audio/visual observation, and teaching portfolios.<br />
Professional Organization Membership<br />
By joining a professional organization, often at discounted student rates, Graduate Teaching<br />
Assistants can open themselves up to a world of development opportunities. The professional<br />
publications of these organizations provide insight into the theoretical and pedagogical<br />
practices of a discipline, as well as introduce the Graduate Teaching Assistant to the various<br />
positions on issues that impact the field. In addition, membership includes invitations to<br />
conferences and workshops that lead to new and effective teaching strategies. Each organization<br />
acts as a collective voice with outlets for advocacy of the profession, advanced education and<br />
training, theoretical and empirical foundations for learning, and standards of practice.<br />
Teaching Journals<br />
Journals are an integral part of the teaching reflection process. They record observations and<br />
changes in teaching perspective. Also, journals provide Graduate Teaching Assistants with an<br />
outlet to comment on lectures, class discussions, assignments, and concerns. Ideally, the<br />
reflective teaching journal should be designed dialogically. A group of Graduate Teaching<br />
Assistant in a given department would keep a teaching journal and then exchange the journals<br />
periodically to be responded to through actual writing in the journal by a colleague. This<br />
practice creates deeper perspectives of reflection as well as a community of teacher/learners.<br />
Case Studies<br />
Case studies aid in recognizing what other teachers are doing and provide insight into what the<br />
Graduate Teaching Assistant can do to improve his or her teaching. The Graduate Teaching<br />
Assistant selects an experienced teacher in the department and conducts a mini-ethnographic<br />
study of teaching practices. First, the Graduate Teaching Assistant interviews the experienced
teacher and transcribes responses to questions that give insight into the concerns, pedagogical<br />
and otherwise, what the Graduate Teaching Assistant deems significant. This can include questions<br />
dealing with the selected teacher’s own early teaching experiences, evaluation procedures, and<br />
classroom management strategies. The GTA then collects archival material, such as syllabi,<br />
course calendars, assignment descriptions, and sample student work. Next, the student observes<br />
the instructor in the class room and documents techniques and student reactions. Finally, the<br />
Graduate Teaching Assistant writes the case study, describing and evaluating the teacher’s practices<br />
and theoretical viewpoints. Ultimately, the student gains a clearer sense of what an experienced<br />
teacher does and how hose strategies and methods can be applied to his or her own teaching.<br />
Audio/Video Observation<br />
One of the most overlooked strategies of self-initiated professional development is revealing<br />
what actually goes on in the Graduate Teaching Assistant’s classroom with the objective use of<br />
video and audio tape. By videotaping or tape recording a series of classes, the Graduate Teacher<br />
Assistant can observe first-hand those things he or she does well and those that need improvement.<br />
For example, the Graduate Teaching Assistant may observe the fact that he or she does not<br />
circulate around the classroom, use a clear and projected voice, acknowledge a variety of<br />
student volunteered responses, or effectively use board space. This type of observation provides<br />
insight into other wise unconscious teaching habits.<br />
Teaching Portfolios<br />
Like journals, teaching portfolios provide the Graduate Teaching Assistant with documentation<br />
for reflection and revision. In addition, if the Graduate Teaching Assistant plans on a professional<br />
career in teaching, hiring universities commonly require teaching portfolios as part of the job<br />
application process. Simply put, the teaching portfolio is a structured collection of information<br />
about a teacher’s practice in the classroom. It should include the following:<br />
103<br />
• Teaching philosophy<br />
• Details of courses taught<br />
• Peer observation notes/evaluations<br />
• Feedback from learners<br />
• Examples of student work<br />
• Teaching materials, such as<br />
handouts, assignments, and exams<br />
with written explanations of their<br />
content and function<br />
• Teacher writing samples<br />
The teaching portfolio allows the Graduate Teaching Assistant to examine what is done in the<br />
classroom, what isn’t, and what should be done to ensure students’ needs are being met.<br />
Reflective teaching improves a Graduate Teaching Assistant’s awareness of what is actually going<br />
on in the classroom, how it can be better approached, and how it can be improved. It opens up<br />
his or her mind to the possibility of change. Finally, it is through change that professional<br />
development and intellectual growth occur.<br />
The following sub-sections provide additional information on resources and services to aid you<br />
in incorporating reflective practice into your own teaching experiences.<br />
Additional Information on Professional Development for GTAs:<br />
Professional Development of GTAs in the United <strong>State</strong>s – linked from Learning and Teaching<br />
Support Network.
Reflective Practice<br />
By Patrice J. Faison, M. Ed, NBCT<br />
Clinical Faculty<br />
Department of Curriculum and Instruction,<br />
School of Education<br />
104<br />
Today education is in dire need of reform. Educational reform has to begin with changing how<br />
we prepare our teachers. In shifting the way we prepare teachers for professional practice, we<br />
enable our students to confront, shift, and/or refine the beliefs, knowledge, values, and<br />
assumptions that form their personal theories about teaching and learning (Abell, Anderson,<br />
and Bryan). Reflection helps beginning teachers untangle the web of deeply entrenched<br />
personal theories about teaching and learning.<br />
Prospective teachers no longer view teaching as a predetermined set of rules or “bag of tricks”<br />
to apply to any given classroom situation, but as a practice which is grounded in a system of<br />
values, theories, and practice (Schon, 1983). Reflective Practice is one of the major changes<br />
we must make and will be briefly discussed in this section.<br />
For the purpose heretofore, reflective practice will be defined as ‘thinking about and learning<br />
from one’s own practice.’ It can involve talking and keeping a journal, but always involves<br />
thinking and acting. Furthermore, from thinking and acting, the teacher is able to experiment<br />
with solutions to problems of one’s practice and examine the consequences and implications.<br />
From this talking and journal keeping, questions are being developed as to the importance<br />
and the effectiveness of the learning experience. The practitioner is also thinking about the<br />
effect on student learning and the significance of the activity to impact student learning.<br />
Steps to Becoming a Reflective Practitioner<br />
Reflective practice begins with framing issues of classroom practice and specific experiences in<br />
one’s own practice. One must begin to question and examine passionately held ideas and<br />
assumptions about their teaching. This will assist in developing and communicating the<br />
rationale that underlies teaching strategies that are implemented.<br />
In addition to questioning and examining oneself, others can assist in<br />
the reflective process. Students can be of a huge assistance with the<br />
reflection process. It is imperative to know if the information you are<br />
intending to convey is opaque or confusing to students. There are<br />
varieties of ways feedback can be gathered from students:<br />
•Journaling<br />
•Discussion<br />
•Surveys<br />
•Observation<br />
These methods can be used concurrently and should be ongoing and permanent in the<br />
reflection process. Another factor that can play an important part in becoming an effective<br />
reflective practitioner is contribution from colleagues. Colleagues can assist by observation and<br />
thoughtful conversations, and providing help with aspects of your practice that you may not be<br />
aware. They can also suggest strategies to address particular situations.<br />
By becoming a reflective practitioner, educators will enhance their teaching success and, in<br />
turn, help repair our educational system.<br />
References:<br />
Schon, D.A.(1987).Educating the reflective practitioner: Toward a new design for teaching<br />
and learning in the professions. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.<br />
Abell, S.K., Cennamo, K.S., Anderson, M.A., Bryan, L.A. Coaching Reflective Practice<br />
Among PreService Elementary Science Teachers.<br />
http://www.ed.psu.edu/CI/Journals/96pap27.htm
Student Surveys<br />
By Therese Coon<br />
GTA at N. C. A&T<br />
<strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong><br />
105<br />
Graduate Teaching Assistants are practitioners<br />
who should continually evaluate the effects of<br />
his or her choices and actions on others<br />
(students, faculty, and other professionals in the<br />
learning community) and actively seek out<br />
opportunities to grow professionally. One way to<br />
evaluate your teaching is to seek feedback from<br />
the students you teach. Many GTAs provide a<br />
form for student feedback during and/or at the<br />
end of the semester. A couple of examples are<br />
provided for you as a guide, as well as a link to a<br />
web-site where you can create customized course<br />
evaluations on-line.<br />
The first is a survey designed and utilized by Therese<br />
Coon. As you can see, she precedes the survey with<br />
a brief note of instruction to the students.
Survey A<br />
From:<br />
106<br />
To: Course: Semester:<br />
Date:<br />
Re: Course Evaluation and Recommendations<br />
Thank you for making my first semester as a graduate teaching assistant, and student, an interesting experience!<br />
I have enjoyed meeting you and working with you throughout the semester. Your response to this survey will<br />
help me understand what to keep and what to change to improve the course.<br />
Thank you for taking the time to complete this questionnaire. Please return in to me by _____________________<br />
either directly or to my mailbox ______________________________.<br />
1. What was the most useful thing you learned this semester?<br />
2. What was the least useful thing you learned this semester?<br />
3. What would you prefer to see changed about this course?<br />
4. What would you keep in this course?<br />
5. To take advantage of the career fair timing, I pulled up Chapter 7 (The Job Search) and parts of<br />
Chapter 6 (Letters) to the front of the schedule. Was this effective for you?<br />
6. The papers, presentation, and final exam made up ~75% of the grade and due dates all fell in last<br />
part of semester. Would you recommend spacing these out differently? If so, how?<br />
7. Was lab time useful to you? Were the lab assignments (few) helpful? How would you recommend<br />
lab time be worked into the course?<br />
8. I am considering contracting with students for grades. For example, students would need to<br />
complete up to 800 pts worth of work. This could be done by homework assignments, class<br />
assignments, some number of projects, and mid-term/final exams. The total available work would<br />
be worth more than 800 pts. What do you think about this option? Have you experienced this<br />
type of grading in other courses?<br />
9. Would you prefer to see more group work or more individual work in this course? Why?<br />
10. What are your thoughts on the use of the various presentation materials used this semester?<br />
Overheads: use more use less about right<br />
PowerPoint: use more use less about right<br />
Handouts: too many too few about right<br />
Lecture: too much too little about right<br />
In-class work: too much too little about right<br />
Lab time: too much too little about right<br />
Guest speakers -<br />
(campus/industry): too much too little about right<br />
Do you have comments about any of these materials? Are there materials or teaching aids that you<br />
recommend that may communicate this material more effectively?<br />
11. What would have helped you prepare better for the major documents?<br />
12. Any facility suggestions you may have?<br />
13. Any other recommendations or ideas that I may not have asked about?
Another survey sample, reprinted from a newsletter at the <strong>University</strong> of California-Los<br />
Angeles, is included as an appendix item in the Iowa <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong> TA Handbook (linked<br />
with permission from Iowa <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>.) You may want to tailor the evaluation to your<br />
circumstances and the aspects of your teaching on which you want students to comment.<br />
Instead of a numerical rating, you may prefer a more informal survey to collect student<br />
suggestions and opinions.<br />
107<br />
You are encouraged to use this format or design your own at Customized Course Evaluations<br />
that addresses the elements of the particular course(s) you are teaching.<br />
While most professors distribute a standard Student Opinion Form to students at the end of<br />
each semester to gather feedback, this data is not always compiled and available to the GTA in<br />
a time frame that allows them to use the feedback for the very next course they teach. By<br />
providing your own survey tool in addition to the standard university form, you will be able to<br />
study the feedback immediately and determine what aspects of the course and/or your teaching<br />
need to be fine-tuned before the next semester begins.<br />
Additional resources on reflective practice for Graduate Teaching Assistants are available<br />
by clicking on the links below.<br />
Assessing and Improving Your Teaching – <strong>University</strong> of Washington, Center for Instructional<br />
Development & Research. Sub-topics include:<br />
•Student Ratings<br />
• Teaching Portfolio<br />
•Peer Observation<br />
• Four Elements of Effective Teaching<br />
•Faculty Observation<br />
Feedback from your Students - Linked with permission from Iowa <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>.<br />
(Scroll down about 9/10 of the way through the linked article to locate this section.)<br />
Growth as a Teacher – Ohio <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>.<br />
Journaling – Inspiring Teachers Publishing, Inc.<br />
Professional Reflective Journaling – Patricia E. Eagle<br />
Student Surveys of Teaching – Murdoch <strong>University</strong>
Instructional Support and Services<br />
What’s offered at NC A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong><br />
The School of Graduate Studies offers several workshops each semester designed to prepare<br />
graduate students to enter academic or research careers. Funding for the workshops is provided by<br />
the Student Retention and Transition (STAR) Program, which is supported by a grant from the<br />
National Science Foundation. Previous topics included:<br />
“The Teaching Process: A Study in an Active<br />
Learning Environment”<br />
“Conducting the Class”<br />
“Discussion Class Guidelines”<br />
“Lecture Class Guidelines”<br />
Department Training and Resources<br />
“Using Technology to Support Pedagogy”<br />
“Using Your Voice Effectively”<br />
“Practice Teaching Session”<br />
“Creating a Teaching Portfolio”<br />
Many departments schedule orientation and training activities for new Graduate Teaching Assistants<br />
and/or faculty. In some cases, this orientation involves several days of meetings, interviews, and<br />
information sessions. Most of these orientation sessions – which may run for an afternoon or for<br />
several days – take place at the beginning of the fall term. Contact your department about<br />
orientation and training possibilities available to you.<br />
Your primary contacts as a Graduate Teaching Assistant will be with the department that has<br />
hired you. As a member of the teaching staff of the department, you will find your departmental<br />
office to be a major source of advice and assistance.<br />
In most departments, one person serves as the primary adviser for graduate students. In small<br />
departments, the chair may handle this function. Elsewhere, another faculty member may be primarily<br />
responsible for orienting new graduate students, answering their questions, and<br />
getting them started on the process of finding suitable major professors. The department’s Director<br />
of Graduate Education may serve as the primary contact person for general questions relating to<br />
assistantships. Another faculty member may serve as supervisor for the course in which you have<br />
been assigned a role as one of the GTAs (in most instances GTAs are, in fact as well as in name,<br />
assistants to professors in classrooms and laboratories). A member of the<br />
clerical staff may handle classroom or supply allocations.<br />
108<br />
Developing a good working relationship with all of these departmental faculty and staff<br />
members is an important factor in a productive and pleasant graduate experience.<br />
Additional Campus Resources<br />
Academy for Teaching and Learning<br />
Promotes teaching excellence and the scholarship of teaching and learning, by integrating new<br />
technologies into instruction and adopting multimedia resources to create, support, and manage a<br />
responsive learning community.<br />
Provides leadership in coordinating and distributing technical support services and resources<br />
for sound pedagogical practices enhanced by the latest wireless classroom lab,<br />
teleconferencing, videoconferencing, and multimedia technologies.<br />
Conducts workshops and holds think share sessions to support pedagogic activities<br />
• Instructional enhancement (Teaching and<br />
Learning with Technology)<br />
• Professional and personal development<br />
•Technology accessibility and infusion<br />
• Assessment and evaluation assistance<br />
• Leadership development for professional<br />
growth<br />
• Scholarly exchange of works<br />
• Grant writing and reporting<br />
• Collaborations and partnerships<br />
• Recognition and reward system<br />
•Research initiatives<br />
• Development of innovative works
Campus Media Centers<br />
• Academy for Teaching and Learning<br />
(Bluford Library-Lower Level)<br />
o On-line course delivery faculty development<br />
and training<br />
o Laptops, projectors, and electronic devices for<br />
faculty use and training<br />
o Arranging and coordinating videoconferences and<br />
other Web cast programs for academic departments<br />
o Conducting special workshops on technology<br />
and pedagogy<br />
o Training faculty and staff on basic computer<br />
skills and software usage<br />
o Coordinating and delivering campus-wide media<br />
services including video production, audio<br />
recording, computer, and multimedia<br />
applications<br />
• Center for Distance Learning<br />
(1020 Wendover Avenue 2nd Floor)<br />
o Electronically equipped wireless room for<br />
professional meetings, small classes, seminars,<br />
and presentations<br />
o Videoconferencing, and teleconferencing<br />
o Coordinate and implement distance learning<br />
activities<br />
Professional Development Center:<br />
• Crosby Hall (College of Arts and Sciences)<br />
o Video and audio production<br />
o Visual communications<br />
o Instructional television<br />
o Media streaming (audio and video no the Web)<br />
• McNair Hall (College of Engineering)<br />
o eleconferencing<br />
o Videoconferencing<br />
o Interactive/Web cast classroom<br />
• Smith Hall (School of Technology)<br />
o Video and teleconferencing<br />
o Distance Learning/Digital Communication<br />
Networks<br />
o ISDN videoconferencing (High speed video via<br />
telephone lines)<br />
o IP videoconferencing (Internet)<br />
o Direct satellite and cable television programs<br />
•Webb Hall (School of Agriculture)<br />
o Satellite links<br />
o Video services<br />
o Photography<br />
109<br />
• Offers professional developmental workshops<br />
• If you need information regarding workshops and any additional information on what<br />
services are offered please contact:<br />
Dr. Muktha B. Jost<br />
Professional Development Center<br />
2105 Yanceyville Street (336) 275-2060 ext. 3027<br />
Bluford Library:<br />
Instructional Resources:<br />
• Course Related Instruction<br />
• Consultation of Faculty and Librarian over<br />
Library Assignments<br />
• Bluford Individualized Instruction Program<br />
• Interactive Tutorial<br />
• Printed Materials (Guides, Handouts, etc.)<br />
•Walk-In/Point-of-Use Instruction<br />
• Archives on 2nd Floor<br />
• Interlibrary Loan – Service provides for<br />
GTAs and Faculty. Books and articles can<br />
be delivered to Library from other locations.<br />
• Collection Management – Can request the<br />
purchase of material from workshops to be<br />
cataloged and available in library for use.<br />
Virtual Reference Service<br />
NC Knows is a project, still in its testing phase, to provide chat-based virtual reference services in<br />
libraries throughout the state. It is staffed by librarians from various libraries in and outside of the state,<br />
who are on call to chat with and assist you regarding your research needs. You will not necessarily be<br />
speaking to an A&T librarian.<br />
Clicking on the NC Knows banner will take you to the NC Knows page, where you can learn more about<br />
the service, its purpose, and its limitations. Then log in and chat with a librarian to try out the service.<br />
Learning Resources Center:<br />
• If you need information regarding workshops and any additional information on what services<br />
are offered please contact:<br />
Dr. Muktha B. Jost<br />
Professional Development Center<br />
2105 Yanceyville Street (336) 275-2060 ext. 3027
Counseling Services:<br />
• Assists GTAs and faculty with seminars, study workshops, presentation preparation<br />
• Assists with Career Development<br />
110<br />
Further Reading for Professional Development<br />
For more information on teaching and instructional support, locate the following resources at<br />
the campus library or local public library or click on the link (if provided) for Internet access:<br />
Active Learning on the World Wide Web, link provided by San Diego <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>.<br />
Andrews, J. D. W. (Ed.). (1985). Strengthening the teaching assistant faculty. New Directions for<br />
Teaching and Learning, No. 22. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.<br />
Belenky, M. F., Clichy, B. M., Goldberger, N. R., & Tarule, J. M. (1986). Women's ways of knowing:<br />
The Development of Self, Voice, and Mind. New York: Basic Books.<br />
Bess, J. L. (1973). Integrating faculty and student life styles. Review of Educationa Research, 43, 377-403.<br />
Classroom Assessment Techniques, link provided by Southern Illinois <strong>University</strong>.<br />
Cones, J. H., III, Noonan, J. F., & Janha, D. (Eds.). (1983). Teaching Minority Students. New Directions<br />
for Teaching and Learning, No. 16. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.<br />
Davis, Barbara Gross. (1993). Tools for Teaching. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.<br />
Educational Icebreakers, link provided by ABOUT.com.<br />
Erickson, B. L., & Strommer, D. W. (1991). Teaching College Freshmen. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass<br />
Fink, L. D. (1984). The first year of college teaching. New Directions for Teaching and Learning.<br />
No. 17. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.<br />
Kamarovsky, M. (1985). Women in College: Shaping New Feminine Identities. New York: Basic Books.<br />
McKeachie, Wilbert. (1999). Teaching Tips: Strategies, Research, and Theory for College and<br />
<strong>University</strong> Teachers, 10th ed. Boston: Houghton Mifflin.<br />
Nyquist, J. D., Abbott, R. D., & Wulff, D. H. (1991). Preparing the Professoriate of Tomorrow to Teach:<br />
Selected Readings in TA Training. Dubuque, IA: Kendall-Hunt.<br />
Pascarella, E. T. Student-faculty informal contact and college outcomes. Review of Educational<br />
Research, 50, 545-595.<br />
Perry, W. G. (1970). Forms of Intellectual and Social Development in the College Years: A Scheme.<br />
New York: Holt, Rinehart, & Winston.<br />
Robinson, G. M., & Moulton, J. (1985). Ethical Problems in Higher Education. Englewood Cliffs, NJ:<br />
Prentice-Hall.<br />
Contact Information for Professional Development<br />
The links below provide information on publications and/or organizations in the field of<br />
higher education.<br />
American Association for Higher Education<br />
Carnegie Foundation for the Advancement of<br />
Teaching<br />
The National Council for Staff, Program, and<br />
Organizational Development<br />
The National Teaching and Learning Forum<br />
POD Network- Professional and Organizational<br />
Development Network in Higher Education<br />
Society for Teaching and Learning in Higher<br />
Education<br />
Syllabus: Education Technology for Higher<br />
Education<br />
The Teaching Professor Newsletter, published by<br />
Magna Publications ten times per year.<br />
Tomorrow's Professor, a product of Stanford<br />
<strong>University</strong>’s Learning Laboratory.<br />
<strong>University</strong> Business.com<br />
World Lecture Hall, a product of the <strong>University</strong><br />
of Texas at Austin.
Preparing the Professional Portfolio<br />
By Karen D. Guy, Director, Ph.D.<br />
Department of Curriculum and Instruction,<br />
School of Education<br />
and Thurman N. Guy, Ph.D.<br />
Associate Professor<br />
School of Agriculture and Environmental Sciences<br />
111<br />
To compete in the 21st century, institutions of higher education, businesses, and special career<br />
organizations at the national and international levels are seeking the best-qualified graduate<br />
students for their programs and for employment. As graduate students compete in school and in<br />
the work force, the need to showcase one’s intellectual capital and professional capabilities<br />
through authentic means has become a challenge for many. However, one trend used in assessing<br />
and evaluating one’s present intellectual capital and capabilities is the professional portfolio.<br />
In higher education, noting the need for assessment and evaluation changes, research has<br />
reported strong use of the professional portfolio as a maverick approach in charting graduate<br />
students professional and personal goals and development. This article describes the professional<br />
portfolio for graduate students in the developing phase, organizing phase, and the collecting<br />
phase. In addition to this discussion, a list of suggested categories are described when preparing<br />
a professional portfolio.<br />
The professional portfolio is simply defined as an organized selective descriptive story or a<br />
profile presentation that documents the achievement of an individual’s professional goals<br />
describing knowledge, skills, and dispositions in a specialized career area. A professional<br />
portfolio documents the professional goals and growth developed over time to showcase the<br />
accomplishments of an individual (Kilbane and Milman, 2003). Most importantly, the<br />
professional portfolio provides graduate students the opportunities to have time to reflect<br />
and refine their professional and personal experiences by charting their own growth<br />
and development.<br />
Developing a professional portfolio<br />
Many graduate schools and businesses across the nation are requesting students to submit a<br />
professional portfolio with their application as an additional supportive documentation before<br />
or during the interview session. The professional portfolio illustrates diverse examples of your<br />
professional and personal growth over an extended period of time during your studies. A welldeveloped<br />
professional portfolio presents the reader with authentic evidence of one’s overall<br />
development that reflects professional and personal goals and objectives. Equally important,<br />
key benefits in preparing a professional portfolio include fostering self-assessment, opportunities<br />
for personal reflections, and developing a tool for future collaboration experiences.<br />
Organizing a professional portfolio<br />
Organizing your professional portfolio in a goal driven manner demonstrates the expected<br />
knowledge, skills, and dispositions that you bring to graduate school or the work force. In<br />
organizing the portfolio, develop comprehensive professional and personal goal statements from<br />
one to five years. In addition, the organization of the portfolio should address the competencies<br />
and/or standards of an individual’s discipline. According to Campbell, Cignetti, Melenyzer,<br />
Nettles, and Wyman (2001), “Regardless of the goals or standards chosen, everything collected<br />
for your portfolio should be organized around the chosen goal statements” (p.4). Therefore, the<br />
artifacts/evidences selected should demonstrate ones ability to be effective in their chosen<br />
discipline. Listed below are key tips for organizing a professional portfolio:<br />
<br />
<br />
Use a quality leather binder for the best looking professional portfolio. A leather binder is<br />
an excellent choice for organizing information that can be added or deleted with dividers<br />
to separate each section.<br />
Use quality paper and section sheets or tabs throughout the portfolio to organize the<br />
information in a professional manner.
Use appropriate fonts, art designs, and other special features for a high quality looking<br />
professional portfolio that is free of all spelling and grammatical errors.<br />
Use photographs, newspaper articles, illustrations, charts, graphs, web citations, and<br />
PowerPoint to display your professional and personal goals and objectives.<br />
Use data, audio and video information to enhance your professional portfolio.<br />
Collecting materials for a professional portfolio<br />
In developing a professional portfolio, various kinds of artifacts or sample evidences of a<br />
student’s work should be collected to illustrate the story presentation or profile plan of an<br />
individual. Such artifacts or samples of work of an individual’s actual performance are presented<br />
through: (1) authentic artifacts of work demonstrated, (2) samples or completed work in<br />
progress, and (3) reflective commentaries with evidence of supportive documentation that an<br />
individual acquired during graduate studies or employment.<br />
112<br />
Diverse documentation from the three sources should be collected, organized, and presented in<br />
a professional manner in a hard copy (paper) document and/or electronic delivery mechanism.<br />
A professional portfolio should not be an exhaustive sample of everything you have<br />
accomplished, but a selective body of documents that are diverse and valued-added that<br />
supports your specialized career path. The following categories may be included in your<br />
professional portfolio:<br />
•Title page<br />
•Table of Contents<br />
• Copy of resume or vita<br />
• Biographical sketch<br />
• Copy of transcripts<br />
•National test results that demonstrate<br />
competencies in a specialized area of study<br />
• Letter of application(s) for employment or<br />
graduate school<br />
• Philosophy summary or a short narrative<br />
related to a specialized area of study<br />
• Professional development plan with goals<br />
and vision statements<br />
• Summary of career professional and<br />
personal milestones<br />
• Special recognitions of achievements<br />
including awards, honors, certificates,<br />
and letters<br />
•Video and audio work samples<br />
• Demonstration of technology skills<br />
• Professional memberships including<br />
leadership positions<br />
• Professional development conferences,<br />
workshops, and meetings participation<br />
and attendance<br />
• Research competition activities<br />
• Scholarly and reflective papers<br />
• Patents and trademarks<br />
• Blueprints, technical drawing, and<br />
illustrations<br />
•Volunteer work or service learning<br />
experiences<br />
• Internships and field-based experiences<br />
• Publications including electronic media<br />
•Work-in progress activities (article, book,<br />
presentation, etc.)<br />
• Recommendations and/or appointments<br />
letters<br />
• Professional reading list for the last two<br />
years<br />
The professional portfolio is an internal picture of you, a snapshot of you professionally and<br />
personally. The final product should be presented accurately, illustrating your knowledge, skills,<br />
and dispositions in a manner that provides positive insight into your past and present<br />
experiences. As a graduate student, this document will be a valuable resource over time for<br />
self-growth, assessment and evaluation purposes, and employment opportunities.
References:<br />
Campbell, D. M., Cignetti, P. B., Melenyzer, B. J., Nettles, D. H., & Wyman, R.M. (2001).<br />
How to Develop a Professional Portfolio: A Manual for Teachers. Needham Heights,<br />
MA: Allyn & Bacon. (p.4).<br />
113<br />
Kilbane, C. R., & Milman, N. B. (2003). The Digital Teaching Portfolio Handbook: A How-<br />
To Guide for Educators. Boston, MA: Allyn and Beacon.<br />
Below are links to several resources to assist in planning and developing your own portfolio.<br />
These links have been provided with permission granted by the host institution:<br />
“Creating a Teaching Portfolio,” (This PDF file is a workbook of activities to get you started on<br />
a teaching portfolio.) Teresa Dawson, Office of Teaching Advancement, <strong>University</strong> of<br />
Toronto at Scarborough, Canada.<br />
“Designing a Teaching Portfolio,” (This file asks questions to help you get started on a teaching<br />
portfolio.) Center for Excellence in Learning and Teaching, Pennsylvania <strong>State</strong><br />
<strong>University</strong>.<br />
Developing a Teaching Portfolio. Linked with permission from the Center for Teaching<br />
Excellence at Iowa <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong> (Scroll down to Section 5)<br />
How To Produce a Teaching Portfolio. Seldin, Peter. “The Teaching Portfolio – A Practical<br />
guide to improved performance and promotion/tenure decisions.” Bolton, MA: Anker<br />
Publishing Company, Inc. 1991.<br />
“Preparing a Teaching Portfolio: A Guidebook,” The Center for Teaching Effectiveness, The<br />
<strong>University</strong> of Texas at Austin.<br />
“Recommended Portfolio Contents,” Center for Teaching Excellence, Iowa <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>.
SECTION IX<br />
114<br />
<strong>University</strong> Policies and Procedures related to GTAs<br />
GRADUATE ASSISTANTSHIP ADMINISTRATION POLICY<br />
Dated 8/17/00<br />
Graduate Assistants (GAs) are afforded the opportunity to function both as students and as<br />
professionals, thereby, enhancing the quality of their education through this dual role. They<br />
complement students toward their degrees with teaching, research or administrative work,<br />
under the supervision of faculty or staff.<br />
The demands of this dual role requires them to have a clear understanding of the requirements,<br />
responsibilities, and privileges of their positions. This document is designed to provide basic,<br />
yet comprehensive, information regarding graduate assistantships at <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong><br />
Agricultural and Technical <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>.<br />
Graduate Assistants at <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> Agricultural and Technical <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong><br />
Graduate assistants at A&T, like their counterparts at other colleges and universities, play a<br />
dual role functioning both as students and professionals. While meeting the academic<br />
requirements of an academic degree, or serving in research, administrative, or teaching<br />
capacities, the graduate assistant works under the supervision of a mentor (faculty or staff<br />
member). Maintaining a clear understanding of this unusual position and becoming familiar<br />
with the requirements and responsibilities to be met both as a student and a professional pose<br />
a unique and difficult challenge for the graduate student. Thus, the graduate student must<br />
become aware of the academic regulations of the School of Graduate Studies at A&T and of<br />
any other specific requirements of his/her academic department. By understanding their role in<br />
the overall function of the university, graduate assistants may meet, more adequately, the<br />
demands of the graduate school and function more confidently as graduate students.<br />
Purpose<br />
A graduate student’s principle objective is to earn a graduate degree. Appointment as a graduate<br />
assistant contributes to that objective by providing an apprenticeship experience along with<br />
financial support. This apprenticeship complements formal instruction and gives the student<br />
practical and personal experience than can only be gained by performing instruction, research,<br />
and administrative activities. Rather than interfere or conflict with the graduate student’s<br />
educational objectives, the assistantship is to aid in the successful completion of the degree<br />
program. To this end, graduate assistants should be given assignment and supervision that will<br />
help them grow professionally. Their responsibilities and formal instruction should reinforce<br />
each other. Research projects should lead to a thesis or dissertation. Teaching should give greater<br />
insight into their own performance as students. The mentor relationship is extremely vital in<br />
achieving this type of integration. Careful planning and valuation will provide both the<br />
university and the graduate student a beneficial relationship.<br />
Graduate Assistantships<br />
A Graduate Assistant (GA) is a general term meaning a graduate student enrolled and<br />
employed by A&T to assist a faculty member or staff member in the area of administration,<br />
research or teaching.<br />
A graduate assistant may fall into one of the following categories:<br />
Graduate Administrative Assistant (GAA)<br />
A Graduate Administrative Assistant’s duties primarily involve assisting the university's<br />
administrative staff or that of a specific department with collecting, organizing and<br />
analyzing various administrative data. These duties should be relevant to the graduate<br />
program and professional goals of the student.
A GAA is most often involved with assisting at registration, collection materials, performing<br />
computer work, editing, helping with department exhibitions and working on special projects.<br />
Minor responsibilities involve attending seminars, engaging in library research and holding<br />
conferences.<br />
Graduate Research Assistant (GRA)<br />
A Graduate Research Assistant is one who assumes research-oriented responsibilities which<br />
involve library work, computer programming, analysis, fieldwork, laboratory experiments,<br />
scientific investigations, or other endeavors. The principal investigator of a funded research<br />
project normally employs GRAs. The student’s work on a research project should be closely<br />
supervised; it could lead to the successful writing of a thesis or dissertation, and provide<br />
long-range direction for the student’s development as a scholar.<br />
Graduate Teaching Assistant (GTA)<br />
A Graduate Teaching Assistant serves in an instructional role in a class or laboratory within<br />
a specific department at NCA&TSU. GTAs may perform pedagogical functions, such as,<br />
preparing lectures, teaching classes, constructing and grading tests, holding conferences,<br />
assigning course grades, or providing support for the faculty member in charge of the course.<br />
In all cases, the GTA works under the supervision of a faculty member. To this end, the GTA<br />
works to gain teaching skills and a better understanding of the essentials of his/her academic<br />
discipline.<br />
115<br />
Both GRAs and GTAs must also fulfill duties and responsibilities concerning safety in the<br />
laboratory equipment. Guidelines are available from the colleges/schools department offices.<br />
Eligibility<br />
To be eligible for a GA appointment, students may not hold non-degree, special, or probationary<br />
status at the <strong>University</strong>. Exceptions to this regulation must be approved by the Dean of School<br />
of Graduate Studies. The GA must be fully admitted to a graduate program devoting full time<br />
towards the degree.<br />
To qualify for a GA appointment, a student must satisfy the following eligibility requirements:<br />
1. Be pursuing a graduate<br />
degree at A&T <strong>State</strong><br />
<strong>University</strong>.<br />
2. Be registered during the<br />
academic year for a<br />
specific number of hours<br />
as prescribed by the<br />
academic department.<br />
3. Maintain a 3.0 grade<br />
point average and make<br />
progress towards the<br />
graduate degree.<br />
4. Satisfy other requirements<br />
published by the<br />
employing college/school<br />
5. The academic unit<br />
shall establish eligibility<br />
for assistantships for<br />
summer sessions.<br />
International students applying for graduate assistantships who are graduates of institutions of<br />
higher education located outside the USA in non-English speaking countries are required to<br />
demonstrate proficiency in the English language by having official scores directly from the test<br />
of English as Foreign Language (TOFEL) submitted to the School of Graduate Studies.<br />
International teaching assistants MUST score a minimum of 550 on the paper base test or 213<br />
on the computer base test. Only scores received from Educational Testing Service, Princeton,<br />
NJ 08451, will be considered official. Students are responsible for requesting ETS to forward<br />
scores to the university.
A graduate student for whom English is a second language must obtain clearance through the<br />
International Students Office for enhancing their communication skills. This office is located in Murphy<br />
Hall, <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> Agricultural and Technical <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>, Greensboro, NC 27411; the<br />
telephone number is (336)334-7551. The academic unit (department, college, and school) also<br />
evaluates international students’ effective communication skills.<br />
Academic Enrollment<br />
Graduate Assistants must register during the academic year for a specific number of hours as<br />
prescribed by the academic department.<br />
Additional On-Campus and Outside Employment<br />
No specific established policy regarding additional employment exists. Most departments,<br />
however, discourage additional employment.<br />
Appointment/Reappointment/Duration of Appointment<br />
The Department Chairperson and the Dean of the college/school will make appointment of<br />
GAs. Decisions concerning policies for the appointment and reappointment of GAs are<br />
determined by the academic department with the approval of the appropriate college/school<br />
dean within the guidelines established by the Graduate Council.<br />
Each department must complete an appointment letter. This letter will include:<br />
1. Type of assistantship<br />
2. Amount of stipend<br />
3. Responsibilities of the position<br />
Each GA should expect to receive a letter of appointment including this information. The same<br />
procedure is followed for notification of reappointment. GAs are expected to respond in writing<br />
their acceptance/rejection of letters of appointment and reappointment.<br />
The letter of appointment constitutes the first normal step toward employment as a GA.<br />
Typically, the letter contains a job description outlining the type of appointment, responsibilities,<br />
minimum/maximum course load, salary, length/dates of appointment and a faculty supervisor.<br />
Time of Offer<br />
The following timetable is suggested for the offer and acceptance of the appointments by<br />
academic departments employing graduate students.<br />
Timetable Deadlines Acceptance/Rejection:<br />
4. Duration of the appointment<br />
5. Minimum number of credit hours<br />
Semester Offer Dates Response Dates<br />
Summer February 1 February 15<br />
Fall April 1 April 15<br />
Spring October 1 October 15<br />
Acceptance given or left in force after response date prevents the student from accepting another<br />
appointment without first obtaining formal release from the employing unit. Those academic<br />
departments offering initial appointments after April 15 must make offers as early as possible<br />
during the Spring and Summer sessions.<br />
Consistent with planning information and funds, employing academic departments may offer<br />
another graduate assistantship as early as possible, but no later than two weeks before the end<br />
of Spring Semester.<br />
Commitments are made only for the period initially assigned and are non-transferable in terms<br />
of time. The letter of appointment includes the beginning and ending dates of commitment.<br />
116<br />
All appointments are contingent upon the availability of funds for this purpose. A&T also<br />
adheres to the Council of Graduate Schools resolution regarding graduate assistants.
Period of Appointment<br />
The academic unit (department, college or school) normally makes graduate assistant<br />
appointments. The academic unit also defines the duration and level of compensation for<br />
graduate assistants.<br />
Termination Criteria<br />
A GA appointment may be terminated prior to the end of the appointment period for any of<br />
the following reasons:<br />
1. The GA is no longer enrolled in the School of Graduate Studies.<br />
2. The GA is registered for fewer credit hours than approved by the<br />
academic unit.<br />
3. The GA is registered for more than the maximum number of graduate<br />
credit hours approved by the academic unit.<br />
4. Performance by the GA is determined to be unsatisfactory by the<br />
employing academic department.<br />
5. The position has been terminated due to budgetary constraints.<br />
117<br />
Performance Review<br />
Evaluation is a crucial part of the assistantship program. Supervision and performance reviews<br />
should be an on-going process of communication between the GA and the faculty/staff<br />
supervisor/mentor.<br />
At the end of each term appointment, a formal evaluation will be conducted by the School of<br />
Graduate Studies in a manner equitable to all GAs in each academic department. However,<br />
informal evaluations and observations should be conducted as needed by the department.<br />
The formal evaluation should assure fairness in reappointment. Excellence should be noted as<br />
well as continued inadequacies in performance. As part of the total evaluation, the GA should<br />
assess the experience from his/her perspective as well. The evaluation form utilized at A&T is<br />
provided in Appendix A. Your supervisor will complete the evaluation and discuss it with you<br />
at the end of the semester.<br />
Conduct and Discipline<br />
Means for resolving students’ complaints:<br />
The GA, categorized as both student and instructional leader, especially as a GTA, is subject to<br />
disciplinary procedures for academic misconduct. As an instructional leader, the GA must not<br />
become involved in academic honesty in terms of cheating, plagiarism, fabrication, forgery and<br />
aiding/abetting academic dishonesty. A GA is expected to behave at the highest level of<br />
ethical behavior.<br />
Academic Department Responsibilities<br />
Within the above-stated policies on the Administration of Graduate Assistantships, each<br />
employing academic department appointing GAs must develop, publish and make available its<br />
GA rules. The publication should include the following information:<br />
1. Criteria and procedures for<br />
selecting GAs.<br />
2. Criteria and procedures for<br />
reappointing GAs.<br />
3. Period of appointments.<br />
4. Availability of summer<br />
appointments.<br />
5. Date for notifying students of<br />
appointments and for receiving<br />
acceptance or refusal.<br />
6. <strong>State</strong>ment of duties and<br />
responsibilities.<br />
7. Criteria and procedures for<br />
evaluating and reporting<br />
GA performance.<br />
8. Criteria and procedures for<br />
terminating GA appointments.<br />
9. Grievance procedures within<br />
the academic department.<br />
10. Space and facilities.<br />
11. If available, stipend levels.
Each academic department should endeavor to provide its GAs with appropriate space and<br />
facilities necessary to carry out their assigned teaching, research or administrative duties. A desk<br />
and chair, file space and a mailbox within the department should be provided. Access to a<br />
typewriter or computer, office duplicating equipment and a telephone should be provided.<br />
Grievance Procedures<br />
Discussion of a GA’s concerns with an advisor, supervisor, Graduate Studies Committee Chairperson,<br />
chairperson of the academic department or school dean normally leads to resolution of a grievance.<br />
There may be instances in which resource to these persons does not provide resolution. The<br />
Graduate Council has established grievance procedures, copies of which are available in the School<br />
of Graduate Studies.<br />
Remuneration<br />
Policies related to compensation for GAs vary among colleges/schools. For information<br />
regarding levels of compensation, each GA should contact the respective college/school dean.<br />
Guidelines regarding GTA Qualifications<br />
From NC A&T GTA Evaluation Guidelines – Administrative Memo #349:<br />
118<br />
• Graduate Teaching Assistants (GTAs) must possess a demonstrated competence in the subject matter<br />
that they will be teaching as determined by experts in the field. They should have an appreciation<br />
for the theory and practice of the subject matter, as well as a developing understanding of the major<br />
themes and divisions of their field. They should have an appreciation for the teaching and learning<br />
enterprise acquired from their own undergraduate and graduate academic programs, as well by means<br />
of both required and optional teacher training seminars, symposia, workshops, publications, and<br />
university staff resources. Competency to teach includes an effective command of the language of<br />
instruction, usually American English, and an appreciation for the culture of the American<br />
university classroom.<br />
• GTAs must be graduate students in good standing in their programs, which requires<br />
maintaining a minimum B average, or, at some campuses, receiving no grade lower than B.<br />
Professional/Ethical/Legal Responsibilities for Graduate Assistants<br />
By Kenneth H. Murray, Ph.D., PE<br />
Associate Vice Chancellor for Academic Affairs and<br />
Dean of the School of Graduate Studies<br />
As a Graduate Assistant, you are an employee of <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>, which<br />
means that the students believe you are the university’s representative in all matters. Many may<br />
not fell that you represent the university outside of the classroom or laboratory, but the students<br />
believe that you do. This means that you must be very careful to understand your responsibilities.<br />
Definitions<br />
To begin the discussion of your professional, ethical, and legal responsibilities requires that we<br />
define some basic terms that will be used throughout this discussion.<br />
Professional – characterized by or conforming to the technical or ethical<br />
standards of a profession which is defined as a calling requiring specialized<br />
knowledge and often long and intensive academic preparation.<br />
Ethical – conforming to accepted professional standards of conduct<br />
controlled by a set of moral principles or values.<br />
Legal – established by law.
Professional Responsibilities<br />
Your professional responsibilities are defined by the teaching profession and include:<br />
Giving correct information at all times, if you<br />
do not know the answer, say so and get help.<br />
Being prepared for all assignments and seek<br />
help from others when it is needed.<br />
Being on time with everything – attendance,<br />
returning work, assignments, etc.<br />
Ethical Responsibilities (Values)<br />
Dressing appropriate for the assignment.<br />
Controlling your actions and language at<br />
all times.<br />
Handling each person as an individual<br />
with respect for them and their views.<br />
Your ethical responsibilities are defined by the standards of the educational community and<br />
especially the standards at <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>. They include:<br />
119<br />
Performing your assignments to the best of your<br />
ability.<br />
Being fair and honest in handling people and<br />
data.<br />
Handling all grading as personal and<br />
confidential.<br />
Legal Responsibilities<br />
Your legal responsibilities are defined by Federal and <strong>State</strong> law and often overlap your ethical<br />
responsibilities since many of our ethical values have been canonized into the law. They include:<br />
Providing the university with all legal<br />
documentation required for the position.<br />
Understanding your duties and carrying them<br />
out according to the published schedule.<br />
Not disclosing private or personal information<br />
to anyone except that person.<br />
Not embarrassing anyone under your control<br />
in public – correct improper or incorrect<br />
actions in private with the individual.<br />
Not developing romantic or intimate<br />
relationships with students or staff under<br />
direction.<br />
Not placing relatives under your direction or<br />
give them any special treatment.<br />
Not developing romantic or intimate<br />
relationships with students or staff under your<br />
direction.<br />
Not placing relatives under your direction or<br />
give them any special treatment.<br />
Conclusion<br />
As a Graduate Assistant at <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>, you have professional,<br />
ethical, and legal responsibilities with respect to your assignment. We have trusted you with<br />
these responsibilities and believe you are capable of caring out these responsibilities and<br />
representing the <strong>University</strong> with the highest of standards. To do this you must understand<br />
the following:<br />
Ethics and values are personal, but with<br />
broader impact.<br />
Maintaining your values is a must, both<br />
personally and professionally.<br />
Shakespeare wrote - “To thine own self be<br />
true” - but this only works if you are “true and<br />
ethical.”<br />
Your values should not change with<br />
situations, but may change with new e<br />
xperiences and over time, and we hope they<br />
improve with each change.<br />
Remember that as a Graduate Assistant you can always ask for help from faculty, staff, and<br />
administrators without feeling embarrassed about not knowing. Great men and women always<br />
know when to say, “I do not know,” and then find the answer. Good luck!<br />
For more information, click on Classroom Legal Issues - linked with permission from<br />
<strong>University</strong> of California - Santa Barbara, Office of Instructional Development.
Safety and Emergency Procedures in the Classroom<br />
Provided by Marvin Dickerson,<br />
Director, ARISA/Environmental Health and Safety,<br />
<strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong><br />
120<br />
Instructor’s Responsibility<br />
NC A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong> holds in high regard the health and safety of faculty, staff, students<br />
and visitors. It is the policy of the <strong>University</strong> to provide a loss-control program that protects<br />
employees from occupational injuries and illnesses, protects <strong>University</strong> property from loss and<br />
damage, and protects the environment. Operational procedures as developed by <strong>University</strong><br />
safety organizations will be implemented and enforced by all university department/<br />
administrative units.<br />
Consistent with this policy, instructors must become familiar with the Division of Student<br />
Affairs, Crisis Response and Emergency Management Handbook and the <strong>University</strong>’s<br />
Comprehensive Emergency Management Plan (CEMP). These documents are available from<br />
the Vice Chancellor of Student Affairs and the Director of Environmental Health and Safety<br />
office. In addition, the CEMP can be accessed from the <strong>University</strong>’s Front Page Web-site at<br />
www.ncat.edu.<br />
Provide his or her class or audience with general information relating to emergency procedures.<br />
This information should be shared during the first week of class or at the start of a seminar. Please<br />
note the posted information for “Classroom Emergency Procedures.”<br />
Know how to report an emergency from the classroom being used.<br />
Assure that persons with disabilities have the information they need. The instructor should be<br />
familiar with the student’s plan and be able to direct visitors with disabilities.<br />
Take responsible charge of the classroom and follow emergency procedures for all building alarms<br />
and emergencies.<br />
Supplemental Information<br />
As an instructor, what do I need to know about Emergency Preparedness?<br />
Every university department and unit should have a written Emergency Plan covering specific<br />
procedures for their facility and employees. These plans will cover events such as: fire,<br />
earthquake, power outage, bomb threat, hazardous material spills, severe weather, etc.<br />
Instructors will find it helpful to review the plans for the buildings in which they teach to see<br />
if the plans differ from the general information provided here.<br />
The “instructor” is an authoritative figure for the student, either consciously or subconsciously,<br />
and can influence how the student responds in an emergency. Calm, collected and clear<br />
directions by the instructor will have a calming effect on the students. In order for the<br />
instructor to exhibit this controlled personae he or she must be prepared for emergencies.<br />
1. EVACUATION ROUTES – Unless unusual conditions dictate otherwise, the best<br />
evacuation route is the nearest stairway and out the nearest exit.<br />
2. EMERGENCY ASSEMBLY POINTS – After the class leaves the building or area, it is<br />
important for them to go to a pre-determined area where the presence of persons can be<br />
documented. This “safe area” will be a designated Emergency Assembly Point where the class<br />
will not interfere with responding emergency services nor place themselves at risk of injury<br />
from the emergency. Evacuation routes in most university buildings lead the occupants out<br />
the building. However, in some high-rise buildings the evacuation routes may lead occupants<br />
horizontally into another wing or down a couple of floors below the source of the alarm.<br />
These high-rise buildings may have Emergency Assembly Points for both inside and outside<br />
the building.
Accounting for all students can be very difficult, particularly with a large class. However, an<br />
attempt must be made. For example, it might be possible for the instructor to: wait until all<br />
the students have left the room/lab, use the class roster, use a head count or have students see<br />
if the students seated next to them are at the assembly point. You must also account for<br />
persons with disabilities (see below).<br />
121<br />
3. EVACUATION FOR PERSONS WITH DISABILITIES – If there is a person with a<br />
disability in the class, the instructor must be knowledgeable of their response and who may be<br />
assisting them. Four options are available to persons with disabilities:<br />
Horizontal Evacuation to outside or another building, if available.<br />
Stairway Evacuation.<br />
Stay in Place unless danger is imminent.<br />
Area of Refuge if available.<br />
“Elevators cannot be used during an emergency evacuation”!<br />
4. REPORTING TO BUILDING EMERGENCY COORDINATOR – After exiting and<br />
accounting for students, the Building Emergency Coordinator will notify emergency personnel<br />
of persons missing or trapped or persons with disabilities that are waiting assistance in areas<br />
of refuge.<br />
5. FIRE ALARMS – Fire alarms will sound and may include strobe lights for people with<br />
hearing disabilities. When the alarm sounds, everyone must exit the alarmed area according<br />
to the evacuation plan.<br />
Everyone Must Evacuate Immediately!<br />
Procedures that may be hazardous if left unattended should be shut down.<br />
Verify that everyone leaves and that all the doors are closed. Closed doors significantly<br />
reduce fire and smoke damage.<br />
6. WHAT TO EXPECT IN A POWER OUTAGE – The <strong>University</strong> campus power system<br />
is serviced by Duke Power and, over time, has proven to be reliable, even during major<br />
windstorms. Many campus buildings are provided with emergency lighting or standby power<br />
from emergency generators. This system is automatic and should be operational within 60<br />
seconds. Consequently, if the power does go out during class, have the people stay in their<br />
seats for a little while and wait for the power to return. If the power does not return in a<br />
reasonable length of time, (~ 5 minutes) then evacuate the classroom or laboratory.<br />
Evacuation should take advantage of available lighting unless the building is in alarm, and<br />
then use the same evacuation procedures as during a fire. Caution students that there is no<br />
rush and they should take their time exiting the building. Emergency lighting may or may<br />
not be functioning in the room, hallway or stairways.<br />
7. HOW TO REPORT AN EMERGENCY – Check each classroom, lecture hall or laboratory<br />
for the nearest working telephone, the nearest life safety (fire) alarm pull station and the<br />
nearest fire extinguisher.<br />
a. Fire Activate Fire Alarm Pull Station<br />
and if possible - Call 4-7675 or 911<br />
b. Health/Police - Call 4-7675 or 911<br />
c. Hazardous Material Spill - Call 4-7675 or 911<br />
d. Facility or Utility Failure - Call 4-7675 or 911
What Emergency Preparedness Materials should I have with me in Class?<br />
Roster<br />
Important telephone numbers (in addition to Emergency Numbers)<br />
Department Administrator As appropriate<br />
Physical Plant 4-7634<br />
Student Services 4-7696<br />
Other – as appropriate<br />
Classroom Emergency Procedures<br />
1. When you hear the fire alarm…<br />
The Elevators<br />
cannot<br />
be used during<br />
a fire alarm!<br />
Everyone should calmly collect his or her coats and books and<br />
exit the classroom, lecture hall or laboratory.<br />
Please turn off the gas supplies in laboratories.<br />
Leave the room/lab and go to the nearest building exit.<br />
Know the location of alternate exits.<br />
Go to the Emergency Assembly Point. Exception: Persons<br />
with disabilities may choose to remain in place or report to an<br />
area of refuge.<br />
122<br />
2. When there is a power outage…<br />
Everyone should stay in his or her seat to see if the outage is<br />
temporary and to let his or her eyes adjust to the lower light<br />
level.<br />
If the outage appears to be long term, everyone should<br />
calmly collect their materials and carefully exit the building.<br />
3. If there is an earthquake…<br />
4. Shelter-in-Place…<br />
Drop and Cover your head for protection from material that<br />
might fall from the ceiling or walls.<br />
After the shaking stops, calmly evacuate the building.<br />
You should prepare to remain inside of the building or facility<br />
and take directions from designated staff or faculty<br />
Shelter-in-Place coordinators.<br />
5. Student Accident or Injuries…<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
<br />
You should assist the injured person with immediate<br />
emergency medical care.<br />
Contact the <strong>University</strong> Police Department and the Office of<br />
Student Affairs.<br />
Collect as much information as possible concerning the<br />
accident and complete an Accident Report (Attachment in<br />
the Student Affairs, Crisis Response and Emergency<br />
Management Handbook).<br />
Forward all obtained information regarding the incident,<br />
directly to the Office of Student Affairs as soon as possible.
<strong>University</strong>-Based Technology Transfer<br />
Economic impact on the university and the world around us<br />
Copyright 2000 © Association of <strong>University</strong> Technology Managers. All rights reserved.<br />
123<br />
Doug Speight<br />
Interim Director<br />
<strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong><br />
Office of Technology Transfer and Commercialization<br />
What is Technology Transfer?<br />
Technology Transfer is a term used to describe a formal transferring of new discoveries and<br />
innovations resulting from scientific research conducted at universities to the commercial<br />
sector. One way that universities transfer technology is through patenting and licensing new<br />
innovations. The major steps in this process include: 1) the disclosure of innovations; 2)<br />
patenting the innovation concurrent with publication of scientific research; and 3) licensing<br />
the rights to innovations to industry for commercial development.<br />
How do Academic Institutions Measure Success in Technology Transfer?<br />
Early numerical measures include the number of patents filed, license agreements executed,<br />
and new companies formed. Later, numerical measures include royalties paid to the academic<br />
institutions from the companies that commercialized their inventions and the numbers of<br />
products successfully introduced to the market. Additional models for calculating the public<br />
benefits of technology transfer activities include induced investment, return to licensee/investor,<br />
taxes, and jobs. Success is also demonstrated by the impact the particular products have on our<br />
lives (see for product vignettes.)<br />
Within the university setting, results of technology transfer include a university's capability to<br />
retain entrepreneurial faculty and attract outstanding graduate students; its reputation for<br />
innovation; the enhancement of university research through interaction with the private sector;<br />
and, its reputation for providing highly trained students for the industrial workforce.<br />
What are the Benefits of Technology Transfer?<br />
Academic Technology Transfer in FY 1999-specifically the licensing of innovations by<br />
universities, teaching hospitals, research institutes and patent management firms-added more<br />
than $40 billion to the U.S. economy and supported 270,000 jobs. It has helped to spawn new<br />
businesses, create industries, and open new markets. Moreover, it has led to new products and<br />
services that improve our quality of life. From new cancer treatments to faster modems, from<br />
environmentally friendly metal processing to beautiful flowering plants, technology transfer<br />
from academic institutions is enhancing the way we live and work.<br />
Has There Been Growth in Academic Technology Transfer Programs?<br />
Yes. Academic institutions have seen a significant increase in technology transfer activity.<br />
Prior to 1980, fewer than 250 patents were issued to U.S. universities each year and discoveries<br />
were seldom commercialized for the public's benefit. In contrast, in FY 1999, reports indicated<br />
that 3,914 new license agreements were signed. Between FY 1991 and FY 1999, annual<br />
invention disclosures increased 63% (to 12,324), new patents filed increased 77% (to 5,545)<br />
and new licenses and options executed increased 129% (to 3,914).<br />
Why Has There Been Such a Growth in Technology Transfer Programs?<br />
This success in university technology transfer-and the resulting economic and health benefits is<br />
the direct result of the 1980 Bayh-Dole Act. This legislation, co-sponsored by Senators Birch<br />
Bayh and Robert Dole, enabled universities, nonprofit research institutions, and small<br />
businesses to own and patent inventions developed under federally funded research programs.<br />
The Act provides an incentive for universities to market their innovations and for industry to<br />
make high-risk investments.
How Does the Public Benefit from <strong>University</strong>-Industry Partnerships?<br />
<strong>University</strong>-industry partnerships are helping to move new discoveries from the laboratory to the<br />
marketplace faster and more efficiently than ever before-ensuring that products and services<br />
reach the public more quickly and often. The partnership enables a researcher-who made the<br />
initial discovery-to participate in the further development of a product or process, which in turn,<br />
significantly reduces the time to eventual commercialization.<br />
How Do Universities use the Royalties Earned from Licensing?<br />
Royalties earned by academic institutions are used to help advance scientific research and<br />
education through reinvestment in the academic enterprise. The royalties are given, in part, to<br />
university research departments to provide, among other things, new opportunities for graduate<br />
students, buy research equipment, or fund new research. They also are used to help sustain the<br />
technology transfer process by paying for a portion of the legal fees associated with patenting<br />
and licensing, as well as technology management staff. And finally, as the Bayh-Dole Act<br />
requires, a portion of the revenues is shared with the university inventor.<br />
Copyright 2000 © Association of <strong>University</strong> Technology Managers. All rights reserved.<br />
For more information regarding technology transfer at <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>,<br />
please contact:<br />
Doug Speight<br />
Interim Director <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong><br />
Office of Technology Transfer and Commercialization<br />
Phone: (336) 334-7995 Fax: (336) 334-7086<br />
Email: mspeight@ncat.edu<br />
124<br />
Student Initiated Programs and Unfunded Projects<br />
By Marvin H. Watkins<br />
Special Assistant to the Vice Chancellor for<br />
Research and Economic Development<br />
The Division of Research at NC A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong> facilitates scholarly productivity<br />
throughout the university with the fundamental core values being customer service, quality,<br />
commitment, and excellence. The on-going major priorities for the division are to enhance<br />
research and the productivity of sponsored programs for the entire university, to provide<br />
comprehensive support services for the development and administration of research and<br />
sponsored programs, and to enhance the university’s infrastructure for technology transfer and<br />
commercialization. These major priorities also includes programs initiated by graduate students,<br />
both funded and unfunded.<br />
Both undergraduate and graduate students at A&T are heavily involved in a variety of research<br />
and other sponsored program activities in a diversity of areas. Most of these research activities<br />
are sponsored through individual discipline-specific research awards, or through interdisciplinary<br />
research programs. All units and offices of the Division of Research, including those of the<br />
Director of Research Services and the Research Compliance Officer, are available to assist<br />
students interested in research and other sponsored programs. Please contact us at<br />
(336) 334-7995 or visit the Division of Research on the 4th floor of the Fort Interdisciplinary<br />
Research Center (IRC) Building on the main campus.
SECTION X<br />
125<br />
How to Help GTAs Be Successful<br />
Graduate Teaching Assistants are undoubtedly valuable members of the instructional team at<br />
A&T. While many areas have tried and true ways of gracefully blending their GTAs into the<br />
structure and flow of the department, others do so somewhat haphazardly. So regardless of<br />
where your area falls in this spectrum, the following checklist is a tool that will guide you in<br />
preparing for and orienting your GTAs to their new roles.<br />
For the Supervising Professor:<br />
A CHECKLIST to Help GTAs Be Successful<br />
Teaching Assistant’s Name ___________________________________________________________________<br />
Semester/Year _________________________________________ Dept: _______________________________<br />
Supervising Professor’s Name _________________________________________________________________<br />
Check off items as they are completed by initialing in the<br />
column to the left and indicating date accomplished<br />
Notes<br />
Letter of appointment and job description provided to GTA.<br />
Acceptance from GTA received/acknowledged.<br />
List of specific responsibilities and duties provided to GTA<br />
along with important dates and deadlines.<br />
Arrangements for compensation made.<br />
Office space with a phone arranged.<br />
Arrange for a mailbox and place for messages to be left.<br />
Access to a photocopier, fax machine, computer, and printer.<br />
Clear directions on course requirements, content, etc.<br />
Regular guidance and feedback on the course and their<br />
performance in leading it.<br />
Contact numbers where supervising professor can be reached<br />
at most times in the event of an emergency or crucial situation.<br />
Please add any items that are specific to your department/area as needed.
GTA-to-GTA Advice<br />
By Therese Coon<br />
GTA at N. C. A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong><br />
126<br />
Sometimes advice straight from another graduate student who is serving or has served as a<br />
GTA can shed light on an area that you haven’t thought about or are struggling with. Below<br />
are contributions from current and former GTA’s at <strong>North</strong> <strong>Carolina</strong> A&T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong>.<br />
See which ones can help you in your new role:<br />
From Therese Coon, Graphic Communication Systems:<br />
Remember your classroom experiences as an undergraduate: which instructors and<br />
TAs inspired you to learn the content and do your best work? Model their behaviors<br />
in planning, instruction, feedback.<br />
Treat your GTA assignment as a job. You’ll be writing it into your resume, right? Be<br />
professional, on time, organized, and responsive to the needs of the instructor<br />
(your boss) and the students (your customers).<br />
What’s in it for you? Define what you want to learn from this experience and put that<br />
into your planning for the semester. Do you want to improve your content mastery?<br />
How about giving smoother presentations to the class? Find a creative way to present<br />
the material? Build relationships within the department, school or university?<br />
Remember that you are a role model to the undergraduates. They are soaking up your<br />
perceptions and attitudes about them as students, about being a graduate student,<br />
and about your attitude toward the instructor, department and university with<br />
each interaction. We have not outgrown the poem “Children Learn What<br />
They Live”.<br />
Tips From Former GTAs:<br />
Reflect on what works well for you in class and what doesn't work well and find ways to<br />
further develop your teaching skills.<br />
Utilize resources both in your department and on campus.<br />
Before ever meeting the students, contact the professor in charge of the course and others<br />
involved in the course to learn as much as possible about particular responsibilities and how<br />
the course should be organized and taught.<br />
Talk to colleagues, peers, and friends to learn from them and share teaching experiences.<br />
Offer your students as many opportunities for communication as you are comfortable with.<br />
For example, inform students they can reach you by telephone and provide numbers and<br />
appropriate time frames for calling, or that they can send an e-mail message, drop their work<br />
or notes off in your departmental mailbox, or come by during your office hours.<br />
Try to communicate in a variety of ways based on your audience's needs. Some of us like to<br />
listen to information, others would rather read the information, while others prefer to have it<br />
demonstrated or acted out. Still others may prefer to discuss things.<br />
Keep your presentations simple, exciting and challenging, and adjusted to your audience's<br />
background, knowledge level and interests. Know your audience and consider the needs of<br />
the different groups in your audience to help them learn. Create opportunities for them<br />
to participate.<br />
Students love to get feedback and it needs to be prompt. Grade student work in a consistent<br />
fashion and return it promptly. Allow students to earn extra points if they can present a<br />
convincing argument or prove that the error they made is realized and that they now know<br />
how to do it right.
Be sure to let students know where, when, and how they can reach<br />
you during the semester. Place the name and number of the course<br />
on the board along with your name, e-mail address, phone numbers,<br />
office location and office hours.<br />
Ask students to introduce themselves by sharing their name,<br />
hometown, major, and what they hope to gain from the course.<br />
Hand out 3x5 cards and ask students to give the information they<br />
just gave in the verbal introduction, along with any confidential<br />
information that will help you assist them as a student. For instance,<br />
do they have a learning disability, have they struggled with the<br />
subject in the past, or do they have a hearing problem that you<br />
can accommodate?<br />
It can be helpful to students if you allow them time to get the<br />
names, phone numbers, and e-mail addresses from two or three<br />
other students so they can get notes and assignments from missed<br />
classes or find someone to study with during the semester.<br />
Conduct a warm-up activity. For example, students could play a<br />
word game to help them (and you) learn names. You could also<br />
have the class brainstorm important topics for the course or conduct<br />
preliminary debate on an issue central to the course content.<br />
Introduce students to the course syllabus and the contents within it,<br />
so they can return to the document for questions they have at a<br />
later time.<br />
Be sure to cover attendance and homework expectations, exam and<br />
grading policies, and class participation expectations.<br />
Explain major assignments, papers, projects, reports, and/or lab work.<br />
Make sure you have copies of the textbook, lab manual, and any<br />
other materials used for the course.<br />
Let students know about reserve books, check out policies, and websites<br />
that would be useful to them in their study.<br />
Discuss with students how they can best read the text and study for<br />
this course.<br />
Provide an overview of the course, key concepts, and terminology,<br />
including what you will focus on during the semester and what will<br />
receive only limited coverage.<br />
Explain how the course builds on previous classes they may have<br />
had or how it fits into higher level courses they may one day take<br />
later on.<br />
Offer a specific problem or challenge and work through it with<br />
the class to help them see how people in this field think about<br />
their work.<br />
Share your interest and motivation for the subject itself. Modeling<br />
enthusiasm is key to generating students’ enthusiasm toward<br />
the subject.<br />
Additional Resources:<br />
TIPS FROM THE TRENCHES, linked with permission by the<br />
<strong>University</strong> of Delaware, Center for Teaching Effectiveness,<br />
TA Handbook. Education Resources Links<br />
Graduate Students<br />
may face the<br />
challenge of being<br />
husbands, wives, sons,<br />
sisters, parents and<br />
employees.<br />
To Maintain Balance<br />
and Void Burnout...<br />
•Manage your time<br />
wisely<br />
•Strive for excellence<br />
NOT perfection<br />
•Schedule play time<br />
into everyday<br />
•Believe in yourself<br />
•Ask someone to be<br />
your “Vent Partner”<br />
•Always have a<br />
“Plan B”<br />
•Exercise<br />
•Learn to meet your<br />
own needs<br />
•Talk with a<br />
Counselor<br />
NC A & T <strong>State</strong> <strong>University</strong><br />
Counseling Services<br />
108 Murphy Hall<br />
(336) 334-7727<br />
127
Balancing Your Roles<br />
By Shea D. Burns, Ph.D.<br />
Assistant Professor<br />
Mathematics,<br />
Collage of Arts and Sciences<br />
128<br />
As a Graduate Teaching Assistant, you are held accountable for your own academic development<br />
as well as the academic development of the students enrolled in the classes assigned to you.<br />
Balancing these responsibilities is an ongoing process. To maintain this balance, you must create a<br />
plan of action. The following suggestions are things to consider:<br />
1. Identify all positions that will affect your performance as a Graduate Teaching Assistant.<br />
Make a list of all the roles you will occupy during your teaching assignment and the people<br />
involved. Your agreement to be a Graduate Teaching Assistant normally does not cancel the other<br />
responsibilities in your life. Besides the obvious role of graduate student, you may have obligations<br />
to family, employment, research, etc. Unless you have made plans to eliminate these duties until<br />
the completion of your teaching assignment, they will require some attention from you.<br />
2. Have an honest conversation with each person involved in each role to determine your<br />
responsibilities.<br />
Before you actually begin your teaching assignment, make an appointment with each person involved<br />
in your activities listed above. The goal of these meetings is to establish an agreement on your<br />
duties. For example, schedule an appointment with your academic advisor to discuss credit hours or<br />
GPA requirements needed for the semester. Allow him/her to express his/her expectations of you.<br />
Be honest about your other obligations. If his/her expectations exceed what you are capable of<br />
fulfilling, make every effort to come to an agreement that is reasonable and satisfying for both parties.<br />
3. Manage your time wisely by prioritizing your obligations.<br />
After establishing your duties, you should have a reasonable idea of which ones require more from<br />
you than others. Of course, because your Graduate Teaching Assistantship is dependent on your<br />
status as a graduate student, graduate classes and study time should be your first priority. Next, your<br />
Graduate Teaching Assistantship may require class time, office hours, and time for grading and<br />
preparation. In some instances, you may be able to combine these obligations. For example, during<br />
office hours, you may use time in between students to study your own class work. Make sure that<br />
you schedule some time for all your obligations regardless of their importance. For example, family<br />
members might understand you spending less time with them in order to focus on your studies.<br />
However, you do not want to neglect all time with them.<br />
4. Make regular self-assessments and obtain feedback from others on your ability to meet your<br />
responsibilities.<br />
It is very easy to focus on one activity more than the others. This is more likely to happen when<br />
one activity is more demanding than others. For example, class attendance and assignments are a<br />
regular and necessary part of graduate school. Thus, you may devote all of your attention to them<br />
and neglect the office hours for your teaching assignment. This happens often when students are<br />
always willing to let you finish your assignments and “come back to office later”. While making a<br />
self-assessment, you may be able to identify problem areas. However, it is important to get feedback<br />
from others involved to get a complete view of your performance. Be open and willing to<br />
hear all remarks, both positive and negative, that they may share.<br />
5. Be willing to ask for help and/or eliminate some of your responsibilities.<br />
If you happen to get some negative feedback, ask for suggestions to help accomplish your goals.<br />
Find a mentor or partner with another graduate student who is successfully balancing his/her<br />
roles. Being accountable to another person is a good way to stay focused on your objectives. If<br />
during your self-assessment, you find that you have overextended yourself, reschedule appointments<br />
with the necessary people to renegotiate your duties. For example, suppose you told your students<br />
you would offer Saturday problem sessions, but you find that you need that extra day to devote to<br />
your studies. Explain to your class that you are no longer able to offer that service and find an<br />
alternative solution for them such as campus tutoring services.
Balancing your roles, although challenging, can be accomplished with some planning and continuing<br />
assessment. With guidance from others and thorough self-evaluation, it can become manageable.<br />
Questions Frequently Asked by TAs<br />
129<br />
Q: What can I do to get a sense of how my sections are going?<br />
Many new GTAs are unsure about their teaching performance. In fact, all new teachers inevitably hit<br />
some rough spots early in their development. Despite the urge to keep one's questions private for fear of<br />
being judged, it is usually extremely helpful to discuss problem areas with other GTAs. Once you view<br />
teaching as an ongoing learning process, you realize that any problems you are encountering have been<br />
experienced by nearly everyone in your department at one time or another. Developing an open<br />
attitude toward your teaching and toward feedback about your teaching makes it easier to identify and<br />
develop your strengths and work on your limitations. Two ways to gather feedback are (1) through the<br />
use of a mid-semester (or earlier) assessment survey; and (2) by scheduling a videotaped recording of<br />
one of your sections and a follow-up consultation, a service offered free of charge by The Academy of<br />
Teaching and Learning.<br />
Q: I recently had my students do a mid-term evaluation of the class, and the feedback was not very<br />
positive. Can you give me some suggestions on how I can improve my teaching?<br />
First, you should set up an appointment with your supervising professor who can review the feedback<br />
with you. Second, you might consider being videotaped in the classroom and receiving feedback on your<br />
teaching from The Academy of Teaching and Learning. This is one of the most effective ways to improve<br />
your teaching. Third, the campus library has a multitude of books and articles on various<br />
pedagogical topics that can be of assistance to you.<br />
Q: What should I do if I know some of my students are struggling in the course, e.g., if they<br />
receive a D or F on their first paper or exam?<br />
This is a complex question, one that has no easy answers but highlights a vital role you will play as a<br />
GTA. Often GTAs are the first “official” university personnel to become aware of student difficulties. At a<br />
minimum, you should establish personal contact with such students after the first paper or exam, perhaps<br />
by writing a note on their papers or exams, inviting them to come see you for assistance. You should also<br />
discuss the matter with your supervising professor. Additionally, you should refer the student to the<br />
services of the Center for Student Success, which can provide counseling and assistance for students<br />
before they encounter even more serious academic difficulties. Their phone number is (336)334-7855.<br />
Q: A student handed in a paper that I think was plagiarized. What should I do?<br />
You should discuss it with the your supervising professor immediately to decide an appropriate<br />
course of action to take. Plagiarism, cheating, unauthorized possession of examination materials,<br />
and unauthorized changing of a grade all fall under the auspices of academic dishonesty, which is<br />
outlined in detail in the Student Handbook under the “Student Conduct” section. Please review<br />
this section of the handbook for more detail.<br />
Q: What should I do if I suspect a student is carrying a firearm, weapon, or illegal substances?<br />
The <strong>University</strong> upholds a zero tolerance policy on illegal drugs, as well as forbids the possession of<br />
weapons of any type on campus. If you have a reason to believe a student in your class has any of the<br />
above in his or her possession you should not confront the student yourself, but get to a phone where<br />
you can make a private call and contact either the supervising professor, department chair, or the<br />
campus police for assistance. The campus police numbers are (336)334-7128 or 334-7144.<br />
If possible, engage the class in a reading assignment or other activity that will occupy them while<br />
you leave to make the phone call. No indication should be made that there is an ensuing problem.<br />
Q: What if a student challenges me or exhibits disruptive behavior in the classroom?<br />
If the student is challenging the subject matter being taught, try to be open to the challenge and<br />
encourage them to express why they do not accept things “as is,” acknowledging that it is wise to not<br />
passively accept everything they hear. At the same time, do not allow their challenge to disrupt<br />
learning for the rest of the students. It may be something that can be best resolved after class.<br />
However, if the student is being blatantly disruptive, do your best to defuse the student’s anger and/or<br />
resolve the problem while maintaining a tone of calmness and professional objectivity. If the situation<br />
appears to be escalating out of control, either go yourself, or send another student, to the nearest
administrative office or use a cell phone to contact campus police for assistance. The campus police<br />
numbers are (336) 334-7128 or 334-7144. Be sure you can give them the building and room number<br />
where the class is being held.<br />
130<br />
NEVER threaten a student in any way, and do not give in to their demands just to avoid confrontation.<br />
Again, either diffuse the situation, ask them to meet with you after class to resolve the issue, or if<br />
necessary, call campus police. If you do meet the student after class and they are still highly agitated or<br />
aggressive, it is advisable to have another GTA or professor present.<br />
Q: What should I do if a student comes to me with a personal problem?<br />
Students are more likely to go to GTAs than to professors with personal problems. While some personal<br />
contact and general advice is certainly within the domain of your role as GTA, for larger personal<br />
problems you should refer students to the services on campus available for them.<br />
Trained professional counselors in Counseling Services, located in Room 108 of Murphy Hall, offer<br />
confidential counseling to students for educational, career, social, personal or emotional concerns. Their<br />
phone number is (336) 334-7727. For health concerns, Sebastian Health Center provides primary<br />
health care, counseling and health/wellness education. Their phone number is (336) 334-7880.<br />
Q: What should I do if students confide in me about problems they are having with the<br />
supervising professor's lectures, assignments, and exams?<br />
Undergraduates are much more likely to air their discontent with the course with GTAs and not with<br />
professors. When this happens, GTAs should encourage students to use the professor's office hours to<br />
share their thoughts and ideas directly. If they are not already scheduled, GTAs should suggest periodic<br />
meetings with the professor to go over the mechanics of the course and to air their problems and discuss<br />
student progress. Graduate students sometimes find it difficult to offer constructive criticism to<br />
professors, particularly when they are involved with professors in other academic areas. Providing<br />
feedback can be made easier by scheduling regular feedback meetings before the semester begins.<br />
Q: What should I do if I ever encounter difficulties with either my supervisor or other GTAs I<br />
am working with in a particular course?<br />
Difficulties among co-workers can arise in any situation. Problems are best handled by discussions<br />
among the parties involved. If difficulties continue with fellow GTAs, you should speak to the course<br />
supervisor. If this doesn't clear things up, see your department's chair. Most minor tensions and<br />
difficulties can be settled by simply talking with the people involved, but you should always feel free<br />
to consult others when difficulties arise.<br />
Q: What constitutes Sexual Harassment when it comes to students and GTAs?<br />
The policy of the <strong>University</strong> states that sexual harassment is defined as deliberate, unsolicited and<br />
unwelcome verbal and/or physical conduct of a sexual nature or with sexual implications, which has or<br />
may have direct employment or academic consequences resulting from acceptance or rejection of<br />
such conduct.<br />
Q: Does the Faculty Handbook have a policy on It?<br />
As a GTA, you should maintain a friendly but professional relationship with your students and provide<br />
no cause for them to feel uncomfortable about the student/instructor relationship. On the other hand,<br />
should a student make advances directed at you personally, you should make it clear that while<br />
you are in the role of instructor of a class that he or she is enrolled in, it is advisable to keep the<br />
relationship strictly as student/instructor and nothing more.<br />
Q: What if a student challenges a grade I’ve given them on an assignment?<br />
Agree to meet with the student individually and hear their reason(s) for challenging the grade. You<br />
may want to reiterate the grading policy and explain why you gave them the grade you did. If you<br />
still have not come to terms at this point, inform the student that you will meet with the supervising<br />
professor and seek his/her feedback. Give them a time frame in which they should hear back from you.<br />
Then make it a point to speak with your supervising professor and ascertain if the grade should stand as<br />
given, or if any adjustment is warranted. Make sure you follow up with the student in a timely manner<br />
and do so in private, either outside of class or ask them to stay after class.
REFERENCE GUIDE TO CAMPUS RESOURCES<br />
Area Code is 336<br />
Departments Phone Fax<br />
Academic Affairs, Division of 334-7965 334-7136<br />
Accounting Department 334-7581 334-7093<br />
Accounting Office - Business & Finance 334-7684 334-7013<br />
Administrative Affairs 334-7804 334-7227<br />
Administrative Information Systems 334-7440 334-3833<br />
Admissions Office 334-7946 334-7478<br />
Affirmative Action Office 334-7977 334-7136<br />
Agriculture, School of 334-7979 334-7580<br />
Agricultural Economics Department 334-7943 334-7793<br />
Education Department 334-7711 334-7257<br />
Agricultural Engineering Department 334-7787 334-7270<br />
Air Force ROTC 334-7588 334-7184<br />
Animal Science Department 334-7547 334-7288<br />
Architectural Engineering Department 334-7575 334-7126<br />
Army ROTC 334-7588 334-7184<br />
Art Department 334-7993 334-3635<br />
Arts & Sciences, College of 334-7806 334-7173<br />
Biology Department 334-7907 334-7105<br />
Bookstore 334-7593 334-7481<br />
Budget Office 334-7631 334-3827<br />
Business Administration Department 334-7656 334-7093<br />
Business & Economics, School of 334-7632 334-7233<br />
Business Education & Administration Department 334-7657 334-7093<br />
Business and Finance, Division of 334-7587 334-7914<br />
Business Services 334-7703 334-3827<br />
Campus Mail Center 334-7544 334-4787<br />
Campus Police 334-7675 334-7230<br />
Career Services 334-7755 334-7018<br />
Center for Distance Learning 256-0355 256-0357<br />
Chancellor's Office 334-7940 334-7082<br />
Chemical Engineering Department 334-7564 334-7904<br />
Chemistry Department 334-7601 334-7124<br />
Civil Engineering Department 334-7737 334-7667<br />
Computer Science Department 334-7245 334-7244<br />
131
Departments Phone Fax<br />
Construction Mgmt. & Safety Department 334-7590 334-7433<br />
Contracts & Grants 334-7683 334-7013<br />
Counseling Services 334-7727 334-7284<br />
Development & <strong>University</strong> Relations, Division of 334-7654 334-7094<br />
Economics Department 334-7744 334-7093<br />
Education Leadership & Policy Department 334-7522 334-7033<br />
Education, School of 334-7757 334-7132<br />
Electrical Engineering Department 334-7761 334-7716<br />
Electronics & Computer Technology Department 334-7718 334-7546<br />
Engineering, College of 334-7589 334-7540<br />
English Department 334-7771 334-3342<br />
Financial Aid Office 334-7973 334-7954<br />
Food Service 334-7560<br />
Foreign Language Department 334-7886 334-3634<br />
Foreign Students Advisor 334-7551 334-7103<br />
Graduate School Office 334-7920 334-7282<br />
Graphic Communication Systems Department 334-7550 334-7577<br />
Handicap Students Affairs 334-7791 334-7378<br />
Health Services Center 334-7880 334-7264<br />
Health, Physical Education & Recreation Department 334-7719 334-7264<br />
Helpdesk 334-7195 334-3833<br />
History Department 334-7831 334-7837<br />
Housing Operations 334-7708 334-7170<br />
Human Development & Services Department 334-7916 334-7280<br />
Human Environment & Family Services Department 334-7850 334-7265<br />
Human Resources Office 334-7862 334-7477<br />
Industrial Engineering Department 334-7780 334-7729<br />
Information & Directory Assistance 334-7500 334-7214<br />
Information Services & Policy Development 334-7085 334-7227<br />
Information Technology and Telecommunications 334-7856 334-3833<br />
Internal Auditor 334-7910 334-7227<br />
Landscape Architecture 334-7520 334-7844<br />
Learning Assistance Center 334-7855 334-7010<br />
Legal Affairs 334-7592 334-7194<br />
Library Services 334-7782 334-7281<br />
Manufacturing Systems Department 334-7758 334-7704<br />
132
Departments Phone Fax<br />
Mathematics Department 334-7822 334-7283<br />
Mechanical Engineering Department 334-7621 334-7417<br />
Memorial Union 334-7571 334-7380<br />
Music Department 334-7926 334-7484<br />
Natural Resource & Environmental Design Department 334-7543 334-7844<br />
Nursing, School of 334-7751 334-7637<br />
Payroll 334-7888 334-7013<br />
Physical Plant 334-7626 334-7214<br />
Physics Department 334-7646 334-7283<br />
Political Science Department 334-7666 334-7321<br />
Psychology Department 334-7970 334-7538<br />
Purchasing 334-7555 334-7013<br />
Registrar, Office of 334-7595 334-7466<br />
Research, Division of 334-7995 334-7086<br />
Salary Administration 334-7794 334-7227<br />
Sociology & Social Service Department 334-7894 334-7197<br />
Speech Comm. & Theatre Arts Department 334-7900 334-7770<br />
Student Activities 334-7676 334-7366<br />
Student Affairs, Division of 334-7696 334-7103<br />
Student Government Association 334-7820 334-7380<br />
Student Teaching & Internships 334-7663 334-7132<br />
Summer School & Continuing Education 334-7607 334-7081<br />
Technological Graphic Communication Department 334-7550 334-7098<br />
Technology, School of 334-7567 334-7098<br />
Ticket Office 334-7749 334-7382<br />
Title III Coordination 334-7166 334-7136<br />
Transportation Institute 334-7745 334-7093<br />
Treasurer's Office 334-7721 334-7208<br />
Veteran's Office 334-7765 334-7333<br />
Waste Management Institute 334-7030 334-7399<br />
133
NORTH CAROLINA A&T STATE UNIVERSITY<br />
APPENDIX A<br />
School of Graduate Studies<br />
GRADUATE ASSISTANT EVALUATION<br />
134<br />
Department ___________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Name of Graduate Assistant: ___________________________________________________________________<br />
Contract Period: From __________________________________ Through _____________________________<br />
GRADUATE: ❒ Administrative Assistant ❒ Laboratory Assistant ❒ Research Assistant ❒ Teaching Assistant<br />
PERFORMANCE<br />
FACTORS<br />
Quality of Work<br />
Accuracy, thoroughness,<br />
neatness<br />
Quantity of Work<br />
Productive Output<br />
Dependability<br />
Follows instructions,<br />
judgment<br />
Compatibility<br />
Attitude, ability to get<br />
along with others<br />
Attendance<br />
Supervisory/Teaching<br />
Ability<br />
PERFORMANCE APPRAISAL<br />
Far Exceeds Exceeds Meets Partially Meets Does Not Meet<br />
Consistently<br />
excellent, errors,<br />
seldom<br />
<br />
Output<br />
unusually high,<br />
exceptionally<br />
fast<br />
<br />
Consistently<br />
dependable<br />
<br />
Consistently<br />
inspires others to<br />
work with and<br />
assist co-workers<br />
<br />
Consistently<br />
present and on<br />
time<br />
<br />
Exceptional<br />
ability to<br />
supervise/teach<br />
<br />
Better than<br />
average, few<br />
errors<br />
<br />
Does a good<br />
day’s work,<br />
better than<br />
average quantity<br />
<br />
Dependable in<br />
most respects<br />
<br />
Quick to<br />
volunteer to<br />
work with and<br />
assist others<br />
<br />
Seldom absent<br />
or late<br />
<br />
Above average<br />
ability to<br />
supervise/teach<br />
<br />
Consistently<br />
satisfactory,<br />
occasional errors<br />
<br />
Average, turns<br />
out required<br />
amount of work,<br />
seldom more<br />
<br />
Ordinarily<br />
dependable<br />
<br />
Generally works<br />
well with and<br />
assist others<br />
<br />
Average<br />
attendance<br />
record, usually<br />
on time<br />
<br />
Adequate skills<br />
in supervisory<br />
/teaching<br />
responsibility<br />
<br />
Frequent errors,<br />
careless<br />
<br />
Slow output,<br />
frequently below<br />
required quantity<br />
<br />
Frequently<br />
undependable<br />
<br />
Cooperates only<br />
when has to,<br />
frequent conflict<br />
<br />
Frequent<br />
absences<br />
and tardiness<br />
<br />
Has some<br />
difficulty with<br />
supervisory and<br />
teaching skills<br />
<br />
Unsatisfactory,<br />
many errors<br />
<br />
Output<br />
inadequate to<br />
retain on job<br />
<br />
Consistently<br />
undependable<br />
<br />
Consistently<br />
does not work<br />
well with or<br />
assist others<br />
<br />
Attendance too<br />
poor to retain<br />
<br />
Exhibits little to<br />
no supervisory/<br />
teaching<br />
capability<br />
<br />
Immediate Supervisor’s Comments: ________________________________________________________________<br />
_________________________________________________________________________________________________<br />
_________________________________________________________________________________________________<br />
Recommendation (check one): Retain: ❒ Yes ❒ No Reassign: ❒ Yes ❒ No<br />
Graduate Assistant’s Comments:___________________________________________________________________<br />
_________________________________________________________________________________________________<br />
_________________________________________________________________________________________________<br />
_____________________________________________ ________________________________________________<br />
Supervisor Date Graduate Assistant Date<br />
________________________________________<br />
Department Chair or Graduate Coordinator Date<br />
Signatures Required:
INDEX<br />
135<br />
A<br />
Academic Advising - 97<br />
Adults as Learners - 52<br />
Sources Used - 52<br />
Advising Students - 97<br />
Appendix A - 134<br />
Appendices - 135<br />
B<br />
Balancing Your Roles - 128<br />
Questions Frequently Asked by TAs - 129<br />
Benefits of Having a Mentor - 11<br />
Resources For Additional Advice - 13<br />
C<br />
Checklist for Teaching - 29<br />
Classroom Situations to Consider - 26<br />
Absenteeism - 26<br />
Be Prepared - 26<br />
Be Professional - 26<br />
Disruptive Students - 26<br />
Inadequate Writing Skills - 26<br />
Personal Issues - 26<br />
Plagiarism - 26<br />
Tardiness - 27<br />
Textbooks - 26<br />
Use Various Forms of Course<br />
Delivery - 26<br />
Cooperative Learning - 51<br />
Additional Resources - 51<br />
Course Planning and Design - 35<br />
Course Planning - 35<br />
References - 36<br />
Cultural Dimensions - 10<br />
D<br />
Diversity in The Classroom - 39<br />
References - 42<br />
Duties of GTAs - 2<br />
General Assistant to a Professor - 3<br />
Grader - 3<br />
Laboratory Assistant - 3<br />
Recitation or Discussion Leader - 2<br />
Tutor - 3<br />
E<br />
Effective Instruction - 15<br />
E (Continued)<br />
Additional Resources - 17<br />
Effective Communication Skills - 17<br />
Instructional Planning - 16<br />
Monitoring Student Progress - 17<br />
Summary - 17<br />
Establishing the Classroom Climate - 33<br />
Allow for Student Input into Course<br />
Framework - 34<br />
Communicate Interpersonal Sensitivity - 34<br />
Get to Know Your Students - 33<br />
Have High Student Expectations - 34<br />
Promote and Provide Multicultural<br />
Viewpoints - 34<br />
Provide All Students the Opportunity to<br />
Participate - 34<br />
Use a Variety of Instructional<br />
Strategies - 34<br />
Evaluating Student Performance - 94<br />
F<br />
FUTURES - VII<br />
G<br />
Graduate Teaching Assistants As Writing<br />
Teachers - 33<br />
Recommended Reading - 33<br />
GTA-to-GTA Advice - 126<br />
Additional Resources - 127<br />
H<br />
How Students Learn - 46<br />
Additional Information - 46<br />
I<br />
Incorporating Instructional Technology - 61<br />
Additional Resources - 61<br />
Instructional Support and Services - 108<br />
K<br />
Keeping Records - 95<br />
L<br />
Learning Styles and Preferences - 46<br />
References - 47<br />
List of Contributors - VIII
M<br />
Modes of Teaching - 21<br />
Additional Resources - 22<br />
Case Study - 21<br />
Collaborative Learning Groups - 21<br />
Concept Checks - 21<br />
Large/Small Group Discussion - 22<br />
Research Projects - 21<br />
N<br />
Notes on Effective Learning - 69<br />
O<br />
Overview of the Contents - X<br />
P<br />
Planning A Class - 64<br />
Preface<br />
Acknowledgements - VI<br />
Preferences for Good Practice in<br />
Undergraduate Education - 47<br />
Additional Resources - 50<br />
Bibliography - 50<br />
Preparing the Professional Portfolio - 111<br />
Collecting Materials for a Professional<br />
Portfolio - 112<br />
Developing a Professional Portfolio - 111<br />
Organizing a Professional Portfolio - 111<br />
References - 113<br />
Bibliography - 50<br />
Additional Resources - 50<br />
Principles for Good Practice in Undergraduate<br />
Education - 47<br />
Professional/Ethical/Legal Responsibilities for<br />
Graduate Assistants - 118<br />
R<br />
Recommending ESL for International Teaching<br />
Assistant - 99<br />
Reference Guide to Campus Resources - 131<br />
Reflective Practice - 104<br />
Steps to Becoming a Reflective<br />
Practitioner - 104<br />
Role of the TA as a Faculty/Student<br />
Liaison - 98<br />
S<br />
Safety and Emergency Procedures in The<br />
Classroom - 120<br />
S (Continued)<br />
Instructor's Responsibility - 120<br />
Supplemental Information - 120<br />
Safety Considerations - 73<br />
Laboratory Safety Guidelines - 73<br />
Section I - 1<br />
Introduction - 1<br />
What It Means to be a GA at<br />
NC A&T SU - 1<br />
Section II - 10<br />
International GTAs - 10<br />
Language Requirements - 10<br />
Section III - 14<br />
Foundations of Good Teaching - 14<br />
Overview - 14<br />
References - 14<br />
Section IV - 28<br />
Orientation at NC A&T <strong>State</strong><br />
<strong>University</strong> - 28<br />
Getting Started - 28<br />
Checklist for Teaching - 29<br />
Additional Resources - 32<br />
Section V - 44<br />
Helping Student Learn - Overview - 44<br />
Helping Students Learn - 45<br />
Section VI - 54<br />
Multiple Instructional Strategies,<br />
Situations, Techniques, Technologies,<br />
and Tools - 54<br />
Section VII - 81<br />
Grades and ClassroomManagement - 81<br />
Testing and Grading - 81<br />
Introduction - 81<br />
Grading Assignments and<br />
Activities - 82<br />
Testing - 86<br />
Section VIII - 102<br />
Professional Development - 102<br />
Overview - 102<br />
Audio/Video Observation - 103<br />
Case Studies - 102<br />
Professional Organization<br />
Membership - 102<br />
Teaching Journals - 102<br />
Teaching Portfolios - 103<br />
136
S (Continued)<br />
Section IX - 114<br />
Graduate Assistantship Administrative<br />
Policy - 114<br />
Section X - 125<br />
How to Help GTAs Be Successful - 125<br />
Checklist for the Supervising<br />
Professor - 125<br />
Standards for Graduate Teaching<br />
Assistants - 4<br />
Assessment - 8<br />
Communications and Technology - 7<br />
Content Pedagogy - 4<br />
Diverse Learners - 5<br />
Knowledge, Skills, and Attitude to be an<br />
Effective GTA - 4<br />
Motivation and Management - 7<br />
Multiple Instructional Strategies - 6<br />
Planning - 7<br />
Reflective Practice: Professional Growth - 8<br />
School and Community Involvement - 9<br />
Student Development - 4<br />
Strategies to Enhance Learning - 75<br />
Table of Instructional Activities - 76<br />
Additional Resources - 77<br />
Student Initiated Programs and Unfunded<br />
Projects - 124<br />
Student Surveys - 105<br />
Additional Resources - 107<br />
Suggestions for The First Day of Class - 37<br />
T<br />
Teaching Laboratory Sections - 70<br />
Accidents and Incidents - 72<br />
Clean Up Procedures - 71<br />
Lost and Found - 72<br />
Quizzes and the Final Examination - 72<br />
Reviewing the Experiment for the Day - 71<br />
Safety Tips - 71<br />
Teaching Tips - 72<br />
Teaching Methods and Active Learning - 23<br />
Teaching Strategies for a Diverse Student<br />
Body - 78<br />
Teaching Through Discussion - 63<br />
References - 63<br />
Teaching with Technology - 54<br />
Auditory Media - 56<br />
Computers and Instruction - 59<br />
T (Continued)<br />
Media (Audio-Visual Aids) - 55<br />
Motion Media - 56<br />
Visual Media - 55<br />
The Teacher - Student Relationship - 100<br />
References - 101<br />
The Ten Commandments of Teaching - 15<br />
Time Management in The Classrooms - 53<br />
Tips for Conducting The Class - 38<br />
Traits of Effective Teaching - 18<br />
Additional Resources - 20<br />
Teaching Styles - 20<br />
What Can Graduate Students Do To<br />
Be More Effective TAs? - 20<br />
Types of Graduate Assistant Roles and<br />
Duties - 2<br />
Graduate Administrative Assistant - 2<br />
Graduate Research Assistant - 2<br />
Graduate Teaching Assistant - 2<br />
Graduate Teaching Assistant - 2<br />
U<br />
<strong>University</strong>-Based Technology Transfer - 123<br />
<strong>University</strong> Contacts - IX<br />
Using Your Voice - 79<br />
References - 80<br />
137